Willhaf House Interior Restoration Van Buren, Arkansas ... · 5210 Grand Avenue Van Buren, Arkansas...

Willhaf House Interior Restoration

Van Buren, Arkansas University of Arkansas - Fort Smith

Project Manual

December 30, 2019

prepared by

John Milner Associates Preservation 3200 Lee Highway

Arlington, Virginia 22207

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION TABLE OF CONTENTS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS Page No. 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division/Section Title Pages Division 0 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid 2 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 8 00 31 26 Existing Hazardous Material Information 2 00 41 13 Bid Form 4 00 52 13 Agreement Form (AIA Document A101) 8 00 61 13 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 3 00 65 19.13 Release of Claims 2 00 65 19.19 Consent of Surety 1 00 72 00 General Conditions (AIA Document A201) 38 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 3 Division 1 – General Requirements 01 10 00 Summary 4 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures 3 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 4 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 4 01 51 00 Safeguarding the Building 2 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Archeology Site Protection 3 01 60 00 Product Requirements 2 01 70 00 Execution Requirements 3 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 4 Division 2 – Existing Conditions 02 41 19 Selective Demolition 7 02 50 00 Site Preparation 6 Division 3 – Concrete 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 20 Division 4 – Masonry Not Used Division 5 – Metals

Not Used Division 6 – Wood and Plastics 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 7 06 40 00 Finish Carpentry 7


Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 2 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 2 Division 8 – Doors and Windows 08 01 52 Wood Window Restoration 5 08 03 14 Wood Door Restoration 6 08 71 00 Hardware 3 08 80 00 Glazing 4 Division 9 – Finishes 09 03 64 Wood Flooring Restoration 3 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 4 09 91 10 Painting 8 Division 10 – Specialties 10 28 19 Tub and Shower Enclosures 3 Division 11 – Equipment 11 90 00 Miscellaneous Equipment 2 Division 12 – Furnishings

Not Used Division 13 – Special Construction

Not Used Division 14 – Conveying Equipment

Not Used Division 21 – Fire Suppression 21 01 00 General Fire Suppression Provisions 8 21 05 01 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 8 21 05 53 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment 3 21 13 01 Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 8 Division 22 – Plumbing

Not Used


Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditions

Not Used Division 26 – Electrical 26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 7 26 05 03 Raceways and Boxes 6 26 05 19 Wire and Cable 2 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 2 26 50 00 Lighting 4 Division 27 – Communications

Not Used Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 28 30 00 Security Detection Alarm and Monitoring 2 28 46 00 Fire Detection and Alarm 8 Division 31 – Earthwork 31 23 00 Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling 8 31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 8 Division 32 – Exterior Improvements 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 14 32 92 19 Seeding 5 Division 33 – Utilities 33 05 05 Testing of Pipelines 6 33 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 10 33 14 00 Water Distribution 11 33 14 19 Valves, Hydrants and Appurtenances 10 33 40 00 Storm Drainage 7


THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

WILLHAF HOUSE EXTERIOR RESTORATION INVITATION TO BID VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 11 16 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 00 11 16 - INVITATION TO BID University of Arkansas at Fort Smith Willhaf House Interior Restoration 5210 Grand Avenue Van Buren, Arkansas Fort Smith, Arkansas 72903 UAFS Project No. AX-20-007 1. You are invited to bid on a General Contract for the interior restoration of the Willhaf House located at

111 North Third Street, Van Buren, Arkansas, for the Board of Trustees of the University of Arkansas acting for and on behalf of the University of Arkansas -Fort Smith, hereinafter termed Owner. The bids shall be on a lump sum basis.

2. There will be a Pre-Bid Conference held at 9:30 a.m., local time, on Tuesday, January 21, 2020 at

the Plant Operations Building on the UAFS campus, 500 North 51st Street, Fort Smith, Arkansas. It will be followed by a tour of the Willhaf House, 111 North Third Street, Van Buren, Arkansas, led by members of the design team. Attendance by proposed general contractor bidders and other interested parties is strongly recommended. The University reserves the right to schedule additional meetings, if it determines them to be in its best interests.

3. The Owner will receive bids until 2:00 p.m., local time, February 11, 2020. Bids may be mailed or

delivered to the University of Arkansas - Fort Smith Procurement Services Office located at: Mail Delivery: P.O. Box 3649 Fort Smith, AR 72913 Hand Delivery: 5317B Grand Avenue Fort Smith, AR 72903

Bids received after this time will not be accepted. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at the time and date mentioned. Interested parties are invited to attend. The bid opening will be held in the Business Center Conference Room #104 located at 5317B Grand Avenue, Fort Smith, AR.

4. The Owner, unless designated to another entity, supervises the bidding and awarding of all construction

contracts, approves contracts, change orders, requests for payment and ensures that on-site inspections are accomplished.

5. The Project Manual in PDF file format may be downloaded from the University of Arkansas – Fort

Smith website using the following link any time beginning January 13, 2020. Bidders may make as many copies of the Project Manual as are needed for bidding purposes and to distribute to subcontract bidders.

http://www.uafs.edu/procurement/current-bid-opportunities. 6. Project Drawings in PDF format may be obtained any time beginning January 13, 2020 by emailing the

architect at the following address: [email protected]

Bidders may make as many copies of the Project Drawings as are needed for bidding purposes and to distribute to subcontract bidders.

7. Obtaining contract documents through any source other than that listed above is not advisable due to

the risks of receiving incomplete or inaccurate information, and the bidder runs the risk of basing

WILLHAF HOUSE EXTERIOR RESTORATION INVITATION TO BID VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 11 16 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

bidder’s proposal on such information. The documents obtained from the University of Arkansas – Fort Smith website and from the project architect are considered the official version and take precedence if any discrepancies occur.

8. Information about visiting the house during the bidding period can be found in the Instructions to

Bidders section of the Project Manual. 9. Bid Security in the form of a cashier’s check or acceptable Bid Bond and in the amount of five

percent (5%) of the total base bid must accompany each bid in excess of $ 20,000.00 in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.

10. Bidders are hereby notified that any bidder who desires to enter into Contract for this work must

comply with disclosure requirements pursuant to Governor Executive Order 98-04. Submission to the Owner of completed Disclosure forms will be a condition of the Contract. The Owner cannot enter into any contract which does not obligate the contractor to require the submission of Disclosure forms for subcontractors.

11. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, and to waive any formalities. 12. This invitation does not commit the Owner to pay any cost incurred in the preparation of bids. 13. Bidders shall conform to the requirements of the Arkansas licensing laws and regulations for

contractors, and shall be licensed before his bid is submitted unless the project is federally funded and therefore excepted by Ark. Code Ann. §17-25-315.

There shall be only one bid submitted per State Contractors license. Bidders will be required to indicate license number on bid form beneath signature when bidding $ 50,000.00 or more.

14. Pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-203, the State encourages all small and minority business enterprises to submit bids for capital improvements. Encouragement is also made to all general contractors that in the event they subcontract portions of their work, consideration be given to the identified groups.

15. The minimum acceptable preservation experience required for this project is outlined in the Instructions to Bidders section of the Project Manual. As part of the bidding process a resume of similar restoration work performed by the Contractor and certain subcontractors will be required.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 21 13-1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

SECTION 00 21 13 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. BIDDING DOCUMENTS. Bidders may obtain complete sets of Contract Documents as set forth

in the Invitation to Bid. Complete sets of Contract Documents must be used in preparing bids; neither Owner nor Architect assume responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Contract Documents. Obtaining Contract documents through any source other than as described in the Invitation to Bid is not advisable due to the risks of receiving incomplete or inaccurate information, and the bidder runs the risk of basing bidder’s proposal on such information. The documents obtained through the Architect or his representative(s) or the University of Arkansas at Fort Smith Procurement Office are considered the official version and take precedence if any discrepancies occur. The fact that documents used for bidding purposes are named “contract documents “does not diminish in any way the right of the Owner to reject any and all bids and to waive any formality.

2. EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK. 2.1 Bidder shall examine the Contract Documents and visit the project site of work. Bidder shall

become familiar with all existing conditions and limitations under which the Work is to be performed, and shall base bid on items necessary to perform the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents. No allowance will be made to Bidder because of lack of such examination or knowledge. The submission of a Bid shall be construed as conclusive evidence that the Bidder has made such examination.

2.2 For those bidders wishing to examine the interior of the Willhaf House, or to see the site, contact Tom

Wing, Site Manager of the Drennen-Scott House at 479-208-0728 (cell) to make an appointment. Leave a message if the phone is not answered. Mr. Wing will meet individual bidders at the Willhaf House and provide access. Bring your own flashlight. He will be available on Mondays thru Fridays, January 15 – February 7.

3. INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DURING BIDDING. 3.1 All references to the Owner shall be interpreted to mean the University of Arkansas Board of

Trustees acting for and on the behalf of the University of Arkansas - Fort Smith. 3.2 If any person contemplating submitting a Bid is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the

Contract Documents or finds discrepancies in or omissions from any part of the Contract Documents, he may submit to the Architect a written request for an interpretation or correction thereof not later than five (5) calendar days before Bid opening.

3.3 Address all communications regarding the Contract Documents to the Architect: John Milner

Associates Preservation, 3200 Lee Highway, Arlington, Virginia 22207 (phone 571-699-3862), email at [email protected].

3.4 Interpretation or correction of the Contract Documents will be made only by Addendum and will be

mailed, e-mailed or delivered to each Bidder of record by the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for oral explanations or interpretation of the Contract Documents.

3.5 Addenda issued during the bidding period will be incorporated into the Contract Documents.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 21 13 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

4. SUBSTITUTIONS. 4.1 Materials, products, and equipment described in the Contract Documents establish a standard of

required function and a minimum desired quality or performance level, or other minimum dimensions and capacities, to be met by any proposed substitution. Acceptability of substitutions will not be considered during bidding period.

4.2 In some cases, prior approval of material or equipment, or both shall be obtained from Owner in

order to obtain the desired color, size, visual appearance, and other features specified. 5. TYPE OF BID. 5.1 The Work under this Contract will be awarded under a stipulated sum contract to the bidder with

the lowest responsible base bid amount. No segregated bids or assignments will be considered. Bids are to include all labor, materials, equipment, sales tax, social security tax, State Unemployment Insurance and all other like items necessary to complete this project.

5.2 Any estimate of quantities is approximate only and shall be the basis for receiving unit price bids

for each item, but shall not be considered by the Bidder as the actual quantities that may be required for the completion of the proposed work. Bidder shall state a unit price for every item of work named in the Proposal. Bidder shall include, in the unit prices, furnishing of labor, materials, tools, equipment, and apparatus of every description to construct, erect, and finish the Work. The unit price bid for the items shall be shown numerically and in the appropriate spaces provided on the Bid Form. Such figures shall be clear and distinctly legible so that no question can arise as to their intent or meaning. Unit price bids and totals shown in the Bid Form shall not include costs of engineering, advertising, printing and appraising.

6. PREPARATION OF BID. Bid shall be made on an unaltered Bid Form identical to the form

included with the Contract Documents. Fill in all blank spaces and submit one original. Bids shall be signed with name typed below the signature. Where Bidder is a corporation, bids shall be signed with the legal name of the corporation followed by the name of the state of incorporation, contractor’s license number issued by the Contractors Licensing Board, and the signature of an authorized officer of the corporation.

6.1 Bids submitted by a “Joint Venture/Joint Adventure” shall be signed by representatives of each

component part of the Joint Venture. The licenses of each component part of the Joint Venture shall also be listed in the bid submittal. Therefore, joint venture bidders shall indicate at least two (2) signatures and two (2) license numbers on the Bid Form. Exception: Joint Ventures who have been properly licensed with the Arkansas Contractors Licensing Board as a “Joint Venture” need only to indicate the joint venture license number on the Bid Form. Joint Venture bidders shall indicate at least two (2) signatures on the Bid Form even if they are licensed as a joint venture.

6.2 Bidders shall submit the following as part of their bid:

a. A listing of a minimum of three (3) previous restoration projects similar to this project completed by the bidder since 2008, including location, cost, date completed, and owner’s name and address.


b. A resume of the personal experience of the key supervisory personnel who will be directly involved in the execution of the project indicating that they have worked on the projects listed in Subparagraph 6.2.a, or similar, projects. This includes both key personnel of the general contractor and of key subcontractors.

7. BID GUARANTEE AND BONDS. 7.1 Each bid proposal shall include a bid security in the amount of five percent of the total bid

offered, if the bid is in excess of $20,000.00. The bidder will be required to submit a bidder’s deposit, which includes enclosing a cashier’s check payable to the order of the OWNER drawn upon a bank or trust company doing business in Arkansas or by a corporate bid bond in an amount equal to five (5) percent of the bid. The bidder shall include in the bid the bid bond amount so that the bid represents the total cost to the Owner of all work included in the contract.

7.2 The bid bond shall indemnify the Owner against failure of the Contractor to execute and deliver the

contract and necessary bond (Performance and Payment Bond) for faithful performance of the contract. The bid bond shall provide that the contractor or surety must pay the damage, loss, cost and expense subject to the amount of the bid security directly arising out of the Contractor’s default in failing to execute and deliver the contract and bonds.

7.2 Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered

until the Contract has been executed and bonds if required, have been furnished, or until specified time has elapsed so that bids may be withdrawn, or all bids have been rejected.

7.3 Should Bidder fail to enter into a contract and furnish the required bonds and insurance certificates

within ten (10) days after receipt of Intent to Award, the bid guarantee will be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages.

8. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND. Performance and Payment Bonds are not required

for bids $35,000.00 or under. For work exceeding $35,000.00, the bidder shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in the amount equal to 100 percent of contract price, on a form identical to the Arkansas Statutory Performance and Payment Bond Form included with the Contract Documents as security for faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder within ten days after receipt of the Intent to Award. The bond shall be written by a surety company qualified and authorized to do business in the State of Arkansas. The bond shall be executed by a resident agent or a non-resident agent and shall be licensed by the Insurance Commissioner to represent the surety company executing the bond and filing with the bond the agent’s Power of Attorney as his authority. The bond shall be written in favor of the Owner. Contractor shall file the bond with the Circuit Clerk in the county where the Work is to be performed. Failure to deliver said bonds, as specified, shall be considered as having abandoned the Contract and the bid security will be retained as liquidated damages. The bidder shall include in the bid the Performance and Payment bond amount so that the bid represents the total cost to the Owner of all work included in the contract.

9. SUBCONTRACTORS. Name of principal subcontractors shall be listed where indicated on the

Bid Form in accordance with Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-204 and the contract documents. All prime contractors, as a condition to perform construction work for and in the State of Arkansas, shall use no other subcontractors when the subcontractor’s portion of the project is $50,000.00 or


more, except those qualified and licensed by the Contractors Licensing Board and qualified in Mechanical (HVAC), Plumbing, Electrical and Roofing and Sheet Metal.

A bidder should request clarification from the Architect if the bidder determines a type of work (mechanical –indicative of heating, air conditioning, ventilation, and refrigeration; electrical – indicative of wiring and illuminating fixtures; plumbing; roofing and sheetmetal work - indicative of roofing application) is a component of the project, but space has not been provided on the bid form for the listing of such or if the bid form lists a type of work that is not a component of the project. Clarification should be made in accordance with Instruction 3.2.

9.1 For those bids where the listed subcontract work is $50,000.00 or more, the prime contractor must

make a decision as to which subcontractor he intends to use. The prime contractor shall place the names of each subcontractor and indicate whether the amount of the listed work is $50,000.00 or more in the space provided on the Bid Form. The prime contractor may use his own forces to do the listed work, however, if the listed work is $50,000.00 or more, the prime contractor must be qualified and licensed by the Arkansas Contractors Licensing Board to perform the listed work. Once the prime contractor determines his own forces will be used, he shall place his name, and indicate in the space provided on the Bid Form whether the amount of the listed work is $50,000.00 or more. Failure to complete the form correctly shall cause the bid to be declared non-responsive, and the bid will not receive consideration.

A subcontractor, including the prime contractor listed as using his own forces, may subcontract a portion of the listed work. However, a subcontractor is prohibited from subcontracting the work in its entirety.

9.2.1 In the event the amount of the listed subcontract work is below $50,000.00, the Prime Contractor

shall place the names of the person or firm performing the work and indicate in the space provided on the Bid Form that the listed work is under $50,000.00.

9.2.2 It shall be mandatory that any subcontractors listed on the Bid Form by the Prime Contractor is

awarded a contract under Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-204. Prime Contractors who submit a bid listing unlicensed subcontractors or use unlicensed subcontractors on a state project or any subcontractor not licensed by the Contractors Licensing Board who perform work having a value of $50,000.00 or more on a state project are subject to a civil penalty, after notice and hearing, of not less than $250.00 nor more than $500.00 and may be suspended from bidding on state projects. In the event that one (1) or more of the subcontractors named by the prime contractor in his successful bid thereafter refuse to perform his contract or offered contract, the prime contractor may substitute another subcontractor, after having obtained prior approval from the design professional, and the Owner.

9.3. Electrical License Requirement

a. No person shall perform electrical work on the contract without possessing an Arkansas State Master or Journeyman License from the Arkansas State Electrical Examiners Board. All electrical work and apprentice electricians shall be supervised by a Master or Journeyman Electrician on a one to one ratio.


b. All electricians shall have a copy of their license with them and shall be required to show it to an appropriate inspector upon request.

9.4 Pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9- 404, the Bidder may require listed subcontractors (mechanical,

plumbing, electrical and roofing/sheet metal) whose bid to the Contractor exceeds $50,000.00 to provide a Performance and Payment Bond to the Bidder.

10. SUBMITTAL. Submit bid on the Bid Form in an opaque, sealed envelope. Identify the envelope

with: project name and number, name of Bidder, and Arkansas Contractors License number; only one bid shall be submitted per State Contractors license number. Submit bids in accordance with the Invitation to Bid. All blanks on the form shall be filled out in ink or be typewritten. Erroneous entries, alterations, and erasures shall be lined out, initialed by the Bidder, and the corrected entry inserted on the Bid Form. Only those bids submitted on Owner supplied forms as found in these documents will be accepted.

10.1 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION. All bid information, proposals, forms, briefs, sales

brochures, etc. will become property of the Owner when submitted with a bid. All bid documents submitted by the bidder shall be available for public inspection after the bid opening. Proprietary pages and documents required to be submitted with bid must be clearly marked as such.

11. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL. Bidder may withdraw bid at any time before bid

opening and may resubmit up to the date and time designated for receipt of bids. No bid may be withdrawn or modified after time has been called for the bid opening. Oral modifications to bids will not be considered. Bidder may submit written modifications to bid in writing, by telegraph, or by facsimile at any time prior to the expiration of the bidding time and date and shall so word the modification(s) as to not reveal the amount of the original bid. Telegraph or facsimile modifications shall require written confirmation over the Bidder's signature within 24 hours after bid opening.

12. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS. The Owner shall have the right to disqualify bids (before

or after opening), which includes but is not limited to, evidence of collusion with intent to defraud or other illegal practices upon the part of the Bidder, to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by other data required by the Contract Documents, or to reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular.

13. LATE BIDS. Late bids, bids en route, bids left at a location other than the Office of Procurement by

special carrier or other will not be considered. Bids must be in the Office of Procurement by or before the time as indicated on the Invitation to Bid

14. APPLICABLE LAWS. 14.1 Labor. Contractors employed upon the work will be required to conform to the labor laws of the

State of Arkansas and the various acts amendatory and supplementary thereto, and to all the laws, regulations, and legal requirements applicable thereto.

14.2 Discrimination. Bidder shall not discriminate against any employee, applicant for employment, or

subcontractor as provided by law. Bidder shall be responsible for ensuring that all subcontractors comply with federal and state laws and regulations related to discrimination. Upon a final


determination by a court or administrative body having proper jurisdiction that the Bidder has violated state or federal laws or regulations, the Owner may impose a range for appropriate remedies up to and including termination of the Contract.

14.3 Taxes. Bidder shall include in the bid all state sales tax, social security taxes, state unemployment

insurance, and all other items of like nature. It is the intent that the bid shall represent the total cost to the Owner of all work included in the contract. There are no provisions for a contractor to avoid taxes by using the tax exempt number of a state agency, board, commission or institutions. Said taxes shall be included in the bid price.

14.4 State licensing laws for Contractors. 14.5 Disclosure. Potential Bidders are hereby notified that any bidder who desires to enter into a contract

not exempted from the disclosure requirements, that disclosure is a condition of the Contract and that the Owner cannot enter into any such contract for which disclosures are not made and the language of paragraphs a, b, and c below will be included in the body of any contract awarded.

Potential Bidders are hereby notified that:

a. Disclosure is required to be a condition of any present or future subcontract for which the total consideration is greater than twenty-five thousand dollars ($25,000.00).

b. The Contractor shall require any present or future subcontractor, for which the subcontract

amount is greater than $25,000.00, to complete and sign the Contract and Disclosure and Certification. The contractor shall ensure that any agreement, current or future between the contractor and a subcontractor for which the total consideration is greater than $25,000.00 shall contain the following:

Failure to make any disclosure required by Governor Executive Order 98-04, or any violation of any rule, regulation or adopted pursuant to that Order, shall be material breach of the term of this subcontract The party who fails to make the required disclosure or who violates the rule, regulation, or policy shall be subject to all legal remedies available to the contractor.

c. The Contractor shall transmit a copy of the subcontractor’s disclosure form to the agency and a statement containing the dollar amount of the subcontract within ten (10) days upon receipt of subcontractor’s disclosure.

Note: A copy of the “Contract and Grant Disclosure and Certification Form” is included

at the end of Section 00 73 00, Supplementary Conditions. 14.6 Minority Participation: Pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-203, the Owner and the State of

Arkansas encourage all small, minority, and women business enterprises to submit bids for capital improvements. Encouragement is also made to all general contractors that in the event they subcontract portions of their work, consideration is given to the identified groups.


14.7 The bidding, award and administration of the contract shall be made pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. §14-4-1401 et seq., Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-101 et seq., and Ark. Code Ann. § 22-2-101 et seq.

15. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. The amount of liquidated damages to be assessed shall be in

accordance with the amount indicated in the Bid Form (Section 00 41 13). Bidder understands and agrees that under the terms of the Contract to be awarded, if the Contractor fails to complete the work within the time limit specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the Owner as Liquidated Damages, and not in the nature of a penalty the sum specified in the Bid Form for each day completion is delayed. It is further understood and agreed by bidder that the said sum fixed as Liquidated Damages is a reasonable sum considering the damages that Owner will sustain in the event of any delay in completion of the Work, and said sum is herein agreed upon and fixed as Liquidated Damages because of difficulty in ascertaining the exact amount of damages that may be sustained by such delay.

16. PRE-BID CONFERENCE. Refer to Invitation to Bid, Section 00 11 16, for information

concerning any Pre-bid Conferences. 17 OPENING. Bids will be opened as identified in the Invitation to Bid, Section 00 11 16.

18 EVALUATION and CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 18.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsive qualified bidder provided

the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the bids submitted exceed the amount appropriated for the contract, the Owner may negotiate an award to the apparent responsible low bidder if the low bid does not exceed the amount appropriated by more than 25%.

18.2 The bidder shall be considered qualified if the Owner’s evaluation of the list of projects and the

resume of key supervisory personnel described in Paragraph 6.2 indicates that the bidder and the bidder’s key supervisory personnel are sufficiently experienced in the performance on restoration projects similar to this project.

18.3 The Owner shall have the right to waive any formalities in a bid received and to accept the bid

which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in its best interests. The Owner shall have the right to accept any or all bids for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days.

18.4 Alternate Bids: If the Bidding Documents include alternate bids the apparent low bidder will be

determined by applying those alternate bids that are accepted to the Base Bid amount.

18.5 Tie Bids. If two or more sealed bids are equal in amount, meet Bidding Document requirements, and are the lowest received by the time of the bid opening, then the apparent low bidder will be determined by lot (placing the name of the tie bidders into a container and drawing one name). The drawing will be conducted by the University of Arkansas - Fort Smith Procurement Department personnel, and another person so designated by the Owner in the presence of a witness and the tie bidders or representatives. The witness shall be an employee of the State of Arkansas. Documentation of the drawing shall be included on the bid tabulation and be signed by those present.


Nothing in the above and foregoing will diminish the Owner’s reserved right to reject any and all bids and to waive any formalities.

19. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. 19.1 The apparent low Bidder shall be prepared, if so required by the Owner, to present evidence of

experience, qualifications, and financial ability to carry out the terms of the Contract. Attention is called to the fact that the bidder in signing the proposal, represents that he has the financial ability and experience to carry out the work throughout its several stages within the time for completion set forth on the Bid Form.

19.2 The successful Bidder will be required to execute an Agreement with the Owner on a form identical

to the Agreement Form included with the Contract Documents and the Performance and Payment Bond and Certification of Insurance within ten days after receipt of the Intent to Award. Failure of the Bidder to do so may result in the Bidder being rejected and could result in disqualification and forfeiture of bid bond.

19.3 The successful Bidder will be required to furnish Owner with proof of insurance, as prescribed by

the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. END OF DOCUMENT

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION EXISTING HAZARDOUS MAT’L. INFORMATION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 31 26 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 00 31 26 – EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION

A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting

Requirements for Project. They provide Owner’s information for Bidders’ convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidder’s own investigations. They are made available for Bidder’s convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

B. An existing lead report for the interior spaces of the Project, prepared by Occupational &

Environmental Hazard Control, Inc. dated October 23, 2019, is available for viewing. A copy will be provided to any Bidder requesting same from the Architect. Send requests to [email protected].

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 00 21 13, Instructions to Bidders, for the Bidder’s responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions.

1.3 SUMMARY OF REPORT

A. The inspection was limited to the interior of the building. Of the 87 components tested, 45

contained lead in an amount above the HUD and Arkansas Health Department regulated level. It is important to note that the paint on the plaster walls and ceilings does not contain lead. In addition, the window sashes are free of lead based paint, having been restored during the last phase of work which included stripping existing paint.

B. A summary of the items that do have lead-based paint on their surfaces follows. 1. Room 101: Wood doors, wood door casings, wood plank walls, and wood access panel

to the attic. 2. Room 102: Wood doors, wood door casings, wood baseboards, and wood window

casings. The picture rail does not have lead paint. 3. Room 103: Wood doors, wood door casings, wood baseboards, wood plank ceiling, and

window casings (with the exception of Window 113).

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION EXISTING HAZARDOUS MAT’L. INFORMATION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 31 26 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

4. Room 106: Wood doors, wood door casings, wood plank walls, wood plank ceiling, and the wood closet components (Rooms 107 and 108) except for the white painted surfaces of Room 108 including shelving and shelving supports.

5. Room 109: Wood doors, wood door casings, and wood baseboards. 6. Room 110: Wood doors, wood door casings, wood baseboards, wood chairrail amd

apron, and wood picture rail. 7. Rooms 104 and 105 no longer exist. B. Bidders are responsible for verifying this information and for examining the extent of work

required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 00 31 26

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION BID FORM VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 41 13 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 00 41 13 -- BID FORM Bid Time: 2:00 p.m. Bid Date: February 11, 2020 Location: Business Center (Room 121) University of Arkansas - Fort Smith BID FROM: BID TO: University of Arkansas Board of Trustees acting for and on behalf of The University of

Arkansas - Fort Smith PROJECT: Willhaf House Interior Restoration Gentlemen: 1. Having carefully examined the Contract Documents for this project, as well as the premises and all

conditions affecting the proposed construction, the undersigned proposes to provide all labor, materials, services, taxes and equipment necessary for, or incidental to, the construction of the project in accordance with the Contract Documents within the time set forth, for the lump sum base bid of:

$ . Dollar Amount Is To Be Shown Numerically

2. Allowances: Allowances described in Section 01 20 00, Price and Payment Procedures are included in

the Bid Price. 3. Alternate Bids: The undersigned Bidder proposes the amount below be deducted from the Base Bid if

the particular alternate bid(s) are accepted by the Owner. Amounts listed for each alternate bid include costs of related coordination, modification, or adjustment.

a. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any alternate, in any order, and to award or amend the

Contract accordingly. b. Acceptance or non-acceptance of any alternates by the Owner shall have no affect on the Contract

Time.

c. Schedule of Alternate Bids:

i. Alternate Bid No. 1: 4-Inch Fire Line from City Main to the House. Deduct $__________________________________________________________________ Dollar Amount is to be Shown Numerically.


4. Completion Time: Bidder agrees that the work will be substantially complete and ready for final payment in accordance with the Contract Documents within one hundred seventy (170) consecutive calendar days of the date established in a written notice to proceed.

5. The undersigned, in compliance with the Contract Documents for the construction of the above named

project, does hereby declare:

a. That the undersigned understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any formality.

b. That, if awarded the Contract, the undersigned will enter into an Agreement, on a form identical to the form included in the Contract Documents and execute required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after receipt of the Intent to Award, will commence work within five (5) days after the date of the Notice to Proceed, and will complete the Contract fully within the time for completion as indicated. Should the undersigned fail to fully complete the work within the above stated time, he shall pay the Owner as fixed, agreed and liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum of One Hundred Fifty Dollars ($150.00) for each calendar day of delay until the work is completed or accepted.

c. The undersigned further agrees that the bid security payable to Owner and accompanying this proposal shall become the property of the Owner as liquidated damages if the undersigned fails to execute the Contract or to deliver the required bonds to the Owner within ten (10) days from receipt of the Intent to Award as these acts constitute a breach of the Contractor’s duties.

d. That this bid may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the bid opening. e. The undersigned understands that the Owner's intent is to construct all facilities proposed within the

limits established by the funds appropriated for the project. f. The names of subcontractors and the nature of the work to be performed by each one have been

included on the Bid Form. g. Bids submitted by a “Joint Venture” shall be signed by representatives of each component part of

the Joint Venture. The licenses of each component part of the Joint Venture shall also be listed in the bid submittal. Therefore, joint venture bidders shall indicate at least two (2) signatures and two (2) license numbers on the Bid Form. Exception: Joint Ventures who have been properly licensed with the Arkansas Contractors Licensing Board as a “Joint Venture” need only to indicate the joint venture license number on the Bid Form. Joint Venture bidders shall indicate at least two (2) signatures on the Bid Form even if they are licensed as a joint venture.

7. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid. a. Bid security. b. Listing of Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical and Roofing Subcontractors, if required.

c. Listing of previous comparable projects (see Instructions to Bidders, Item 6.2). d. Resume of personal experience of key supervisory personnel (see Instructions to Bidders, Items 6.2

and 18.2). 8. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of and inclusion as a part of the Contract Documents the

following addenda: No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated


9. LISTING OF MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL AND ROOFING

SUBCONTRACTORS ALL MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL AND ROOFING SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL BE LISTED REGARDLESS OF QUALIFICATIONS, LICENSURES OR WORK AMOUNT. FAILURE TO NAME THE SUBCONTRACTOR IN THE SPACE PROVIDED SHALL CAUSE THE BID TO BE DECLARED NON-RESPONSIVE AND THE BID WILL NOT RECEIVE CONSIDERATION. Indicate the Name(s), of each entity performing the listed work: MECHANICAL (Indicative of HVAC) Name:____________________________________________________ License No.__________________ Is the amount of work $20,000.00 or over: Yes___ No___ ELECTRICAL (Indicative of wiring and illuminating fixtures) Name:____________________________________________________ License No.__________________ Is the amount of work $20,000.00 or over: Yes___ No___ PLUMBING (Indicative of piping applications) Name:____________________________________________________ License No.__________________ Is the amount of work $20,000.00 or over: Yes___ No___ Respectfully Submitted: Name of Bidder (Typed or Printed) Address BY : (Signature and Title)

Contractor’s Joint Venture License Number(s) or Contractor’s License No.


Telephone Number Fax Number

Federal ID Number or Social Security Number Date of Bid

AIA®

Document A101TM – 2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum

AIA Document A101™ – 2017. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:52:19 on 08/25/2017 underOrder No.8622476473 which expires on 07/21/2018, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2050118775)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

The parties should complete A101™–2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, contemporaneously with this Agreement. AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified.

ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA® Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document.

AGREEMENT made as of the « » day of « » in the year « » (In words, indicate day, month and year.) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, legal status, address and other information) « »« » « » « » « » and the Contractor: (Name, legal status, address and other information) « »« » « » « » « » for the following Project: (Name, location and detailed description) « » « » « » The Architect: (Name, legal status, address and other information) « »« » « » « » « » The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.


2

TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 4 CONTRACT SUM 5 PAYMENTS 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be: (Check one of the following boxes.)

[ « » ] The date of this Agreement.

[ « » ] A date set forth in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.

[ « » ] Established as follows: (Insert a date or a means to determine the date of commencement of the Work.)

« »

If a date of commencement of the Work is not selected, then the date of commencement shall be the date of this Agreement. § 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement of the Work. § 3.3 Substantial Completion § 3.3.1 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work: (Check one of the following boxes and complete the necessary information.)

[ « » ] Not later than « » ( « » ) calendar days from the date of commencement of the Work.


3

[ « » ] By the following date: « »

§ 3.3.2 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, if portions of the Work are to be completed prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of such portions by the following dates:

Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date

§ 3.3.3 If the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion as provided in this Section 3.3, liquidated damages, if any, shall be assessed as set forth in Section 4.5. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be « » ($ « » ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2 Alternates § 4.2.1 Alternates, if any, included in the Contract Sum:

Item Price

§ 4.2.2 Subject to the conditions noted below, the following alternates may be accepted by the Owner following execution of this Agreement. Upon acceptance, the Owner shall issue a Modification to this Agreement. (Insert below each alternate and the conditions that must be met for the Owner to accept the alternate.)

Item Price Conditions for Acceptance

§ 4.3 Allowances, if any, included in the Contract Sum: (Identify each allowance.)

Item Price

§ 4.4 Unit prices, if any: (Identify the item and state the unit price and quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)

Item Units and Limitations Price per Unit ($0.00)

§ 4.5 Liquidated damages, if any: (Insert terms and conditions for liquidated damages, if any.) « » § 4.6 Other: (Insert provisions for bonus or other incentives, if any, that might result in a change to the Contract Sum.) « »


4

ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS § 5.1 Progress Payments § 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: « » § 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the « » day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the amount certified to the Contractor not later than the « » day of the « » month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment of the amount certified shall be made by the Owner not later than « » ( « » ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.) § 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form, and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy, as the Architect may require. This schedule of values shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. § 5.1.6 In accordance with AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: § 5.1.6.1 The amount of each progress payment shall first include:

.1 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work;

.2 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction, or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing; and

.3 That portion of Construction Change Directives that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified.

§ 5.1.6.2 The amount of each progress payment shall then be reduced by:

.1 The aggregate of any amounts previously paid by the Owner;

.2 The amount, if any, for Work that remains uncorrected and for which the Architect has previously withheld a Certificate for Payment as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017;

.3 Any amount for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless the Work has been performed by others the Contractor intends to pay;

.4 For Work performed or defects discovered since the last payment application, any amount for which the Architect may withhold payment, or nullify a Certificate of Payment in whole or in part, as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017; and

.5 Retainage withheld pursuant to Section 5.1.7. § 5.1.7 Retainage § 5.1.7.1 For each progress payment made prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner may withhold the following amount, as retainage, from the payment otherwise due: (Insert a percentage or amount to be withheld as retainage from each Application for Payment. The amount of retainage may be limited by governing law.) « Retainage shall be held in the amount of 5% of the contractor's request for payment. »


5

§ 5.1.7.1.1 The following items are not subject to retainage: (Insert any items not subject to the withholding of retainage, such as general conditions, insurance, etc.) « » § 5.1.7.2 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If the retainage established in Section 5.1.7.1 is to be modified prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, including modifications for Substantial Completion of portions of the Work as provided in Section 3.3.2, insert provisions for such modifications.) « When the value of the work reaches 50% of the scheduled value, including changes, the Owner may, but is not required to, reduce the amount of the retainage for subsequent pay requests. » § 5.1.7.3 Except as set forth in this Section 5.1.7.3, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor may submit an Application for Payment that includes the retainage withheld from prior Applications for Payment pursuant to this Section 5.1.7. The Application for Payment submitted at Substantial Completion shall not include retainage as follows: (Insert any other conditions for release of retainage upon Substantial Completion.) « » § 5.1.8 If final completion of the Work is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner shall pay the Contractor any additional amounts in accordance with Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017. § 5.1.9 Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. § 5.2 Final Payment § 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Article 12 of AIA Document A201–2017, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and

.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. § 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: « » ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION In the case of any dispute, claim or question, or disagreement arising from or related to the Project or arising out of this Contract, the parties shall first attempt resolution through mutual discussion. § 6.1 Initial Decision Maker The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, unless the parties appoint below another individual to serve as the Initial Decision Maker. (If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.) « »[campus official, such as director of engineering and construction, director of planning design and construction, etc.] « » « » « »


6

§ 6.2 Binding Dispute Resolution For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box.)

[ « » ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201–2017

[ « » ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction

[ « X » ] Other (Specify)

«Contractor’s claims against Owner shall be submitted to the Arkansas Claims Commission. »

If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be deemed a waiver by Owner of its sovereign immunity. ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017. § 7.1.1 If the Contract is terminated for the Owner’s convenience in accordance with Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017, then the Owner shall pay the Contractor a termination fee as follows: (Insert the amount of, or method for determining, the fee, if any, payable to the Contractor following a termination for the Owner’s convenience.) « » § 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017. ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201–2017 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. § 8.2 The Owner’s representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information) « » « » « » « » « » « » § 8.3 The Contractor’s representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information) « » « » « » « »


7

« » « » § 8.4 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days’ prior notice to the other party. § 8.5 Insurance and Bonds § 8.5.1 The Owner and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 8.5.2 The Contractor shall provide bonds as set forth in AIA Document A101™–2017 Exhibit A, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 8.6 Notice in electronic format, pursuant to Article 1 of AIA Document A201–2017, may be given in accordance with AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed, or as otherwise set forth below: (If other than in accordance with AIA Document E203–2013, insert requirements for delivering notice in electronic format such as name, title, and email address of the recipient and whether and how the system will be required to generate a read receipt for the transmission.) « » § 8.7 Other provisions: § 8.7.1 Equal Opportunity and Affirmative Action The Contractor shall comply with applicable laws, regulations and special requirements of the Contract Documents regarding equal employment opportunity and affirmative action programs. § 8.7.2 Certifications If not already provided, the Contractor will, immediately upon execution of this Agreement, provide the Owner with all certifications and representations required by the bid documents or required by Arkansas law. « » ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 This Agreement is comprised of the following documents:

.1 AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

.2 Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds

.3 AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction as amended

.4 AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E203-2013 incorporated into this Agreement.)

« »

.5 Drawings

Number Title Date

.6 Specifications

Section Title Date Pages

.7 Addenda, if any:


8

Number Date Pages

Portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding or proposal requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9.

.8 Other Exhibits:

(Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.)

[ « » ] AIA Document E204™–2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below:

(Insert the date of the E204-2017 incorporated into this Agreement.)

« »

[ « » ] The Sustainability Plan:

Title Date Pages

[ « » ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages

.9 Other documents, if any, listed below:

(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™–2017 provides that the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements, and other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. Any such documents should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.)

« »

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.

OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

« »« » « »« »(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 61 13 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 00 61 13 -- PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND Bond Number______________________ We , hereinafter referred to as Principal, and,

____________ ________________________ , hereinafter referred to as Surety, are held

and firmly bound unto The Board of Trustees of the University of Arkansas acting for and on behalf of

the University of Arkansas at Fort Smith, as obligee, hereinafter referred to as Owner, in the amount of

$____________ ________________ , said amount to be deemed a performance bond

payable to Owner under the terms of this Performance and Payment Bond Agreement. The Principal and

Surety state that the Surety is a solvent corporate surety company authorized to do business in the State of

Arkansas.

Principal has by written agreement dated entered into a Contract (the Contract)

with the Owner for: The

above referenced Contract is incorporated herein by reference.

Under this Performance and Payment Bond Agreement, the Principal and Surety shall be

responsible for the following:

a. The Principal shall faithfully perform the above referenced Contract, which is incorporated

herein by reference and shall pay all indebtedness for labor and materials furnished or performed under

the Contract.

b. In the event that the Principal fails to perform the Contract, the Principal and the Surety, jointly

and severally, shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all cost and damage which the Owner

may suffer by reason of Principal’s failure to perform the Contract. Said indemnification shall include,

but not be limited to, full reimbursement and repayment to the Owner for all outlays and expenses which

the Owner may incur in making good any such default or failure to perform the Contract by the Principal.

c. Principal shall pay all persons all indebtedness for labor or material furnished or performed

under the Contract and in doing so this obligation shall be null and void. In the event that Principal fails

to pay for such indebtedness, such persons shall have a direct right of action against the Principal and

Surety, jointly and severally, under this obligation, subject to the Owner’s priority.

d. Principal shall guarantee the faithful performance of the prevailing hourly wage clause as

provided in the Contract.

This bond given in accordance with Arkansas laws and regulations (including Ark. Code Ann. §

18-44-503, § 19-4-1405 and § 22-9-401 et seq.). The Surety guarantees that the Principal shall comply

with Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-308 (d) by payment and full compliance with all prevailing hourly wage


contract provisions where the contract amount exceeds the amount provided in Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-

302(1).

Any alteration which may be made in the terms of the Contract, or in the work to be done under it,

or the giving by the Owner of any extension of time for the performance of the contract, or any other

forbearance on the part of either the Owner or the Principal to the other shall not in any way release the

Principal and the Surety or Sureties or either or any of them, their heirs, personal representatives,

successors or assigns from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety or Sureties of any such alteration,

extension or forbearance being hereby waived. In no event shall the aggregate liability of the Surety

exceed the amount provided in the Contract.

This Performance and Payment Bond Agreement is binding upon the above named parties, and

their successors, heirs, assigns and personal representatives.

Executed by the parties who individually represent that each has the authority to enter into this

agreement.

BY: _________________________________________ Contractor Date BY: _________________________________________ Arkansas Resident Local Agent/Attorney-in-Fact Date (In accordance with Ark. Code Ann. § 22-9-402(b)) ______________________ Agent’s License Number Surety Company’s NAIC Number __________________________________________________________________________________ (Print) Agent Name Date ______________________________________ Address ______________________________________ City County State Zip Code Business Phone: _________________________________________________________ Fax: _________________________________________________________________ Email: _________________________________________________________________


THIS FORM IS THE ONLY PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND ACCEPTABLE

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION RELEASE OF CLAIMS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 65 19.13 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 00 65 19.13 -- RELEASE OF CLAIMS Comes the undersigned, who does hereby swear and affirm that:

1. My name is ___________________ , and

I am doing business as: ___________________________________________________________

and my legal address is:___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

2. Except as stated in Paragraph Four (4) below, pursuant to Contract #: __________________

which was executed on: _________________________________________ , on the following project:

______________________________________________________________________________

I have paid and have otherwise satisfied all obligations for all furnished materials and equipment, all work,

labor and services performed, and for all known claims against the Contractor arising in any manner in

connection with the performance of the above referenced contract for which the Owner might in any way be

held responsible.

3. Except as stated in Paragraph Four (4) below, to the best of my knowledge, information and

belief, the releases or waivers of Claims, attached hereto and incorporated herein, includes the above

referenced contract, all subcontractors, all suppliers of materials and equipment, and all performers of work,

labor or services who have or may have claims against the Owner arising in any manner out of the

performance of the Contract.

4. The Exceptions are: (if none exists, then indicate "none." The Contractor shall furnish a written

explanation to the Owner for each exception.)

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

_______ Affiant’s Signature Date

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION RELEASE OF CLAIMS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 65 19.13 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

Verification STATE OF ARKANSAS COUNTY OF _____________________________________ Subscribed and Sworn To before me this _________ day of - __ 20 _________. Notary Public My Commission Expires: _____________________________

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION CONSENT OF SURETY VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 65 19.19 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 00 65 19.19 -- CONSENT OF SURETY Comes the undersigned, who does hereby swear and affirm that: 1. My name is and I am an authorized representative of a surety company. 2. With regards to the Project DBA Project # ; Contract date ; Contractor; and the Project Owner ________ : I hereby approve the final payment to the contractor. I agree that the final payment to the contractor shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations as set forth in the contract with the State of Arkansas and this contractor. AFFIANT DATE VERIFICATION STATE OF ARKANSAS COUNTY OF ____________________________________ Subscribed and Sworn To before me this of , 20_____ . Notary Public My Commission Expires:__________________________________

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION CONSENT OF SURETY VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 00 65 19.19 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH


AIA®

Document A201TM – 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction


1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

For guidance in modifying this document to include supplementary conditions, see AIA Document A503™, Guide for Supplementary Conditions.

ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA® Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document.

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) « » « » THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) « »« » « » THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) « »« » « » TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES


2

INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 15.3.2, ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 Architect’s Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect’s Approvals 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 Architect’s Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1

Architect’s Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect’s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2 Architect’s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Architect’s Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2 Architect’s Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect’s Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect’s Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3 Architect’s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect’s Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys’ Fees 3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 Bonds, Lien 7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 Building Information Models Use and Reliance 1.8 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.4.4


3

Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2 Change Orders 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 Claims, Notice of 1.6.2, 15.1.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Compliance with Laws 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2

Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor’s 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.4 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Sum 2.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contractor’s Employees 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4


4

Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Contractor’s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work 2.2.2, 9.7 Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1 Contractor’s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Contractor’s Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.4 Costs 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Damages for Delay 6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2

Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Digital Data Use and Transmission 1.7 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 Employees, Contractor’s 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, or Materials 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4 Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner’s 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4


5

GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials and Substances 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11 Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Insurance, Contractor’s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.2, , 11.5 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1 Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of 11.5 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13 Interest 13.5 Interpretation 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1

Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.4.4, 3.4.5, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic’s Lien 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2


6

Notice 1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Notice of Claims 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Observations, Contractor’s 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1 Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Owner, Information and Services Required of the , 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Owner’s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.5, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work 2.4 Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2, 14.4 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9

Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.2 Proposal Requirements 1.1.1 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.3.1, 9.10.2


7

Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2 Separate Contractors, Definition of 6.1.1 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Site Visits, Architect’s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6

Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3 Substances, Hazardous 10.3 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 2.3.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 1.1.7, 2.3.4


8

Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 2.3.3 Termination of the Contractor Employment 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3

UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 9.1.2 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Liens 9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3 Warranty 3.5, 3.5.3, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2 Weather Delays 8.3, 15.1.6.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1


9

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. § 1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties. § 1.1.3 The Work The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors. § 1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. § 1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. § 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.


10

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties’ intentions and purposes in executing the Contract. § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect’s consultants. § 1.6 Notice § 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement. § 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery. § 1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, or other standards prescribed by the Owner to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data. § 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AIA Document G202™–2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party’s sole risk


11

and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 General § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. § 2.2 Evidence of the Owner’s Financial Arrangements § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately. § 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract only if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor’s request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents. § 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as “confidential,” the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose “confidential” information, after seven (7) days’ notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose “confidential” information to its employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information. § 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.


12

§ 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services. § 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.5 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. The Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 General § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed by the State of Arkansas. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. § 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.


13

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor’s proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 Labor and Materials § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.4.4 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with labor laws of the State of Arkansas and the various acts amendatory and supplementary thereto, and with other laws, ordinances and legal requirements applicable to the performance of the Work. § 3.4.5 The Work shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents by workers skilled and, when required, licensed in their respective trades.


14

§ 3.5 Warranty § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. § 3.5.3 The Contractor shall guarantee and warrant its work and materials, and the work and materials of its subcontractors, for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Warranty shall be for a longer period on certain items so designated in the specifications. The foregoing one-year guarantee and warranty shall not in any way limit, restrict, or affect the liability of Contractor or its subcontractors for indemnity as provided for in the Contract Documents, nor shall it in any way shorten the period of limitation fixed by law for filing of any action against Contractor for enforcement or for breach of any provisions of any Contract Document. Should Contractor elect to use any of the equipment in the building during construction period, Contractor shall make arrangements with the equipment supplier for any available extension of warranty of that equipment made necessary by such use. § 3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not such tax was in effect at that time. . § 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. Under Arkansas law the Owner, a state agency, is exempt from permit fees or inspections requirements of county or municipal ordinances. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15. § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice,


15

the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 Allowances § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,

.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;

.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 Superintendent § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. § 3.10 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules § 3.10.1 The Contractor, within ten (10) days after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project. § 3.10.2 The Contractor, within ten (10) days after being awarded the Contract, and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.


16

§ 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. § 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors. § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect’s approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities


17

for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. § 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. § 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor’s design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect. § 3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 Cutting and Patching § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 Cleaning Up § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. § 3.16 Access to Work The Contractor and its subcontractors shall allow the Owner, Architect and Owner’s other consultants access to the Work. § 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or


18

patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect. § 3.18 Indemnification § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 General § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement. The term Architect means Architect or Architect’s authorized representatives and shall include by definition “Architect/Engineer,” “Design Professional” and “Engineer” if these terms occur in the Contract Documents. § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.2 Administration of the Contract § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect’s services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and


19

suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.


20

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 Definitions § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor” does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. § 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.2.5 Where any of the provisions of this Article 5 conflict with the requirements of Arkansas law, including without limitation section 22-9-204 of the Arkansas Code, Arkansas law shall govern. § 5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. § 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and


21

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract. § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts § 6.1.1 The term “Separate Contractor(s)” shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12. § 6.2 Mutual Responsibility § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor’s Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or Separate Contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.


22

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 General § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 Change Orders § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 Construction Change Directives § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4.

§ 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. The Contractor shall bear the burden of


23

proving the necessity and the cost of a Change Order requested by the Contractor. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers’ compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;

.2 Net costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation and state sales tax, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and

.5 Net placing cost. [The following is an example of a formula that may be inserted at this point in the contract when applicable]

The adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be the sum of the Contractor Adjustment and Subcontractor Adjustment, calculated as follows: For work performed by Contractor:

Net cost of materials a State sales tax b Net placing cost c W.C. Insurance Premium and FICA tax d a+b+c+d Overhead and profit % multiplied by (a+b+c+d) e Allowable bond premium f CONTRACTOR ADJUSTMENT = a+b+c+d+e+f

For work performed by Subcontractors:

Net cost of materials a State sales tax b Net placing cost c W.C. Insurance Premium and FICA tax d a+b+c+d Overhead and profit % multiplied by (a+b+c+d) e Allowable bond premium f SUBCONTRACTOR ADJUSTMENT = a+b+c+d+e+f

§ 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.


24

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect’s order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect’s order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time. ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 Definitions § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 Progress and Completion § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.


25

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 Contract Sum § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for Payment. § 9.3 Applications for Payment § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 Certificates for Payment § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly


26

due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect’s decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment. § 9.6 Progress Payments § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the


27

Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 The Contractor’s payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney’s fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted. § 9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 Substantial Completion § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the


28

Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers’ warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties and other close out documentation required by the Owner, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are


29

made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from

.1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to


30

the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. § 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.2.9 Controlling Employer As between Owner and Contractor, Contractor is responsible to the Owner for any and all the safety measures and issues relating to the Work on the Project. Contractor shall administer and manage the safety program for the Work. This will include but not necessarily be limited to, review of the safety programs of each of Contractor’s Subcontractors, Contractor shall monitor the establishment and execution of effective safety practices then known to the industry as applicable to the Work, and the compliance with all applicable regulatory and advisory agency construction safety standards. Contractor’s responsibility for review, monitoring and coordination of the Subcontractors’ safety programs shall not extend to direct control over execution of the Subcontractors’ safety programs; notwithstanding Contractor’s safety obligations to Owner, it is agreed and understood that each individual Subcontractor shall remain the controlling employer responsible for the safety programs and precautions applicable to its own work and the work activities of others in areas designated to be controlled by such Subcontractor. § 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos, lead paint, or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity.


31

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall maintain a file of Safety Data Sheets (SDS) on site for all hazardous materials brought onto the job by the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to use, store, dispose of, and provide personal protective equipment for, any hazardous material used on site in accordance with the instructions in the SDS and other laws, regulations, codes, or policies. Any injury, property damage, illness, or enforcement action occurring as a result of the Contractor’s failure to comply with the SDS requirements shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to remedy. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. In the event of an emergency, the Contractor shall notify the Owner as soon as practical but not later than 24 hours from the time of the incident. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 Contractor’s Insurance and Bonds § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner and Owners’ employees, Architect, and Architect’s consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor’s commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.3 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.1.4 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. § 11.1.5 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor’s Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage.


32

§ 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation § 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect’s consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect’s consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Contractor as fiduciary and made payable to the Contractor as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Contractor shall pay the Architect and Owner their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Owner shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Owner shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Owner does not object, the Contractor shall settle the loss and the Owner shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Contractor shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Owner timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Contractor may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2 Correction of Work § 12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the


33

Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5. During the 11th month after Substantial Completion, and before any warranties expire, the Contractor, together with the Architect and Owner, shall complete a final inspection of the Work. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the laws and regulations of the STATE OF ARKANSAS. Venue for any dispute resolution process shall be Pulaski County, Arkansas. Nothing in these General Conditions shall be construed to waive the sovereign immunity of the Owner, the State of Arkansas, or any entities thereof. § 13.2 Successors and Assigns § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. § 13.3 Rights and Remedies § 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.


34

§ 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing. § 13.3.3 Verbal Agreements No verbal objection, order, claim, or notice by any of the parties involved to the other parties shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations contained in the Contract Documents. None of the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents shall be considered waived or modified unless the waiver or modification thereof is in writing, and agreed upon by the parties in the form of a Change Order approved by the Owner, the Architect and the Contractor. No evidence of any verbal objection, order, claim or notice shall be introduced in any proceeding. § 13.4 Tests and Inspections § 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect, Owner and Commissioning Agent (if any) timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Contractor shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require. § 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense. § 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. § 13.6 Federal Funding Davis-Bacon Act of 1931 <<Where federal funds are used, insert Davis-Bacon Act language here>>


35

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 Termination by the Contractor § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or Suppliers;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case


36

may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. § 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall

.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee, if any, set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2. § 15.1.3 Notice of Claims § 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. § 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required.


37

§ 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance § 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker’s decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. § 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 Initial Decision § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision


38

Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 Upon written request from either party, the Initial Decision Maker will convene a meeting among the Owner’s Project Representative, Construction Coordinator, Architect and the Contractor. After reviewing the facts presented, the Initial Decision Maker will issue a written opinion to the Contractor regarding the Claim. If the Contractor is not in agreement with the opinion of the Initial Decision Maker, the «[choose vice chancellor for campus operations, vice chancellor for facilities or similar campus official] » (the “Final Decision Maker”) will convene a meeting with the Initial Decision Maker, the Owner’s Project Representative, the Architect and the Contractor. The Contractor is encouraged to have a representative of its senior management present at this meeting. After reviewing the facts, the Final Decision Maker, or his/her designee, will issue a written opinion to the Contractor, the Initial Decision Maker, and the Owner's Construction Coordinator regarding the Claim. § 15.2.6 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.7 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation. § 15.3.2 lf the parties do not resolve a Claim through the initial decision process described in the foregoing sections, then as a condition precedent to litigation or a claim in the Arkansas Claims Commission the parties shall in good faith participate in private, non-binding facilitative mediation seeking a just and equitable solution satisfactory to all parties. A request for mediation shall be in writing and shall be directed to the other party within seven (7) business days following receipt of the opinion of the Final Decision Maker concerning the Claim. The parties shall in good faith obtain the services of a mediator with experience in mediating disputes, preferable with experience mediating construction related disputes. The parties will provide to the mediator and all other parties copies of the essential documentation relevant to the support or defense of the matter being mediated. Mediation shall commence within ten (10) business days following the selection of the mediator unless such period is extended by mutual agreement of the parties. The parties shall not be required to engage in mediation for a period greater than three (3) business days commencing with the first meeting with the mediator. The parties shall share equally in the administrative costs and fees of such proceedings but each shall be responsible for their expenses otherwise incurred. In no event shall commencement of mediation permit the Contractor to delay or withhold performance of the Work during the mediation proceedings. Any Claim of the Contractor subject to, but not resolved by mediation, shall be filed with the Arkansas Claims Commission. § 15.3.3 Owner does not, by entering in the Contract or by participating in mediation of any Claims, waive its sovereign immunity.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 03 70- 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 00 73 00 -- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS- Section 00810 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS 1 Subparagraph 11.1.1, add the following sentence: The amount of such insurance shall be not less than the following or any limits required by

law. 2 Subparagraph 11.1.2, add the following clause: 11.1.2.2 Worker's Compensation: A. State: Statutory B. Applicable Federal: Statutory C. Employer's Liability: $ 100,000.00 per Accident

$ 500,000.00 Disease, Policy Limit $ 100,000.00 Disease, each Employee

3 Subparagraph 11.1.3, add the following clause: 11.1.3.2 Comprehensive General Liability General Aggregate: $ 1,000,000.00 Completed Operations to be maintained for one year after final payment: $ 1,000,000.00

Aggregate Personal Injury $ 1,000,000.00

Each Occurrence Each Occurrence Limit $ 1,000,000.00

Each Occurrence Automobile Liability (including owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles) $ 1,000,000.00

Combined Single Limit Umbrella Excess Liability $ 1,000,000.00 4 Subparagraph 11.1.4, add the following clause: Owner’s and Contractor’s Protection Liability $ 1,000,000.00

Combined Single Limit


END OF DOCUMENT

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SUMMARY VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 10 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Project Identification: As follows:

1. The Project: Willhaf House Interior Restoration 2. Location: 111 North Third Street Van Buren, Arkansas 3. Owner: Board of Trustees University of Arkansas acting for and on behalf of the University of Arkansas - Fort Smith Fort Smith, Arkansas 4. Architect: John Milner Associates Preservation A Division of MTFA Architecture, PLLC 3200 Lee Highway Arlington, VA 22207 5. Associate MAHG Architecture Architect: 6400 Riley Park Drive Fort Smith, AR 72916 6. Civil Engineer: Hawkins-Weir Engineers, Inc. 110 South 7th Street Van Buren, AR 72956 7. Electrical McBrayer Engineering, Inc. Engineer: 1008 Azure Hills Circle Van Buren, AR 72956 8. Mechanical/ HSA Engineering Plumbing 5704 Euper Lane, Suite 100 Engineer: Fort Smith, AR 72903

B. Contract Documents dated December 30, 2019, were prepared by John Milner Associates Preservation.


C. The Work consists of the following:

1. Limited sitework including installation of buried utility lines and filling of some low areas.

2. Interior work including removals of existing materials, restoration of doors and windows, installation of new wall and ceiling surfaces and finishes, installation of insulation, removal and reinstallation of historic wood trim, restoration and refinishing of wood floors, installation of “view windows” in wall and ceiling surfaces to allow exposure of interior construction, and interior painting.

3. Installation of a fire protection system consisting of a preaction sprinkler system.

4. Removal of existing electrical items, installation of limited lighting fixtures and receptacles, and the connection of electrical power to these items.

5. Installation of a fire and security detection and alarm system.

D. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.3 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Limited investigations on the site will be carried out during the course of construction by the Arkansas Archeological Survey under contract to the Architect. Some of this work will be within the area of the Project Limits.

1.4 PROTECTION OF HISTORIC BUILDING

A. The Willhaf House is a historic resource and is listed on the National Register of Historic Places. All work shall therefore be directed towards its preservation and protection. The drawings and specifications require extraordinary work in order to preserve original materials and workmanship and they shall be adhered to even though there may appear to be more expeditious methods to complete the work. Unless determined otherwise, any artifacts, features, or other items uncovered during demolition or clearing activities are assumed to have historical importance and shall be protected from inadvertent damage, destruction, or removal from their original location.

1.5 ARCHEOLOGICAL PROTECTION

A. All areas of ground disturbance on the site are considered potentially sensitive archeological areas.

B. Monitoring of ground disturbing work will be performed by the Arkansas Archeological Survey. As new ground is broken the members of the Survey may elect to examine excavated materials. Should they discover historic artifacts, immediate relocation of the work may be required to allow the Survey representatives to take soil samples and record resources. They will coordinate the required monitoring with the Contractor’s work schedule.


1. At least seven (7) calendar days prior to commencing ground disturbing activities, including tree removal, provide a schedule of these activities to the representative of the Arkansas Archeological Survey.

C. Cooperate fully with members of the Arkansas Archeological Survey so that their work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.

1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Limit use of premises to work within the project limits. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the area of the Project Limits. Arrange operations in such a manner as to insure minimum interference with streets and sidewalks adjacent to the Project Limits.

1. Project Limits are indicated on the Drawings.

2. Site Access: Site access for Contractor’s vehicles shall be from North 3rd Street using the main access drive.

3. Owner Access: Allow for Owner access to the site using the main access driveway. 4. Materials Storage: Confine storage of materials to the Project Limits area. Assume full

responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. The interior of the building shall not be used for storage of materials.

a. The existing garage and the open areas on either side of the existing garage, both

of which have concrete slabs, may be used for storage of materials. 5. Disposal of Waste Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements in

Specification Section 01 70 00, Execution Requirements, for disposal of waste material from the construction process.

6. Tree and Shrub Protection: See Specification Section 01 56 39, Temporary Tree and

Plant Protection.

B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Promptly repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building during construction. Comply with requirements in Specification Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls.

1. There are no restrooms within the building. See Specification Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, for provision of temporary sanitary facilities.

C. Contractor’s Office: The contractor may utilize the existing garage building on-site as an office space. If this is not suitable, an office trailer may be located alongside the access drive. The interior of the house shall not be used for office space.

D. Parking: Parking for automobiles or trucks of employees shall be alongside the access drive. The number of vehicles that can be accommodated is limited.


1.7 SITE RESTORATION

A. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall restore to their original condition all areas occupied by office trailers, parking, storage of materials, etc. This shall include trees, shrubs, and grass areas within the Project Limits.

B. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor’s operations, including oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials and replace with new topsoil and grass.

C. Where grass areas have been damaged by operations, reestablish by filling areas with topsoil and by planting new grass, as required. 1. Remove weeds. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do

not use pre-emergence herbicides. 2. In damaged areas, apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing

new lawns and mix thoroughly into existing soil. Provide new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.

3. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly. 4. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch. 5. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new grass areas are established.

D. At completion of work mow and rake the existing lawn.

1.8 OWNER’S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Occasional Owner/Architect Occupancy: On a limited basis, the Architect and/or the Owner will occupy the building in order to carry out the design work for the next phase or for scheduled meetings related to the construction work. There will be no tours or other types of visitation by the public or by students.

1.9 HOURS OF WORK AND WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces to insure the completion of the Work within the time stated in the Contract.

1. Perform the work during regular working hours except (1) in the event of emergency; (2) when required to complete the Work within the time stated in the Contract; or (3) when required in case of a shutdown of utilities.

2. The Contractor and/or Subcontractors will not be entitled to additional compensation for Work performed outside of regular working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 01 10 00

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 20 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 01 20 00 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 ALTERNATES

A. An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

B. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Incude as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Bidders shall indicate on the Price Proposal the cost for each of the following Alternates: 1. Alternate No. 1. 4-Inch Fire Line and Public Water Line

a. Base Bid: Bring a new underground 4-inch water line from the city main to the

house and connect to the fire service entry in the Cellar. The route is shown on Drawings C101 and UT2.1.

b. Alternate: The underground 4-inch water line system from city main to the house

will not be installed. This includes omission of the following: 1) The Public Line Improvements from city main to and including the 4-inch

gate valve shown on Drawing C101 together with referenced details. This includes connection to the city main along with repair of street, curb and gutter, sidewalk and removal, replacement of the RCP.

2) The Fire Line from the gate valve noted above to a point outside the house where a connection will be made to the fire service entry all as shown on


Drawing U2.1 and referenced details. This includes the fire line hot box with fire department connection and all components shown.

3) Underground electrical conduit and wiring to serve the hot box that runs

from the existing equipment rack to the hot box as shown on Drawing E101.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Include the following allowance in the Contract Sum:

1. Allowance No. 1: Include the sum of $4,000.00 for the purchase and installation of new finish hardware for doors and windows, and for the cost of cleaning and reconditioning existing hardware, as described in Section 08 71 00, Hardware.

B. Advise Architect of the date when selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Submit invoices to show cost of products furnished under each allowance. Reconciliation of Allowance amounts with actual costs will be by Change Order. 1. The amount of the change order resulting from final selection of products covered by

each allowance shall be the difference between the purchase order amount and the allowance, and shall not include Contractor’s mark-up or subcontractor’s mark-up except to the extent clearly demonstrated by the Contractor that either the scope of the installation or the nature of the work required of him was changed from that which could have been foreseen from the description of the allowance and other information in the contract documents. No mark-up is permitted for selection of higher or lower priced material or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

1.4 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a proposal from Contractor, Architect will issue a Change Order on AIA Document G701, for all changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time.

B. When Owner and Contractor disagree on the terms of a proposal, Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714, instructing Contractor to proceed with the change. Construction Change Directive will contain a description of the change and designate the method to be followed to determine changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.5 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days before the first Application for Payment. In the Schedule of Values, break down Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section. Correlate the Schedule of Values with the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

B. Payment-Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the 1st day of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends on the 1st day of the month.


C. Payment shall be made on the basis of:

1. Ninety-five percent (95%) of the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment suitably stored at the site, plus labor, materials and equipment incorporated in theWork, less

2. The aggregate of previous payments.

D. Submit 3 copies of each application for payment on AIA Document G702/703.

1. For the second Application for Payment through the Application for Payment submitted at Substantial Completion, submit partial releases of liens from each subcontractor or supplier for whom amounts were requisitioned in the previous Application for Payment.

2. Submit final Application for Payment after completion of Project closeout procedures with release of liens and supporting documentation. Include consent of surety to final payment and insurance certificates.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01 20 00

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 30 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

A. Verify information shown on Drawings before commencing the Work.

B. Coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly execution of each part of the Work.

C. Pre-Construction Conference: Architect will schedule a preconstruction conference before commencement of construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Contractor. The conference will be held at the Project Site. Attendees shall include the Owner, Architect and their consultants, Contractor, subcontractors, and other concerned parties.

1. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Designation of responsible personnel. c. Critical work sequencing. d. Meeting schedules. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. h. Preparation of record documents. i. Use of the site and premises. j. Parking. k. Office, work, and storage areas. l. Safety procedures and first aid. m. Security. n. Housekeeping.

D. Fire Protection System Meeting: A pre-installation meeting for the fire protection system is called for in Section 21 13 18, Preaction and Deluge Sprinkler Systems. This meeting will be scheduled as part of the Pre-Construction Conference agenda.

E. Viewing Window Location Meeting: A meeting to review the viewing windiw installation and to finalize their location is called for in Section 08 52 00, Wood Windows, This meeting will be scheduled as part of the Pre-Construction Conference agenda.

F. Progress meetings will be held at the Project site once every two weeks, the day of the week and the time being mutually determined by the Contractor, the Owner, and the Architect. Each subcontractor concerned with current progress or involved with planning or coordination of


future activities shall attend. After the first three (3) meetings the frequency of meetings may be revised to meet less often depending on job conditions and progress.

1. Agenda: Review items that can affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project:

a. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Review progress since last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor’s Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or beind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited.

b. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Field observations, problems and decisions. 2) Interface requirements. 3) Time. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Housekeeping. 7) Quality and work standards. 8) Change Orders.

2. Reporting: Minutes of the meetings will be kept by the Architect who will make distribution to the Contractor and Owner. Contractor shall then make distribution to each party present.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Prepare a horizontal bar-chart construction schedule. Provide a separate time bar for each activity and a vertical line to identify the first workday of each week. Use same breakdown of Work indicated in the Schedule of Values. As Work progresses, mark each bar to indicate actual completion.

1. Submit within 14 days after date established for Commencement of the Work. 2. Coordinate each element with other activities. Show each activity in proper sequence.

Indicate sequences necessary for completion of related Work. 3. Indicate Substantial Completion and allow time for Architect's procedures necessary for

certifying Substantial Completion. 4. Schedule Distribution: Distribute copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties

required to comply with dates. 5. Updating: Revise schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions are made.

Distribute revised copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties required to comply with dates.


1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordinate submittal preparation with construction schedule, fabrication lead-times, other submittals, and activities that require sequential operations.

1. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in time to permit processing sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work.

2. Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than Contractor.

B. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and with work that does not require submittals.

C. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Include the following:

1. Data indicating compliance with specified standards and requirements. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information. Submit 1 reproducible print and 1 blue- or black-line print on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inchesbut no larger than 24 by 36 inches. Architect will return the reproducible print. Include the following:

1. Dimensions, profiles, methods of attachment, coordination with adjoining work, large scale details, and other information, as appropriate for the Work.

2. Identification of products and materials. 3. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.

E. Samples: Submit Samples finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. Where variations are inherent in the material, submit sufficient units to show limits of the variations. Include product name or name of the manufacturer.

F. Architect will review each submittal, mark as appropriate to indicate action taken, and return copies less those retained. Compliance with specified requirements remains Contractor's responsibility.

G. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved," the Work

covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal


according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and

Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

1.5 FIELD SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS

A. Definitions:

1. Field samples and mock-ups are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, finish materials, or workmanship. Field samples and mock-ups are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

B. The Contractor shall erect at the Project Site such field samples and mock-ups as are required by Sections of the Specifications at a location acceptable to the Architect.

C. Size or area of field samples and mock-ups shall be that specified in the respective specification section.

D. Fabricate each field sample and mock-up complete and finished.

E. Acceptable field samples and mock-ups may be incorporated in the Work to the extent allowed by the specification section in which they are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 50 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241, "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations"; ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition"; and NECA Electrical Design Library's "Temporary Electrical Facilities."

1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Remove temporary facilities and controls before Substantial Completion.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: The house is served with electrical power. The Contractor may tie into the service points for power and use it as temporary service at no cost. Water that served the now removed North Addition was cut off. Arrangements may be made with UAFS Plant Operations to turn the water on and it may be accessed during construction as long as provisions are made to prevent it from freezing.

B. Security: The house is served by a security system maintained by the Owner. UAFS Plant Operations will provide a key to the Contractor along with an alarm code. The Contractor is responsible for following UAFS contractor rules. At the completion of work the key will be returned to the Owner. The Owner has the right to request a deposit in order to cover the cost of rekeying the building should the key not be returned.

C. Conditions of Use: Keep utility and security services operable and clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions to develop or persist on-site.

1. The Contractor is responsible for required maintenance and upkeep.

D. Use of Historic House: With the exception of access for required work in the house, it shall not be used as offices, storage, or any other use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractory may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.

B. Water Hoses: Provide ¾-inch, heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.

C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.

D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where

exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for

adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

F. Temporary Offices: Provide a prefabricated or mobile weathertight unit with insulation,

lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading.

1. If the Contractor elects to utilize the garage building as an office space, additional

lighting, electrical receptacles, and other temporary facilities may be installed if done in a workmanlike and neat manner. The Owner has the right to require that items installed be removed at the end of the project, but may also elect to keep them intact.

G. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for

temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers.

H. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Connect to existing service. Provide adequate capacity.


B. Water Service: Utilize as directed by UAFS, See Paragraph 1.3.A. Use of hoses within the building will not be allowed.

C. Electric Power Service: Make connection to the building’s existing electrical power facilities. As necessary for equipment being used, provide weatherproof, grounded electric distribution from the existing system.

D. There is no telephone service to the building. Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period through the use of cell phone so that it is possible for the Contractor to be reached.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. Field Offices: Provide a temporary office of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the Project Site. Locate on or along the access drive. As an option, the existing garage may be used.

1. Temporary facilities located within 30 feet of building shall be of noncombustible construction.

B. Storage Shed: The garage and the concrete slabs on either side of the garage will be made available to the Contractor to use for storage. If desired, the Contractor may install a fence to provide security. 1. If the garage is used it must be remembered that this is a historic building and any

damage caused to it will be the contractor’s responsibility to repair.

C. Project Sign: Maintain the existing construction sign and project funding sign in place throughout the period of this contract. No other identification or advertisement signs shall be displayed on the building or site.

1. The existing construction sign shall be revised to indicate the name of the Contractor holding the contract for work herein.

2. Should the signs be damaged or destroyed by operations under this contract, they shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor.

D. Toilets: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation or combustion type, properly vented and enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. Provide toilet tissue. Use of restrooms inside the building will not be permitted.

E. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.

F. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities suppled with potable water for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds and paper towels for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material. Use of existing restrooms inside the building will not be permitted.


G. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste off-site.

1. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials in separate closed waste containers. Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations.

3.3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Temporary Fire Protection: Provide temporary fire protection. Comply with NFPA 10 “Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers” and NFPA 241 “Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations.”

1. Provide adequate numbers and types of fire extinguishers, but not less than one extinguisher in each area where work is underway.

2. Store combustible materials in fire-safe containers. 3. Prohibit smoking within or near the building.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

C. Security Lock-Up: Where materials and equipment must be stored on the construction site, provide a secure lockup.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SAFEGUARDING THE BUILDING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 51 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 01 51 00 - SAFEGUARDING THE BUILDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes measures for preventing or minimizing fire damage during construction

operations. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 01 50 00, “Temporary Facilities,” for requirements concerning temporary fire

protection. 1.3 ORGANIZATION

A. The Contractor shall designate a fire prevention program manager who shall be responsible for

the fire prevention program and ensuring that it is carried out to completion of the project. B. The manager shall be responsible for the presence of fire protection devices and for their proper

maintenance. C. There shall be a readily available telephone service to the Van Buren Fire Department.

Instructions shall be issued to notify the fire department immediately in case of fire. The fire department telephone number shall be conspicuously posted near each telephone.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT

A. Temporary offices, trailers, sheds, and other facilities for the storage of tools and materials, when located within 30 feet of the building shall be of non-combustible construction as called for in Section 01 50 00, “Temporary Facilities.”

B. For provisions regarding flame resistant tarpaulins see Section 01 50 00.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SAFEGUARDING THE BUILDING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 51 00 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

C. Internal combustion equipment shall be shut down and allowed to cool to ambient temperatures prior to refueling. Fuel for internal combustion equipment shall not be stored within the building.

E. Flammable and combustible liquids shall not be stored within the building. Open flames and

smoking shall not be permitted in flammable and combustible liquids storage areas. F. Tanks and containers for storage of flammable and combustible liquids above ground shall be

conspicuously marked with the name of the product they contain and “Flammable - Keep Fire and Flame Away.”

3.2 SMOKING

A. Smoking shall be prohibited in all parts of the building and in outside locations near the

building. 3.3 HOT WORK

A. In the event that any welding, gas cutting, or soldering is contemplated, it shall be done only

with prior approval of the Architect and under the provisions set forth by the Architect.

3.5 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Collection and disposal of waste material and debris shall be as specified in Section 01 50 00, “Temporary Facilities.”


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION TEMPORARY TREE AND ARCHEOLOGY SITE PROTECTION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 56 39 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 01 56 39 – TEMPORARY TREE AND ARCHEOLOGY SITE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide protection of trees and archeological sites that are shown to be protected on the Site Plan. This includes: 1. The noted magnolias (2 shown) and crape myrtle (1 shown) are historic. 2. One non-historic tree close to and on the north side of the house. 3. An area with known buried archeological materials of value which is located between the

house and the garage.

B. Trees not shown to have a tree protection zone installed shall, nonetheless be treated and protected as specified herein, but are considered to be far enough from construction activities not to require fencing.

1.3 SITE CONDITIONS

A. At the time of mobilization, the Architect and Contractor shall tour the site and note the condition of the trees indicated, noting any which appear to have problems or which are not healthy.

1.4 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee the existing trees that are noted against damage until final acceptance of the Project. Repair any damage that, in the opinion of the Architect, can be satisfactorily corrected.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Protection Zones: 1. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be

protected during construction and indicated on Drawings. The protection zone shall be defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line.


2. Archeology Protection Zone: Area within which buried archeological findings (a stone root cellar and a cistern) have been found and are to be protected. The protection zone is indicated on the Drawings.

B. Disturbance/Damage: Physical or visual change to the trees that, in the opinion of the Architect, is detrimental to the trees being protected. Such disturbance may be caused by construction or delivery vehicle, construction material storage, or disposal of solid or liquid debris.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated materials. 2. Moving or parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BARRIER

A. Fencing: Orange polyvinyl mesh fabric, 48-inch (nominal) height, as manufactured by Alpi, Tenaz, or approved equal.

B. Posts: Studded steel “T” post – 5-6 feet long with wire clips.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TREE AND ARCHEOLOGY SITE PROTECTION

A. Install barriers to protect trees and the archeology site prior to any mobilization on the site.

B. Set posts around the perimeter of the protection zones, vertically plumb, 18-inches deep, and spaced a maximum of 6-feet on center and at each corner.

C. Fencing: Pull fencing taut to prevent sagging and secure to posts with wire clips. Form a complete enclosure around the tree or group of trees and the perimeter of the archeology site protection zone.


3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain barriers and other protective devices in a newly installed condition until their removal is approved by the Architect.

3.3 REPLACEMENT

A. If a protected tree appears to be dying prior to final acceptance of the Project, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall bring a certified arborist and tree surgeon to the site to examine the tree and make recommendations for treatment. Replacement of the tree is not an option.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 60 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products of same kind from a single source. The term “product” includes the terms

“material,” “equipment,” “system,” and similar terms. B. Deliver, store and handle products according to manufacturer’s written instructions, using

means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage. 2. Deliver in manufacturer’s original sealed packaging with labels and written instructions

for handling, storing, protecting, and installing. 3. Inspect products at time of delivery for compliance with the Contract Documents and to

ensure items are undamaged and properly protected. 4. Store heavy items in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction. 5. Store products subject to damage on platforms or pallets, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required.

C. Product Substitution: Reasonable and timely requests for substitutions will be considered.

Substitutions include products and methods of construction differing from that required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor after award of Contract.

1. Submit requests for product substitution in time to permit processing of request and

subsequent submittals, if any, sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work. Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.

3. Architect will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its acceptance or rejection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. With the exception of items that are indicated to be salvaged and reused, provide products that

comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the time of installation.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 60 00 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

B. Select products as follows:

1. Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the item indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.

2. Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the items indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.

3. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term “or equal” or “or approved equal,” provide the named item or comply with provisions concerning “product substitutions” to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.

4. Where a product is described with required characteristics, with or without naming a brand or trademark, provide a product that complies with those characteristics and other Contract requirements.

5. Where compliance with performance requirements is specified, provide products that comply and are recommended in writing by the manufacturer for the application.

6. Where compliance with codes, regulations, or standards, is specified, select a product that complies with the codes, regulations, or standards referenced.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, Architect will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from

the manufacturer’s full range of options.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01 60 00

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 70 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMTIH

SECTION 01 70 00 – EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Where Drawings indicate dimensions of existing construction verify by field measurement. Where fabricated products are to be fitted to other construction verify dimensions by field measurement before fabricating and, when possible, allow for fitting and trimming during installation.


B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage. If applicable, prepare surfaces for field finishing

3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

F. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

G. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.


C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 01 70 00

.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 01 77 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 01 77 00 –CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of full-size Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark to show installation that varies from the Work originally shown. All revisions and modifications shall be legible and sufficiently detailed so that the Architect can make the revisions and modifications to the computer generated drawings for record purposes.

B. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, as Record Specifications. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the specifications and modifications.

1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Request Substantial Completion inspection once the following are complete:

1. Submit Record Drawings and Specifications. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Remove temporary facilities and controls. 4. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 5. Complete final cleanup. 6. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects. 7. Obtain final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction.

.


B. Inspections: On receipt of a request for inspection, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or advise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is sub-stantially complete.

2. If more than one repeat inspection is required because of failure by the Contractor to sub-stantially complete the Work, such repeat inspection will be done in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 3.6 of this Section.

3. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final ac-ceptance.

1.5 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Request inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment once the following are complete:

1. Submit a copy of the Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, Archi-tect will advise Contractor of the Work that is incomplete or obligations that have not yet been fulfilled.

2. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previ-ously submitted and accepted.

3. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 4. Submit affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebted-

ness has been paid or satisfied. 5. Submit waivers of liens for all entities involved in the Work.

B. Following inspection for final acceptance, the Architect will either prepare a certificate of final acceptance or, if the Work is incomplete, will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled.

1. If reinspection is required, the Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been complet-ed.

2. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final inspec-tion or advise the Contractor of Work that is still incomplete.

3. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. 4. If more than one repeat inspection is required because of failure by the Contractor to sub-

stantially complete the Work, such repeat inspection will be done in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 3.6 of this Section.

1.6 REINSPECTIONS

A. By provision of this Section, the Architect will perform the Substantial Completion inspection and, if necessary, one repeat inspection as part of the Substantial Completion procedure. At the

.


time of Final Inspection, the Architect will perform the final inspection and, if necessary, one repeat inspection.

B. Should it become necessary for the Architect to perform additional repeat inspections because of the Contractor’s failure to complete Work as noted in the Contractor’s written notice to the Architect, the Architect will be compensated by the Owner for the costs incurred in making the repeat inspections. The Owner will adjust the Contract Sum by deducting the amount of com-pensation paid to the Architect.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

d. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

e. Remove debris and surface dust the attic and cellar. f. Clean transparent materials, including glass in doors and windows. g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment, fire and security detection equipment, and

fire protection equipment i. Clean light fixtures and lamps to function with full efficiency. j. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

.


B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 3. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and

noisy starters in fluorescent fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

3.3 LAWN CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean yard and grounds within the project limits in areas disturbed by construction activities, of rubbish, waste material, litter, construction tools and equipment, surplus materials and other foreign substances.

B. Rale grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

C. Renovate those portions of the existing lawn damaged by Contractor’s operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles, and return it to its original condition at the beginning of construction.

D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new topsoil.

E. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch.

F. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new lawn is established.


.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 02 41 19 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 02 41 19 –SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of the historic wood frame building. 2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused, stored, or delivered to the Owner.

B. It is the intent of this Section to include all removals of every kind except for the following work which is specified elsewhere: 1. Removal and replacement of limited portions of existing wood clapboard siding is

specified in Section 06 40 00, Finish Carpentry. 2. Removal, restoration, and reinstallation of existing wood door casings is specified in

Section 08 03 14, Wood Door Restoration. 3. Removal, restoration, and reinstallation of existing interior wood window casings is

specified in Section 08 01 52, Wood Window Restoration. 4. Removal and reinstallation of existing wood trim including baseboards, picture rails,

chair rails and aprons, is specified in Section 06 40 00, Finish Carpentry. 5. Removal of existing wood doors is specified in Section 08 55 10, Wood Door

Restoration. 6. Removal of existing wood window sash is specified in Section 08 01 52, Wood Window

Restoration.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 01 10 00, Summary, for use of the premises and scheduling requirements. 2. Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, for temporary construction and

environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.

1.3 HISTORICAL BUILDING

A. Project work involves the rehabilitation of a historically significant building. The building shall be treated respectfully. Existing conditions are to be carefully treated and no material or element shall be removed or disfigured unless specifically indicated on Drawings, specified herein, or directed by the Architect.

.


1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver them to Owner’s designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall (often referred to as “Remove and Reuse”): Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for items or materials shown to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

B. Historic items of interest or value to the Owner, that may be encountered during selective demolition remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.


A. The historic building is not in use and will be vacant during the construction period.

B. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Hazardous Materials: With the exception of interior lead-based paint, it is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. For information on lead-based paint refer to Section 00 31 26, Existing Hazardous Material Information. If any materials suspected of containing hazardous materials in addition to lead-based paint are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify the Architect. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.

.


D. Flame cutting will not be allowed in the building.

E. Maintain access to exits at all times.

F. Utility Service: See Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls. .

1.8 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Complete demolition that might damage new construction before starting new work.

B. Schedule the following items of work at a time when the Architect can be present to observe: 1. Removal of bead board on the wall in the northeast corner of Room 103. 2. Removal of ornamental plaster picture rail in Room 102.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.

B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Selective demolition is shown on the Drawings to the extent that the scale of the drawings will permit. Due to the small scale and the complexities of building construction, it is not always possible to show every detail of demolition. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

B. Survey the condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

.


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with the driveway and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Protect trees and shrubs to remain as specified in Section 01 56 39, Temporary Tree and

Archeological Site Protection. 2. Protect the area indicated as an archeological site as specified in Section 01 56 39,

Temporary Tree and Archeological Site Protection.

B. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.3 BUILDING PROTECTION

A. Refer to Section 01 51 00, Safeguarding the Building. All requirements of this Section shall be strictly adhered to during all demolition operations.

B. Provide temporary protection as required to protect the historic building, both on the interior and on the exterior, from damage during demolition.

3.4 DOOR PROTECTION

A. Prior to the commencement of any work in the building, remove exterior and interior doors (except those in the Cellar), identify the openings from which they were removed, and store those doors to be reused in a secure area free from exposure to damage or the elements. Install temporary doors in place of the removed exterior doors. 1. Where existing doors are removed, install protection for existing door jambs at those

openings.

3.5 FLOOR PROTECTION

A. Install floor protection such as masonite or Ram Board over existing finished wood flooring before commencing work.

.


3.6 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Use suitable methods, including water mist, to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice or pollution. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.

B. When demolition operation is complete, vacuum and wet mop to bring the interior of the house to a generally clean condition, free of dust, dirt and debris.

C. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

3.7 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated.

B. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete

selective demolition work above each tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Remove decayed or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 7. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing

before selective demolition operations began.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items: Items to be removed and salvaged are indicated on the Drawings. Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items upon removal. 2. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 3. Protect items from damage during storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

.


2. Protect items from damage during storage. 3. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.

F. Existing Utilities: The following portions of utility systems shall be demolished and removed from the premises. This is in addition to the removals called for in Paragraph 3.2.: 1. Removal of ceiling mounted electric light fixtures, electrical receptacles where located on

the wall or in the floor, and conduit and wiring. 2. Removal of HVAC floor registers. Return air grilles and ducts shall remain in place. 3. Removal of non-functioning fire detection and security detection equipment that is not to

be reused. 4. All HVAC equipment, devices, and ductwork within the addition to be removed. 5. Within the historic house remove those items specifically called on out the Drawings.

3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Wood Trim Removal 1. Take precaution in removing all wood trim and other materials. In some cases the

original construction is hidden behind these materials and it is important to document it before further removal.

B. Wood Lath Removal 1. Where removal of wood lath is shown, remove all lath together with the nails holding lath

in place. Vacuum clean the cavity between studs before proceeding with installation of new wall surfacing.

C. Wood Lath to Remain 1. Where wood lath is shown to remain, take care during the removal of the plaster not to

damage the lath. When removal of plaster is complete vacuum clean the remaining wood lath.

3.9 REINSTALLATION IDENTIFICATION

A. Each item which is specified or shown on the Drawings to be removed and reinstalled shall be reinstalled in exactly the same location from which it was removed unless specifically called for to be located elsewhere.

3.10 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

.


A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.

B. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.

C. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

3.11 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.


.



.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SITE PREPARATION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 02 50 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 02 50 00 –SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment and perform all site preparation and removal of obstructions, complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Areas to be cleared, grubbed and stripped generally consist of areas within the project site where construction is proposed. Additional areas, adjacent to particular construction sites, are specifically designated on the Drawings.

C. Minimize the areas to be cleared, grubbed and stripped within public rights-of-way and utility easements to the extent possible for the scope of work and in consideration of the actual means and methods of construction used. Perform no unnecessary site preparation within these areas.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02 41 19 – Selective Demolition

B. Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling

C. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control

D. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Completely coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before commencement of items specified herein.

B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be built into the work of other Sections.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

.


A. Take field measurements at the site to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper coordination of all construction items.

1.6 LIMITS OF WORK

A. The limits of the work under this contract shall extend to the Project Limits, unless otherwise indicated on the plans.

B. The Owner will not be responsible for obtaining additional sites for the storage of equipment, the stockpiling of materials, the securing of additional material, or other lands not required by the finished construction.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner’s property.

B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner’s property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner’s designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.

D. Remove and Replace: Remove and legally dispose of items and replace with new items as indicated.

E. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage. When permitted by the Engineer, remove items to a suitable, protected storage location during construction, and then clean and reinstall items in their original locations.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit copies of all required permits prior to clearing, grubbing and stripping work, in accordance with Section 01 30 00.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLEARING VEGETATION

A. Cut and remove all stumps, brush, shrubs, roots, grass, weeds, rubbish and any other objectionable material resting on or protruding through the surface of the ground.

.


B. Preserve and protect trees and shrubs designated on Drawings or as noted in Section 01 56 39.

3.2 GRUBBING

A. Grub and remove all stump roots, brush, and other debris encountered to a depth of 18 inches below original grade.

B. Refill all grubbing holes and depressions excavated below the finished ground surface with suitable materials and compact to a density conforming to the requirements of Section 31 23 00, Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling

3.3 STRIPPING\

A. Strip and stockpile topsoil from all areas to be occupied by structures, roadways, and all areas to be excavated or filled.

B. Stockpile topsoil free from brush, trash, large stones, and other extraneous material. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil.

C. Protect stockpiled topsoil until it is used for site restoration or landscaping. Dispose of surplus topsoil after all work is completed.

3.4 DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of material and debris from site preparation operations by hauling to an approved off-site disposal area. Burial of rubbish or debris is not allowed on the project site.

B. On-site disposal of cleared and grubbed material by open-air burning will not be permitted.

3.5 PROTECTING VEGITATION

A. See Section 01 56 39, Temporary Tree and Archeology Site Protection.

B. Secure the services of a certified arborist or approved tree service to repair immediately any damage to existing tree crowns, trucks, or root systems.

C. Restrict construction activities to those areas within the limits of construction as designated on the Drawings, within public rights-of-way, and within easements provided by the Owner. Restore damage to adjacent public or private properties and improvements to their original condition and to the full satisfaction of the property owner.

3.6 CLEARING OTHER WORK AREA OBSTRUCTIONS

A. Clear the work area of all obstructions that will affect or will be affected by the construction of the project. Remove all items so encountered unless otherwise shown on the plans or otherwise directed by the Engineer. These items shall include, but not be limited to signs, culverts,

.


headwalls, pavements, landscaping and other items constituting an obstruction, which are encountered.

B. Remove as part of the clearing operation all structures, foundations, culverts, headwalls, concrete slabs and other obstructions or rubbish of any nature, which interfere with the proposed improvements, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or noted on the plans.

3.7 PROTECTING AND REMOVING OBSTRUCTIONS

A. Take every precaution in protecting and removing obstructions that are to be replaced or reconstructed.

B. Coordinate removal and relocation of traffic and street signs with the City of Van Buren Street Department.

3.8 OBSTRUCTIONS NOT SHOWN ON PLANS

A. The plans show the location of certain exposed and buried obstructions, as well as existing surface and subsurface structures. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer assumes any responsibility for failure to show obstruction or structures on the plans or to show them in their exact location. The absence of these obstructions or structures on the drawings does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility in the protection, removal and satisfactory replacement of these obstructions. The failure to show the obstructions will not be considered sufficient basis for claims for extra work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever, unless the obstruction encountered is such as to necessitate substantial changes in the lines and grades of the proposed improvements or requires the building of a special structure.

B. The removal of existing franchised utility mains required to permit orderly progress of the work shall be accomplished by local agencies, as shown on the Drawings or specified within these specifications. Notify all utility companies, all pipeline owners, or other parties affected, and endeavor to have the necessary adjustments of the public or private utility fixtures, pipelines, pole lines, and other appurtenances within or adjacent to the limits of the construction made as soon as possible. The relocation of existing utility service lines is the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has considered in his bid all of the permanent and temporary utility appurtenances in their present or relocated positions as shown on the plans or as specified herein and that no additional compensation will be allowed for any delays, inconvenience, or damage sustained by him due to any interference from the said utility appurtenances or the operation of moving them.

D. The Contractor shall notify the owner of the utility in the path of his operation, sufficiently in advance of his work, to enable the utility owner to have a representative present.

3.9 WATERWAYS

A. Present natural and artificial waterways shall be left open to flow freely. Provide temporary dams or bypasses as necessary and/or as directed by the Engineer.

.


3.10 REMOVING CULVERTS

A. Do not remove culverts or other drainage structures until making satisfactory arrangements to accommodate traffic.

3.11 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENTS AND SIDEWALKS

A. Remove all pavements, driveways, sidewalks, buts and other such items indicated on the Drawings in a workmanlike manner. Restrict the area of each removed item to the minimum possible area that will still conform to the lines and grades of the completed construction.

B. Saw cut asphalt and concrete surfaces at the boundaries of the areas to be removed. Saw reasonably true to line and to a depth so that when removed the material, undue underbreakage or shattering of the adjacent area will not occur. The equipment for sawing shall be approved mechanical concrete saws in satisfactory working condition and adequately powered to cut the depth required.

3.12 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

A. Preserve all public and private property encountered in the construction of these improvements.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to the property of any character, during the prosecution of the work, resulting from any act, omission, neglect or misconduct in his manner or methods of executing the work, or at any time due to defective work or materials, and said responsibility will not be released until the project has been completed and accepted.

C. When or where any direct or indirect damage or injury is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect or misconduct in the execution of the Work, or in consequence of the non-execution thereof, the Contractor shall restore at his own expense, such property to a condition similar or equal to that existing before such damage or injury was done by repairing, rebuilding or otherwise restoring as may be directed, or he shall make good such damage or injury in an acceptable manner.

3.13 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives are prohibited for excavation.

3.14 TRENCH SAFETY

A. The current edition of Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standard for Excavation and Trench Safety Systems, 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P, is specifically incorporated and made a part of these specifications and contract documents as required by Arkansas Code Annotated 22-9-212.

3.15 SITE MAINTENANCE

.


A. Maintain all disturbed areas of the site during the course of construction. Maintenance shall include periodic mowing of areas within and adjacent to the following: security and construction fencing, silt fencing and other erosion control devices, and equipment and material storage areas.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 03 30 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor and materials required and install cast-in-place concrete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.


A. Section 33 05 19 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

B. Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International, latest edition:

1. ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

2. ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 3. ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens 4. ASTM C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and

Sawed Beams of Concrete 5. ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 6. ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 7. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 8. ASTM C156 Standard Test Method for Water Loss [from a Mortar Specimen]

Through Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete

9. ASTM C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 10. ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

11. ASTM C173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Volumetric Method 12. ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Pressure Method


13. ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 14. ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete 15. ASTM C311 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural

Pozzolans for Use in Portland-Cement Concrete 16. ASTM C330 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete 17. ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

18. ASTM C567 Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Structural

Lightweight Concrete 19. ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural

Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

20. ASTM C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

21. ASTM C1611 Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete

22. ASTM E1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest edition:

1. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete

2. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete

3. ACI 303.1 Standard Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete 4. ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 5. ACI 304.2 Guide to Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods 6. ACI 305.1 Specification for Hot Weather Concreting 7. ACI 306.1 Guide to Cold Weather Concreting

8. ACI 308 Guide to External Curing of Concrete

9. ACI 309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete

10. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 11. ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00, Submittals for submittal procedures. Shop drawings and product data shall include the following:

1. Concrete mix designs for all classes of concrete proposed for use on the project.

2. Sources of cement, pozzolan, and aggregates. 3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and admixtures. 4. Air-entraining admixture: Product data including catalog cut, technical data, storage

requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards.

5. Water reducing admixture: Product data including catalog cut, technical data, storage

requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards.

6. High range water-reducing admixture (super-plasticizer): Product data including catalog cut,

technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, retarding effect, slump range, and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use.

7. Sheet curing material: Product data including catalog cut, technical data, and conformity to

ASTM standard. 8. Liquid curing compound: Product data including catalog cut, technical data, storage

requirements, product life, application rate, and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use.

B. Samples

1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested for examination by the Engineer.

C. Furnish test data to indicate compliance with the following:

1. Sieve analysis, mechanical properties, and deleterious substance content for coarse and fine

aggregate. 2. Chemical analysis and physical tests of each type of cement. 3. Chemical analysis and physical tests of pozzolan.

D. Certifications

1. Certify admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each other and the

aggregates.


E. Qualifications

1. Independent testing laboratory: Name, address, and qualifications. Laboratories affiliated with the Contractor or in which the Contractor or its officers have a beneficial interest are not acceptable.


A. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on any one structure. Concrete shall be uniform in color and appearance.

B. Furnish manufacturer or supplier certifications for all products and materials.

C. Well in advance of placing concrete, the Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer the sources of

individual materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Contractor shall discuss placement methods, waterstops and curing. Contractor shall propose methods of hot and cold weather concreting as required.

D. A meeting shall be held prior to placement of plasticized concrete. The plasticizer (high range

water reducer) manufacturer's representative and the Contractor shall be available to discuss the properties and techniques of batching and placing plasticized concrete.

E. If during the progress of the work, it is impossible to secure concrete of the required workability

and strength with the materials being furnished, the Engineer may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to secure the desired properties. All changes so ordered shall be made at the Contractor's expense.

F. If during the progress of the work, the materials from the sources originally accepted change in

characteristics, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense, make new acceptance tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes. Such testing and design shall be accomplished with the assistance of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.

G. Reinforced concrete shall comply with ACI 318, the recommendations of ACI 350, and other

stated specifications, codes and standards.

H. The Contractor is responsible for field testing. Methods of testing will comply with the latest applicable ASTM methods.

I. Samples of constituents and of concrete as-placed will be subjected to laboratory tests. All

materials incorporated in the Work shall conform to accepted samples. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Cement: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set.

B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other

materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate.


C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid contamination. Allow sand to drain to a uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates.

D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to avoid contamination, evaporation or damage. Provide

suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform dispersion of ingredients in admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which could adversely affect their characteristics.

E. Pozzolan: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from dampness and

contamination.

F. Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weathertight buildings or off the ground and under cover.

G. Liquid curing compounds: Store in closed containers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.

B. Like items or materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide

standardization for appearance, maintenance, and manufacturer's service. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall comply with these Specifications and any applicable state or local requirements.

B. Cement: Domestic Portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining cements shall not be used. Cement brand shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. Refer to Table 1 for cement type(s) to be used with each class of concrete.

C. Fine aggregate: Washed natural sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33.

D. Coarse aggregate: Well-graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to the requirements

of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be listed in ASTM C33 Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number. Limits of Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be listed in ASTM C33 Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for concrete mixes as shown in Table 1 herein. The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate can’t exceed one-fifth (1/5) the narrowest form dimension, one-third (1/3) of slab total thickness, and three-fourth (3/4) the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing steel bars.

E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious

substances, and meet the requirements of ASTM C1602.


F. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one (1) admixture in a concrete mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer. Admixtures shall be compatible with the concrete mix including other admixtures.

1. Air entraining admixture. The admixture shall comply with ASTM C260. Proportioning and

mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Water reducing agent. The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A. Proportioning

and mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. High-Range Water Reducer (Plasticizer). The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494

Type F and shall result in non-segregating plasticized concrete with little bleeding and with physical properties of low water/cement ratio concrete. The treated concrete shall be capable of maintaining plastic state in excess of 30 minutes to two (2) hours depending upon the product used. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not be used without

written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the admixtures shall be retarding or accelerating water reducing or high range water reducing admixtures.

G. Pozzolan (Fly ash)

1. Pozzolan shall be Class C fly ash complying with ASTM C618, including the requirements

of Table 1 except the Loss of Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3 percent (3%) maximum. 2. Testing of the fly ash and/or the fly ash and concrete mixture is required to provide test data

confirming that the fly ash in combination with the cement to be used meets all strength requirements and is compatible with the other concrete additives. Provide material certifications from the fly ash supplier.

a. Pozzolan shall be tested in compliance with ASTM C311 with the following restriction:

A minimum of one (1) sample weighing four (4) pounds shall be taken from each 200 tons of pozzolan supplied for the project.

H. Sheet Curing Materials: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or white burlap-polyethylene

sheeting all complying with ASTM C171.

I. Liquid Curing Compound: Liquid membrane-forming curing compound shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C309 Type 1-D (clear or translucent with fugitive dye) and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil.

J. Vapor Retarder: Vapor retarder shall be Stego 10 mil Class A vapor retarder, or approved equal.

2.3 MIXES

A. Development of mix designs and testing shall be by a concrete ready mix supplier acceptable to the Engineer, engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor.


B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits specified in Table 1 and produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance, and other required properties. Proportion ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture which will readily work in corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or allowing excessive free water to collect on the surface.

C. The design mix shall be based on historical experience and previous experience with prior mixes

with essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if not available, be developed by laboratory tests.

1. If developed by laboratory tests, water content of the concrete shall be based on a curve

showing the relation between water cementitious ratio and seven (7) and 28 day compressive strengths of concrete made using the proposed materials. The curves shall be determined by four or more points, each representing an average value of at least three (3) test specimens at each age. The curves shall have a range of values sufficient to yield the desired data, including the compressive strengths specified, without extrapolation. The water content of the concrete mixes to be used, as determined from the curve, shall correspond to strengths 16 percent (16%) greater than the required design strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the limiting values for maximum water cementitious ratio and net maximum cementitious content as specified in Table 1.

D. Compressive Tests: The proposed concrete mix or mixes shall be tested to demonstrate

compliance with the compression strength requirements in conformity with the provisions of ACI 318.

E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown within the range of 4.0 to 7.0%.

1. If the air entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing methods other than

ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content, make special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal required under paragraph 1.04.

F. Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143, shall be 4-inch maximum. If the plasticizer

is used, the slump indicated shall be that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a slump ranging from 6 to 9 inches.

G. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or more

admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of each other.

H. Where synthetic reinforcing fibers are specified to be used in Table 1, fibers shall be added from

the manufacturer's pre-measured bags and according to the manufacturer's recommendations in a manner which will ensure complete dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the concrete.


Table 1

Cementitious Class

Cement 1

Compressive Strength

2

Minimum Bags of

Portland Cement

Fine Aggregate

3

Coarse Aggregate

4

A C150 Type I

2,500 4 1/2 C33 57

B C150 Type I

3,500 5 1/2 C33 57

C C150 Type I

4,000 6 C33 57

D C150 Type I

5,000 7 C33 67

E (10) C150 Type I

3,000 5 C33 7

Cementitious Class

W/C Ratio 5

Fly Ash 6

AE 7

WR 8

HRWR 9

A 0.62 max - No Yes No B 0.54 max 15-25 Yes Yes No C 0.45 max 15-25 Yes Yes Yes D 0.40 max 15-25 Yes Yes No

E (10) 0.54 max - No Yes Yes

NOTES:

1. ASTM designation 2. Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days 3. ASTM designation 4. Size Number in ASTM C33 5. W/C is Water Cementitious ratio by weight 6. Fly ash, percent of total cementitious material by weight. Reduce fly ash percentage to

fifteen to twenty percent (15-20%) from October through March. Fly ash may be used in any mix in accordance with the requirements of Article 2.02.G and other provisions of this section.

7. AE is air entraining admixture 8. WR is water reducing admixture 9. HRWR is high range water reducer


10. Class E Mix: Add 1.5 pounds of synthetic reinforcing fibers per cubic-yard of concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MEASURING MATERIALS

A. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a plant acceptable to the Engineer. The addition of any high range water reducer will occur on site after concrete has been tested for slump and air content, and sampled for compressive strength (if as directed by Engineer).

B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and within the tolerances

given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Scales shall have been certified by the local Sealer of Weights and Measures within one (1) year of use.

C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates with a moisture meter. Compensate for

varying moisture contents of fine aggregates. Record the number of gallons of water as batched on printed batching tickets.

D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or measuring tanks, or

by means of an automatic dispenser approved by the manufacturer of the specified admixture.

1. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device.

2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence.

3.2 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING

A. Concrete shall be ready-mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to the Engineer. No hand-mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching plant. Equip each transit-mix truck with a continuous, non-reversible, revolution counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds.

B. Ready-mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded

not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name plate.

C. Any addition of water must be directed by the Engineer. Added water shall be incorporated by additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions. The amount of water added shall be shown on each delivery ticket.

D. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with ACI 318 and ASTM

C94.

E. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Metal or metal-lined non-aluminum discharge chutes shall be used and shall have slopes not exceeding one (1) vertical to two (2) horizontal and not less than one (1) vertical to three (3)


horizontal. Chutes more than 20 feet long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before distribution.

F. Re-tempering of concrete or mortar that has partially hardened (that is, mixing with or without

additional cement, aggregate, or water) will not be permitted.

G. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks from the batching plants so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms.

H. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready mixed concrete to the Engineer as each truck arrives. Each

ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement and each aggregate as batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement and water in each batch, the quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the numerical sequence of the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck.

I. Temperature Mixing Time Control

1. In cold weather (see paragraph 3.07.D) maintain the as-mixed temperature of the concrete

and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms as indicated in Table 2. 2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in the mixer before

cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 90°F.

3. In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of the concrete below

the maximum placing temperature of 90°F. If necessary, substitute well-crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water.

4. The maximum time interval between the addition of mixing water and/or cement to the batch

and placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following:

Table 2

Air or Concrete Temperature (Whichever Is Higher) Maximum Time (27°C) 80°F to 90°F (32°C)…………………………………….45 minutes (21°C) 70°F to 79°F (26°C)…………………………………….60 minutes (5°C) 40°F to 69°F (20°C)……………………………………...90 minutes

If an approved high range water reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes.

3.3 INSTALLATION – CONCRETE TOPPING

A. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt and other foreign materials.


B. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use of soaker hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately 1/16 to 1/8-inch thick cement paste. 1. A bonding grout may be substituted for the cement slurry. The bonding grout shall be

composed of one part Portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, an approved bonding admixture, and water; mixed to achieve the consistency of thick paint.

C. Provide tooled control joints as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified in this Specification.

3.4 INSPECTION AND COORDINATION

A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing, and curing of concrete shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer at all times. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of readiness to proceed with each concrete placement at least 24 hours in advance. The Engineer will inspect the preparations for concreting including the preparation of previously placed concrete; the reinforcing; and the alignment, cleanliness, and tightness of formwork. No placement shall be made without the inspection and acceptance of the Engineer.

3.5 CONCRETE APPEARANCE

A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition, the concrete shall be rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit, but excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed, changes in the concrete mix shall be obtained only by adjusting one or more of the following:

1. The gradation of aggregate. 2. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate. 3. The percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits.

B. Concrete for the Work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when hardened, will have

the required strength, durability, and appearance. Mixtures and workmanship shall be such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no finishing. When concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete when viewed in good lighting from 10 feet away shall be pleasing in appearance, and at 20 feet shall show no visible defects.

3.6 PLACING AND COMPACTING

A. Placing

1. Verify that all the formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and is securely braced prior to concrete placement. Remove ice, excess water, dirt, and other foreign materials from


forms. Confirm that reinforcement and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a competent workman at the location of the pour who can assure that reinforcement and embedded items remain in designated locations while concrete is being placed. Add water to semiporous subgrades or forms to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Seal extremely porous subgrades in an approved manner.

2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to rehandling

or flowing. Place concrete continuously at a rate which ensures the concrete is being integrated with fresh plastic concrete. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved.

3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design suitable for pumping and submit

for approval. The maximum size of coarse aggregate used in the mix should be limited to one-third of the smallest inside diameter of the delivery system.

4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer useful. Temporary

spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only when made of galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained.

5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously placed in the

supporting element (columns, slabs, and/or walls) has reached adequate strength. Prepare previously placed and hardened concrete surfaces by cleaning using steel brushes and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces designated to be

painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a suitable tool to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form. Prevent the formation of excessive surface voids.

7. Slabs

a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds, and jointing materials have been positioned, the

concrete shall be placed continuously between construction joints beginning at a bulkhead, edgeform, or corner. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation.

b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete placed after the delay

shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level and struck off with a straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows.

c. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them, place the walls and

compact as specified. Allow one (1) hour to pass between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to permit consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface of the wall moist so as to prevent cold joints.


8. Formed Concrete

a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to prevent segregation. Bottom of tremie tubes shall preferably be in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not permit concrete to drop freely more than 4-feet. Place concrete for walls in 12-inch to 24-inch lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. If plasticized concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may be increased to 7 feet and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed 15 feet.

B. Compacting

1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding, or forking so that concrete is

thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items, and openings, and into corners of forms. Puddling, spading, etc. shall be continuously performed along with vibration of the placement to eliminate air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness.

2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators. The number, type,

and size of the units shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of placing operations. No concrete shall be ordered until sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in working order) are on the job.

3. A minimum frequency of 7,000 revolutions per minute is required for mechanical vibrations.

Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 inches to 30 inches apart. At each insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations.

4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs less than 8 inches thick shall be consolidated with

vibrating screeds; slabs 8 inches to 12 inches thick shall be compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds. Vibrators shall always be placed into concrete vertically and shall not be laid horizontally or laid over.

5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall be used unless

otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for each vibrator needed to melt down the batch at the point of discharge, one or more additional vibrators must be used to densify, homogenize, and perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically at regular intervals, through the fresh concrete, and slightly into the previous lift, if any.

6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly placed concrete but

shall not be used to move or transport concrete in the forms. Vibration shall continue until:

a. Frequency returns to normal b. Surface appears liquefied, flattened, and glistening c. Trapped air ceases to rise d. Coarse aggregate has blended into surface, but has not disappeared.


3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of any nature during construction operations.

B. Curing Methods

1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture and maintain

specified temperatures at the surface for a minimum of seven (7) days after placement. Curing methods to be used are as follows:

a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding, continuous sprinkling, or

covered with saturated burlap. Begin wet cure as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain wet cure over 24 hours a day.

b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material. Securely anchor

sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs.

c. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface except for surfaces to

receive additional concrete. Curing compound shall not be placed on any concrete surface where additional concrete is to be placed, where surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish requires an integral floor product. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not after the concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be absorbed into the concrete. Application shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Specified applications of curing methods.

a. Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only. b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water curing, sheet material

curing, or liquid membrane curing. c. Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water curing or liquid membrane

curing. d. Horizontal Surfaces that will receive additional concrete, coatings, grout, or other

material that requires bond to the substrate: Water curing. e. Formed Surfaces: None if non-absorbent forms are left in place seven (7) days. Water

cure if absorbent forms are used. Sheet cured or liquid membrane cured if forms are removed prior to seven (7) days. Exposed horizontal surfaces of formed walls or columns shall be water cured for seven (7) days or until next placement of concrete is made.

f. Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material cured.


C. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun to prevent checking and crazing.

D. Cold Weather Concreting

1. For this Specification, "cold weather" is defined as a period when, for more than three (3)

consecutive days, the average daily outdoor temperature is less than 40°F. The average daily temperature shall be calculated as the average of the highest and the lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight.

2. Concrete placed during cold weather shall be batched, delivered, cured, and protected in

compliance with the recommendations of ACI 306.1 and the additional requirements of this Section.

3. The Contractor shall discuss proposed cold weather work plan with the Engineer. The

discussion shall encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during the cold weather including the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of the concrete. The procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures shall also be discussed. Cold weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer.

4. The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement and during the protection

period shall be as indicated in Table 3. The temperature of the concrete in place and during the protection period shall not exceed these values by more than 20°F. Prevent overheating and non-uniform heating of the concrete.

Table 3

Concrete Temperatures Minimum Dimension of Section <12 inches 12 to 36 inches Min. concrete temperature: 55°F 50°F

5. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required) for a total of at least 350 degree-days of curing.

a. Degree-days are defined as the total number of 24 hour periods multiplied by the

weighted average daily air temperature at the surface of the concrete (e.g., 5 days at an average 70°F = 350 degree-days).

b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum hourly measurements of

the air temperature in the shade at the surface of the concrete taking any measurement less than 50°F as 0°F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day.

6. Salt, manure, or other chemicals shall not be used for protection.


7. At the end of the protection period, allow the concrete to cool gradually to the ambient temperature. If water curing has been used, the concrete shall not be exposed to temperatures below those shown in Table 3 unless at least 24 hours has elapsed since water curing has been terminated.

8. During periods not defined as cold weather, but when freezing temperatures are expected or

occur, protect concrete surfaces from freezing for the first 24 hours after placing.

E. Hot Weather Concreting

1. For this Specification, "hot weather" is defined as any combination of high air temperatures, low relative humidity and wind velocity which produces a rate of evaporation as estimated in ACI 305.1, approaching or exceeding 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour (lb/ft²-hr).

2. Concrete placed during hot weather, shall be batched, delivered, placed, cured, and protected

in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 305.1 and the additional requirements of this Specification.

a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90°F and every effort shall be

made to maintain a uniform concrete mix temperature below this level. The temperature of the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties from loss of slump, flash, set, or cold joints.

b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to promptly deliver, to promptly place the

concrete upon its arrival at the job and to provide vibration immediately after placement. c. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover plastic concrete with sheet

material.

3. The Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and procedures he/she proposes to use for concrete placement and curing during hot weather periods. Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer.

3.8 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be removed before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 percent (30%) of its specified strength, nor before reaching the following number of degree-days of curing (whichever is longer):

Table 4

Forms for Degree Days Beams and slabs 500 Walls and vertical surfaces 100

(See definition of degree-days in paragraph 3.07.D.5.a)


B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 70 percent (70%) of its

specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its own weight and the construction live loads upon it.

3.9 FIELD TESTS

A. Sets of field control cylinder specimens will be taken during the progress of the Work, in compliance with ASTM C31. The number of sets of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day shall not be less than once a day, nor less than once for each 50 cubic-yards of concrete.

1. A "set" of test cylinders consists of five (5) cylinders: one (1) to be broken at seven (7) days

and three (3) to be broken and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The fifth may be used for a special break at three (3) days or to verify strength after 28 days if 28 days breaks are low.

2. Cylinders should be capped before testing to maintain a uniform load distribution. Cylinders are general capped with sulfur mortar in compliance with ASTM C617 or neoprene pad caps in compliance with ASTM C1231.

3. When the average 28 day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set falls below the

required compressive strength or below proportional minimum seven-day strengths (where proper relation between 7 and 28 day strengths have been established by tests), proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to achieve the required strengths.

B. The Contractor shall cooperate in the making of tests by allowing free access to the work for the

selection of samples; providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens; affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through Contractor’s operations; and furnishing material and labor required for the purpose of taking concrete cylinder samples. Curing boxes shall be acceptable to the Engineer.

C. Slump tests will be made in the field immediately prior to placing the concrete. Such tests shall

be made in accordance with ASTM C143. If the slump is greater than the specified range, the concrete shall be rejected. If slump test resulted in a shear slump failure, the slump test should be repeated. If shear slump failure re-occurs the concrete batch is to be rejected.

D. Slump flow tests will be made in the field immediately prior to placing Self Compacting Concrete

(SCC) in compliance with ASTM C1611. Slump flow spread average diameters should not exceed 30 inches.

E. Air Content: Test for air content shall be made on a fresh concrete sample. Air content for

concrete made of ordinary aggregate having low absorption shall be made in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM C231 or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173. If lightweight aggregates or aggregates with high absorptions are used, the latter test method shall be used.

F. Temperature. Test for temperature shall be made on a fresh concrete sample in accordance with

ASTM C1064.

G. Density. Test for density shall be made in accordance with ASTM C138.


3.10 FIELD CONTROL

A. The Engineer may require that cores be taken from any questionable area in the concrete work such as construction joints and other locations as required for determination of concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be the basis for acceptance, rejection, or determining the continuation of concrete work.

B. The Contractor shall cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the Work and

permitting the use of ladders, scaffolding and such incidental equipment as may be required. The Contractor shall repair all core holes.

3.11 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS

A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1, the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions outlined to apply to the remainder of the Work. Furthermore, the Engineer shall have the right to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which failed. The cost of such additional curing shall be at the Contractor's expense. In the event that such additional curing does not give the strength required, as evidenced by core and/or load test, the Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or replacement of those portions of the structure which fail to develop the required strength. The cost of all such core borings and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required because strengths of test specimens are below that specified, shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor. In such cases of failure to meet the strength requirements the Contractor and Engineer shall confer to determine what adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with the subsections titled "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of ASTM C94. The “purchaser” referred to in C94 is the Contractor in this Specification.

B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the required strength, the Engineer

will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and C39. In the case of failure of the cores, the Engineer, in addition to other resources, may require, at the Contractor's expense, load tests on any one of the slabs, beams, piles, caps, and columns in which such concrete was used. Test need not be made until concrete has aged 60 days.

C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60 percent (60%) of the required minimum 28-day

strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed and replaced. 3.12 PATCHING

A. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed, fins and other projections shall be removed; recesses left by the removal of form ties shall be filled; and surface defects, which do not impair structural strength, shall be repaired. Clean all exposed surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete, to approval of the Engineer.


B. Immediately after removal of forms remove plugs and break off metal ties as required. Holes are then to be promptly filled upon stripping as follows: Moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/16-inch brush coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the touch (just short of "balling"). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense, and an excess of paste appears on the surface on the form of a spiderweb. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing.

C. When patching exposed surfaces, the same source of cement and sand as used in the parent

concrete shall be employed. Adjust color if necessary by addition of proper amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine Carborundum stone at an age of one (1) to five (5) days if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent concrete. Exercise care to avoid damaging or staining the virgin skin of the surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter.

3.13 REPAIRS

A. It is the intent of this Specification to require quality work including adequate forming, proper mixture and placement of concrete, and curing so completed concrete surfaces will require no patching.

B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer shall be repaired.

3.14 SCHEDULE

A. The following (Table 5) represents the general applications for the various concrete classes and design strengths:

Table 5 Class Design Strength

(psi) Description

A 2,500 Concrete fill and duct and pipe encasement. B 3,500 Concrete overlay slabs (sidewalks) and pavements C 4,000 Walls, slabs on grade, suspended slab and beam systems,

columns, grade beams and all other structural concrete D 5,000 Precast and precast prestressed concrete E 3,000 Concrete topping over precast roof tees

END OF SECTION – 03 30 00


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION ROUGH CARPENTRY VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 06 10 00-1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS -FORT SMITH

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimensional lumber. 2. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 3. Temporary closure of openings made necessary by the conduct of the work to protect the

premises from weather and unauthorized entrance.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 06 40 00, Finish Carpentry, for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise specified.

B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction and indicated to receive a stained or natural finish.


A. Project work involves rehabilitation of a historically significant building. The building shall be treated respectfully. Existing conditions are to be carefully respected and no material or element shall be removed or disfigured unless specifically indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or directed by the Architect.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for the following products:


1. Metal framing anchors.

2. Construction adhesives.

C. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials: a. Baxter: J.H. Baxter Company. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc. c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. d. Hickson Corporation. e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc.

2. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Company. b. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. c. Silver Metal Products, Inc. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. e. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Company, Inc.

2.2 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.


B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NELMA – Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.

2. SPIB – Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency.

D. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture

content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.

1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.

B. Pressure treat above ground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:

1. Wood nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

C. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.


2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule (NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated.

B. Joists and Rafters: Provide the following grades and species:

1. Grade: No. 2. 2. Species: Southern Yellow Pine, SPIB.

C. Load-Bearing Walls: Provide framing of the following grade and species:

1. Grade: Stud. 2. Species: Spruce-pine-fir south;’

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C plugged, fire-resistant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than ¾” nominal thickness.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members.

B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.

C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment.

D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel.


B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.

C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch-long seat and 1-1/4-inch-wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.

D. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Where existing framing is noted on the drawings to be shimmed or shored to a level condition, install horizontal plumb lines to establish a mean elevation for the low area with respect to the adjacent floor areas.

C. Where existing windows are shown to be leveled, jack up framing in 4 increments of ¼ the total required jacking height. After each jacking lift, inspect the framing for signs of damage or structural distress. If damage is evident, cease jacking operations and notify the Architect for further instructions.

D. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.


E. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.

F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:

1. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 2. "Table 23-I-Q--Nailing Schedule" of the Uniform Building Code.

G. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.

H. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity.

I. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS

A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.

C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports.

3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING

A. Historic Wood Framing: Where the spacing between existing wood wall studs exceeds 24 inches on center, install supplemental framing to ensure that spacing is adequate to support installation of new gypsum board on the walls.


B. General: Where new studs are required, arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs; except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at mid-height of single-story partitions over 96 inches high and multistory partitions, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.

D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.

1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 36 inches and less in width, and not less than 6-inch nominal depth for wider openings.

3.5 CEILING JOIST FRAMING

A. Historic Ceiling Framing: Where the spacing between existing wood ceiling joists exceeds 24 inches on center, install supplemental framing to ensure that spacing is adequate to support installation of new gypsum board on the ceilings.

B. Ceiling Joists: Where new ceiling joists are required, install with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION FINISH CARPENTRY VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 06 40 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 06 40 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section includes the following: 1. Remove and replace limited portions of existing wood clapboard siding to close openings

to interior of attic. 2. Remove existing wood trim from walls where shown, including baseboards, picture rails,

chair rails, and chair rails/aprons, strip paint, repair and prepare for painting, and reinstall. 3. Strip paint and repair existing wood planks at walls and ceilings and prepare for painting. 4. Wood viewing window sash and trim for windows in walls and ceilings. 5. Interior standing and running trim. 6. Miscellaneous interior repairs.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry, furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view.

2. Section 08 01 52, Wood Window Restoration, for work on existing exterior windows and for removal, restoration, and reinstallation of existing wood casings.

3. Section 08 55 00 Wood Door Restoration, for restoration of doors, for new batten door, and for removal, restoration, and reinstallation of existing door casings.

4. Section 08 80 00, Glazing, for glass used with the view windows. 5. Section 09 91 10, Painting, for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry. 6. Section 10 28 19, Tub and Shower Enclosures, for glass shower doors used as view

windows in walls.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish carpentry includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.




1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type product specified and incorporated into items of woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful performance.

B. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:

1. AWI Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.


A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, and wet work in space is completed and nominally dry.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication.

1.10 REGULATORY/SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing painted surfaces have been tested for the presence of lead-based paint. Of the items tested, some were found to be painted with lead-based paint. Refer to Section 00 31 26, Existing Hazardous Material Information, for details. Conform to local and federal codes and regulations for the protection of workers and the handling and disposing of the lead containing paint residue.


1. Provide mechanical ventilation, fire extinguisher, protective clothing, etc., as required to ensure the health and safety of workers and the security and safety of the building fabric.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.

B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1.

D. Hardboard: AHA A115.4

E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

2.2 EXISTING PAINT REMOVAL PRODUCTS

A. Paint Stripper for Lead-Based Paint: A paint stripper equal Franmar’s BLUE BEAR 690PB Lead Paint Remover (formerly known as Lead Out) as manufactured by Franmar Chemical, Inc. 10282 E. 1400 North Rd. Bloomington, IL 61705 1-800-538-5069. The stripper is formulated to remediate the lead inside the paint while safely removing multiple coats of paint.

B. Paint Stripper for Surfaces Without Lead-Based Paint: Ready-Strip Pro as manufactured by Back to Nature Products and distributed by Sunnyside Corporation, Wheeling, IL, or approved equal.

C. Wood Filler: Plastic wood filler or wood putty as selected by the Contractor and approved by the Architect.

2.3 WOOD PRESERVATIVE

A. Wood preservative shall be equal to Woodlife Classic Clear Wood Preservative by Rust-Oleum Brands, or equal.

1. As an option, Contractor may use a mixed solution consisting of 60% boiled linseed oil and 40% turpentine.


2.4 CEILING VIEW WINDOW HARDWARE:

A. Hardware as required for the ceiling view window in the Porch ceiling will be included in Allowance No. 1.

2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

A. Lumber Trim for Painted Finish: Finished lumber (S4S), solid lumber, of the following species and grades:

1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. 2. Grade: Custom: 3. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.

B. Profiles: Made to size and profile to match existing in locations where used. Where profiles are shown on the Drawings the intent is to provide a profile similar, but not necessarily and exact match.

2.6 SIDING

A. Lumber Siding: Kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20.

1. Grade: Finish or 1 Common, Eastern White Pine, Eastern Spruce, or white woods. 2. Profile: Clapboard Siding: Non-tapered, ½-inch thick with exposure to match existing.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer:

1. Hot-dip galvanized steel.

B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

C. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.

D. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing siding work.

2.8 FABRICATION


A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.

B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work:

1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds.

C. Except where specified otherwise, ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Verify dimensions taken at the job site which affect the Work. Bring field conditions that are at variance to the attention of the Architect for decisions regarding corrective measures before the start of the installation.

3.2 REMOVALS

A. Remove existing trim and other items indicated on the Drawings for removal, paint stripping, repair and reinstallation. 1. Those items not shown to be reinstalled shall be discarded.

B. Reinstallation Identification: Each item that is identified to be removed and reinstalled shall be reinstalled in the same location from which it was removed. 1. Apply a permanent label to the concealed face of each piece of baseboard or trim with a

numbering sequence indicating the location from which it was removed. Record this information on a record set of drawings in order that individual items can be reinstalled in the exact location from which they were removed.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.


C. Prime lumber for exterior applications (wood siding pieces) to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Section 09 91 10, Painting.

D. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming.

3.4 RESTORATION AND REUSE OF EXISTING INTERIOR WOODWORK

A. Remove existing painted finish of wood trim down to bare wood. Apply paint stripper, and remove, following the manufacturer’s written instructions. Conform with local and federal codes and regulations for the protection of workers and the handling and disposing of the lead containing paint residue.

B. Fill screw holes and other holes, gouges and cracks in trim using wood filler for small holes and dutchmen for large holes. 1. Dutchmen shall be of same wood species as the item being repaired and shall match as

closely as possible in figure and grain. After dry fitting, glue and clamp in place.

C. Replace missing trim, fastening with good glue and countersunk finishing nails. Fill all countersinks with wood filler and sand smooth.

D. Prepare woodwork for refinishing as specified in Section 09 91 00, Painting.

E. Reinstall existing woodwork in accordance with the installation requirements of this Section.


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.

1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.

3.6 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and


miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.

1. Where Drawings call for trim to match existing, carefully take profiles so that they will match when butted.

2. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 3. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 4. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent

movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

3.7 SIDING INSTALLATION

A. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Replace portions of individual siding units as indicated on the Drawings to close openings into the attic space above Room 109. In order to fit the existing conditions siding members may need to be oversized so that they can be cut to comply with the profile condition of the member being replaced. 1. Prior to installing, prepare as specified in Section 09 91 10, Painting, for preparation of

new wood. 2. Following preparation of siding members, apply a coat of wood preservative to all

surfaces including ends either by brush or by dipping. Let treatment dry.

B. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION THERMAL INSULATION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 07 21 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section includes furnishing and installing the following insulation:

1. Unfaced batt insulation in exterior walls. 2. Unfaced batt insulation in the attic above Room 109. 3. Replace any existing unfaced batt insulation in the attic damaged as a result of the instal-

lation of electric wiring and fire protection sprinkler system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of insulation with certification identifying manufacturer’s name, brand name, R value, and composition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ATTIC INSULATION

A. Unfaced Batts: ASTM C665, Type I, with maximum flame-spread and smoke –developed in-dexes of 25 and 50, respectively; per ASTM E-84, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion charac-teristics, with an installed thermal resistance of R-30.

2.2 WALL INSULATION

A. Unfaced Batts: In 4-inch stud walls, ASTM C 665, Type I, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E-84 passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics, with an installed thermal resistance of R-13.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION THERMAL INSULATION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 07 21 00 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

A. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow.

B. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tight-ly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

C. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.2 WALL CAVITY INSTALLATION

A. Install batt insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following re-quirements. 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by the framing members.

If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer’s standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are oth-erwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

3.3 ATTIC INSTALLATION

A. Install unfaced insulation on top of the ceiling in Room 109, fitting tightly between ceiling joists so that insulation extends over entire ceiling.

B. Reinstall or repair existing insulation in the attic removed or damaged by work installing con-duit, sprinkler piping, etc. Remove all construction items and debris before accomplishing this work.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installa-tion.


WILLHAF HOUSE EXTERIOR RESTORATION JOINT SEALANTS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 07 92 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing sealants to provide a barrier against air, water, moisture, or dirt, and where needed for appearance.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s technical data and application instructions.

B. Samples of sealant colors.


A. Contractor shall have copies of referenced ASTM standards available on the job site.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and store in a protected area at temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Install sealants only in favorable weather conditions as defined in ASTM C962. To help bal-ance extension and compression of sealants in exterior working joints, install sealants at sub-strate temperatures as near as possible to 55 degrees F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Other manufacturer’s products may be used provided they are approved as equal.

WILLHAF HOUSE EXTERIOR RESTORATION JOINT SEALANTS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 07 92 00 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

1. Backer Rod Manufacturing and Supply Company, Denver, Colorado. 2. Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Michigan. 3. General Electric Company, Waterford, New York. 4. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville, Pennsylvania. 5. Sika Chemical Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey. 6. Sonneborn-Contech, Minneapolis, Minnesota. 7. Tremco, Cleveland, Ohio. 8. Williams Products, Inc., Troy, Michigan.

2.2 INTERIOR SEALANTS

A. Vertical Surfaces: Silicone or urethane. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use M, A, or O, as applicable.

B. Horizontal Surfaces in Non-Traffic Area: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use NT. For areas with slopes exceeding 1 percent. Use Grade NS for Use NT.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Follow sealant manufacturer’s instructions for installation of sealants, joint fillers, bond break-ers, and primers. Tool joints concave.

B. Install elastomeric sealants in accordance with ASTM C962.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION WOOD WINDOW RESTORATION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 08 01 52 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 08 01 52 - WOOD WINDOW RESTORATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary and reasonably incidental to complete restoration of the existing wood windows.

B. In a previous phase each window sash was removed, the sash was repaired, and it was prime painted.

C. Work included in this Section, and as shown on the Drawings and in the window schedule, includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Remove sash in order to install new weather stripping. 2. Repair all existing window frames and sills as scheduled or required by existing

conditions. Remove existing paint to bare wood, prepare for painting by filling holes, checks, and open grain, and sanding smooth. Prime paint before sash is reinstalled.

D. In addition to restoration of the windows, work of this section includes removal, restoration, and reinstallation of existing interior wood window casings.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 08 71 00, Hardware, for new window hardware where called for, reconditioning of existing window hardware, and for installation of all window hardware.

B. Section 09 91 10, Painting, for painting of wood trim, frames, sills and sash.


A. Project work involves the rehabilitation of a historically significant building. The building shall be treated respectfully. Existing conditions are to be carefully treated and no material or element shall be removed or disfigured unless specifically indicated on Drawings, specified herein, or directed by the Architect.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product literature for all specified products.


A. Window restoration shall be by craftsmen having a minimum of five years experience in the repair of historic wood windows.

B. The windows are considered important historical material. The intent of this work is to retain and repair the maximum amount of the original wood as possible. Work must proceed with care to avoid damage or loss of the historic material.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect materials from the weather. Store materials a minimum of 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking and protect with waterproof covering allowing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. Do not store materials in damp portions of the building.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pine, Eastern White Pine, or other suitable and approved fine-grain lumber, kiln-dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32-inch wide by 2-inches long.

1. Wood shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining per NWWDA I.S.4.

B. Glue: White waterproof glue conforming to ASTM D 3110, specifications for adhesives used in non-structural glued wood products.

C. Wood Preservative: Woodlife Classic Clear Wood Preservative by Rust-Oleum Brands, or approved equal.



D. Wood Screws, Nails, Miscellaneous Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized or brass, of the size and type required for the location and intended use.

E. Weatherstripping: Spring bronze folded (meeting rail) and flange type (sill) to suit application.

F. Products for Preparation of Existing Wood for Painting: As specified in Section 06 40 00, Rough Carpentry, for both paint stripping of lead-based paint and stripping of paint that does not contain lead.

G. Prime Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 10, Painting. Provide primer produced by the same manufacturer as finish coats.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be applied and notify Contractor if conditions or surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper installation of the work. Starting on the work will imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified.

B. Verify dimensions taken at the job site which affect the work. Bring field conditions that are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decisions regarding corrective measures before the start of the installation.

C. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress.

3.2 REMOVALS

A. Remove all existing sash for installation of weatherstripping. Reinstall sash in original openings.

B. Remove any existing hardware from sash ready for cleaning and reinstallation.

C. Install new window hardware where scheduled.

D. Install temporary closures at each opening where sash is removed, taking care that the installation of closure does not damage the window frame or trim in any manner. No device of any kind may be attached to or driven into any exposed part of the window system including nails and screws.

E. Protect frames and openings from weather.


3.3 PREPARATION OF EXISTING CASINGS AND TRIM READY FOR REPAIR

A. Remove existing painted finish of window casings and trim down to bare wood. Apply paint stripper, and remove, following the manufacturer’s written instructions. Conform with local and federal codes and regulations for the protection of workers and the handling and disposing of the lead containing paint residue.

B. Sand surfaces to sound paintable surface by hand or mechanical vibrating sander only. The use of rotary disk sanders will not be permitted.

3.4 WOOD WINDOW RESTORATION

A. Repair wood windows (frame and trim) by consolidating, patching, splicing, or otherwise reinforcing wood with new wood matching existing wood. Sash has already been repaired except where noted.

B. Close all open joints and secure with wood glue and wood screws. Fill all holes with non-shrinking wood filler. All screws shall be countersunk and filled with non-shrinking wood filler sanded to a smooth surface.

C. Fill all joints which cannot be closed without dismantling the window and all other gouges and holes in the window frame with wood filler.

D. At Window 107, where the sill has settled at one end, jack-up or repair the framing and replumb the sill, and realign the sash, frame, and sill as required. When the sill is plumbed remove the filler from the bottom of the sash.

E. Where gaps appear at the top or bottom of the window when closed install a filler or replace the upper or lower rail as required to close the opening.

F. After repairs have been completed, prepare wood for reinstallation and finishing.

1. For existing wood, sandpaper smooth all finished surfaces which will be exposed to view and dust off. Where paint has been removed down to a paintable surface, feather rough paint layer edges by sanding, and clean surfaces of dust.

2. For new wood, remove dust by brushing and remove grease and oil by washing with mineral spirits or other solvent. Remove sap on wood surfaces by scraping and washing with turpentine. Sand all interior wood before priming. Seal all knots or resinous areas with knot sealer and allow to dry at least 2 hours before priming. Fill all gouges, dents, and small openings in interior wood with plastic wood tinted or stained for natural appearance. Allow plastic wood to dry before painting.

3. Apply wood preservative to all bare surfaces. Apply treatment liberally by brush to joints, edges, and ends; top, sides and bottom. Allow treatment to dry.

G. Clean existing hardware and reinstall on sash.

H. Where scheduled, furnish and install new hardware which includes hardware for new windows. Procurement and installation of new hardware is included in Section 08 71 00, Hardware (Allowance No. 1).


I. Cover windows with plastic sheets to keep out of weather prior to finishing.

J. Machine the sash and install new weatherstripping on bottom rail of all windows.

K. Reinstall sash and window casings in the same openings from which they were removed.

L. Make bottom sash fully operable, raising and lowering evenly and smoothly. Secure top sash in place to make inoperable.

M. Shop prime existing window casings for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 91 10, Painting.

N. Do not damage existing hardware on window during repair work.

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Before, during, and after installation and repair, protect finishes and surfaces of materials in place. Do not remove protection until final cleaning operations.

B. Replace broken, cracked, or damaged glass and clean on both sides.

C. Each finished window installation shall be free of defects. Before final completion and acceptance, the Contractor shall repair and/or replace defective work at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Architect.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION WOOD DOOR RESTORATION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 08 13 14 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 08 13 14 – WOOD DOOR RESTORATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary and reasonably incidental to complete restoration of the existing wood doors.

B. Work detailed and scheduled includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Work of this Section applies to the interior doors and to the interior side of the exterior doors, sidelights and transom as called for in the Door Schedule on the Drawings.

2. Where screen doors at Doors 101A, 101B, and 111 were removed in a previous phase, repair all evidence of their installation on the exterior frames. (screw holes, mortise, etc.);

3. Restoration and repair of the existing interior wood doors and the interior side of exterior wood doors as scheduled or required. Work includes dutchmen repairs, new trim or sections of trim. Prepare for painting by removing existing paint down to bare wood, filling holes, checks, and open grain, and sanding smooth. Prime and backprime all new components before doors and casings are reinstalled.

C. In addition to restoration of the doors, work of this section includes removal, restoration, and reinstallation of existing wood door casings and repair of the interior of the frames for exterior doors and the repair of all parts of the frame for interior doors.

D. Work also includes the fabrication of a new wood batten door.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 08 80 00, Glazing, for any necessary reglazing of transoms and sidelights.

B. Section 08 71 00, Hardware, for new door hardware, removal and reconditioning of existing door hardware, and for installation of hardware.

C. Section 09 91 10, Painting, for finish coats after shop priming.



A. Project work involves the rehabilitation of a historically significant building. The building shall be treated respectfully. Existing conditions are to be carefully treated and no material or element shall be removed or disfigured unless specifically indicated on Drawings, specified herein, or direct by the Architect.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product literature and instructions for all specified products.


A. Door restoration shall be by craftsmen having a minimum of five years experience in the repair of historic wood doors.

B. The doors are considered important historical material. The intent of this work is to retain and repair the maximum amount of the original wood as possible. Work must proceed with care to avoid damage or loss of historic material.


A. Protect materials from the weather. Store materials a minimum of 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking and protect with waterproof covering allowing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. Do not store materials in damp portions of the building.

B. When doors have been removed, do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas exposed to direct sunlight. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Store flat and in a ventilated area before and after repair while awaiting reinstallation.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wood for Repairs: Clear Ponderosa Pine, Eastern White Pine, or other suitable and approved fine-grain lumber, kiln-dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32-inch wide by 2-inches long.

1. All wood for work on exterior doors shall be preservative treated after machining.

B. Wood Filler: Plastic wood filler or wood putty as selected by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. Color to match adjacent surface.

C. Glue: White waterproof glue conforming to ASTM D 3110, specifications for adhesives used in non-structural glued wood products.

D. Wood Preservative: Woodlife Classic Clear Wood Preservative by Rust-Oleum Brands, or approved equal.


E. Wood Screws, Nails, Miscellaneous Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized or brass, of the size and type required for the location and intended use.

F. Products for Preparation of Existing Wood for Painting: As specified in Section 06 40 00, Rough Carpentry, for both paint stripping of lead-based paint and stripping of paint that does not contain lead.

G. Prime Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 10, Painting. Provide primer produced by the same manufacturer as finish coats.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be applied and notify Contractor if conditions or surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper installation of the work. Starting on the work will imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified.

B. Verify dimensions taken at the job site which affect the work. Bring field conditions that are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decisions regarding corrective measures before the start of the installation.

C. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress.

3.2 REMOVALS


A. Remove existing wood doors and existing wood door casings.

B. Reinstallation Identification: Each item that is identified to be removed and reinstalled shall be reinstalled in the same location from which it was removed. 1. Apply a permanent label to the concealed face of each piece of baseboard or trim with a

numbering sequence indicating the location from which it was removed. Record this information on a record set of drawings in order that individual items can be reinstalled in the exact location from which they were removed.

C. Remove existing door hardware, and determine which hardware is capable of being reused.

D. Remove other items indicated on the door schedule.

3.3 RESTORATION OF EXISTING WOOD DOORS AND DOOR CASINGS

A. The exterior side of Doors 101A/101B, their sidelights, and their transom have been restored in a previous phase. All interior wood doors shall be restored.

B. Screen doors for Doors 101A, 101B, and 111 were removed in a previous phase. All evidence of their installation (screw holds, mortise, etc.) shall be repaired.

C. Remove existing painted finish of doors and door casings down to bare wood. Apply paint stripper, and remove, following the manufacturer’s written instructions. Conform with local and federal codes and regulations for the protection of workers and the handling and disposing of the lead containing paint residue.

D. Fill screw holes, holes left by removed hardware, and other holes, gouges and cracks in door using wood filler for small holes less than ¾ inch and dutchmen for large holes greater than ¾ inch. Some minor imperfections may remain.

1. Dutchmen shall be carefully cut to fit. After dry fitting, glue and clamp in place.

E. Where components are to be replaced as scheduled on the Drawings, disassemble doors, remove deteriorated member, clean, install replacement piece, re-glue the joints and reassemble the door.

F. Replace missing trim, fastening with good glue and countersunk finishing nails. Fill all countersinks with wood filler and sand smooth.

G. Trim doors to fit openings properly.

H. Apply wood preservative to all bare surfaces. Apply treatment liberally by brush to joints, edges, and ends; top, sides, and bottom. Allow treatment to dry.

I. Shop prime existing doors and door casings for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 91 10, Painting.

J. Reinstall doors and casings in the same openings from which they were removed.


K. Recondition that existing hardware that is suitable for reuse as directed by Architect, procure new hardware as scheduled by Architect, and install new and reconditioned hardware.

1. Reconditioning of existing hardware, procurement of new hardware, and installation of all hardware is included in Section 08 71 00, Hardware and is part of Allowance No. 1.

3.4 RESTORATION OF FRAMES IN PLACE

A. Prepare surface for repainting by stripping paint as specified for doors and casings. Sand prepared surfaces smooth to receive new paint coating.

B. Patch small holes, gouges, indentations, cracks, nail holes, and splits with wood filler.

1. For holes greater than ¾” use dutchman repair.

C. Clean cracks identified after surface preparation. Fill crack with wood filler and secure until set.

D. Plane and sand to smooth flush surface.

E. Apply wood preservative to all bare surfaces liberally by brush. Allow treatment to dry.

3.5 DUTCHMEN

A. Where the use of a dutchman is required:

1. Neatly cut out defective material and enough sound wood to bond dutchman to sound substrate.

2. Form prismatic void in existing wood with square corners and edges. 3. Cut dutchman exactly to fit void, with exposed portion matching original profile of

woodwork. Insert dutchman with grain of dutchman parallel to original wood grain direction.

4. Secure dutchman with waterproof adhesive and clamp in place until set, set flush or slightly proud of existing wood surface.

5. Cut dutchman repairs to door stiles with “glue joints” to provide sufficient surface for glue bonding.

6. Butt joint dutchmen are not acceptable repairs.

3.6 FABRICATION OF NEW BATTEN DOOR

A. Fabricate wood batten door with ledgers for installation at an existing door opening where shown on the Drawings. Exact dimension of door shall be determined by measurement on-site.

B. Door shall be fabricated to resemble Door 107. There are no casings associated with this door.

C. Hardware shall be as called for in the door schedule and is specified in Section 07 71 00, Hardware.


D. Shop prime the new batten door for paint finish with one coat of wood primer as specified in Section 09 91 10, Painting.

E. Align and fit door in frame with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine door for hardware. Seal cut surfaces and fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at head and jambs. Provide ¼ inch from bottom of door to

top of threshold. Bevel door 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

3.7 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING

A. Rehang doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Before, during, and after installation and repair, protect finishes and surfaces of materials in place. Do not remove protection until final cleaning operations.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION HARDWARE VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 08 71 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 08 71 00 - HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Furnishing and installation of new historic style window and door hardware as required.

This is included in Allowance No. 1. 2. Removal, cleaning, repair, reconditioning and reinstallation of existing hardware already

on the doors and windows. This is also included in Allowance No. 1

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 08 01 52, Wood Window Restoration. 2. Section 08 55 10, Wood Door Restoration.

1.3 HARDWARE ALLOWANCE

A. Selection and Ordering: 1. The purchase and delivery of new door and window hardware is included in Allowance

No. 1 which is described in Section 01 20 00, Price and Payment Procedures. The Con-tractor’s installation of this new door and window hardware, applicable taxes, and the Contractor’s overhead and profit is included in this hardware allowance.

2. Cleaning, repair and reconditioning of existing historic hardware, including installation, is also included in this allowance.

3. After the Contractor determines which of the existing pieces of door hardware can be repaired to work properly, the Architect will furnish the Contractor with the necessary schedule of new hardware to be obtained and will request that proposals be obtained and submitted in order to make a final selection.

B. Architect’s responsibilities shall be as follows: 1. Preparation of a schedule of new hardware to be obtained.

C. Hardware supplier’s responsibilities shall be as follows:

1. Submittals: Submit through Contractor the required product data, final hardware sched-ule, and separate keying schedule as specified in this Section, unless otherwise indicated.


2. Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and inventory hardware purchased as part of this Allowance.

3. Deliver keys to the Owner.

D. Contractor’s responsibilities shall be as follows:

1. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for door and window hardware in the same manner as submittals for other work.

2. Construction Schedule: Cooperate with hardware supplier(s) in establishing scheduled dates for submittals and delivery of hardware.

3. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.


A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Existing hardware shall be retained and reused on doors and windows to the extent possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING HARDWARE

A. The Contractor shall determine which items of existing door and window hardware are capable of reuse.

B. Remove all hardware, discard those items not capable of reuse or which are listed on the door schedule to be discarded or replaced.


C. Clean, repair, and refurbish existing hardware to be reused.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. If new door hardware units are required, mount them at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

B. Install each door and window hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Section 09 91 10, Painting. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION GLAZING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 08 80 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section consists of the following items as scheduled or as specified herein:

1. Reglazing any glass in existing exterior windows that is broken during construction. 2. Install new glass of different types at viewing windows in ceilings.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 06 40 00, Finish Carpentry.

B. Section 08555, Wood Window Restoration.

C. Section 10 28 19, Tub and Shower Enclosures, for viewing windows in walls of Rooms 103 and 109.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product literature for all specified products.


B. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

C. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ANNEALED GLASS FOR HISTORIC EXTERIOR WINDOWS

A. ASTM C 1036.

1. Clear: Type I float, Class I., thickness to match existing or as called for on Drawings.

B. Glazing Putty for Historic Exterior Windows: Sarco Putty Co.; Sarco Multi-Glaze Type M, or approved equal.

2.2 INSULATING LAMINATED GLASS UNITS

A. For use in the view window in the ceiling of Room 109: 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-5/16 inch (32 mm). 2. Minimum Thickness of Top Lite: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Top Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Bottom Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.


a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm).

2.3 INSULATING GLASS

A. For use in the view window in the ceiling of the front porch.

B. Glass Type Clear insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/8-inch. 3. Top Lite: Annealed float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Bottom Lite: Fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks:

1. Neoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer.

D. Spacers:

1. Neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.


2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer.

E. Edge Blocks:

1. Neoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NEW GLAZING

A. Install new insulated laminated glass in the ceiling of Room 109 in fixed glass wood frames, bedded on neoprene pads and the perimeter sealed. Remove excess sealant from exposed surfaces.

B. Install new insulated glass in the observation window in the ceiling of the front porch. Bed glass in putty, secure glass with glaziers points and face putty. Remove excess putty from exposed surfaces.

3.2 REGLAZING OF EXISTING WINDOWS IF REQUIRED

A. In the event that existing glass lites in the exterior historic windows are broken during construction, replace them using the same glazing methods as were initially used.

B. Remove broken glass. Remove old putty from sash. Do not install glass until rabbet has been primed.

C. Thoroughly clean glass to be installed.

D. Bed glass in putty, secure glass with glaziers points and face putty. Remove excess putty from exposed surfaces.

3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect glass from breakage. Do not apply markers to glass surfaces.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION WOOD FLOORING RESTORATION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 09 03 64 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - VAN BUREN

SECTION 09 03 64 – WOOD FLOORING RESTORATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The existing flooring in the house consists of exposed modern wood floor installed on top of historic wood floor in Rooms 103 and 109 and exposed historic wood floor in all other spaces. The work of this section consists of the following: 1. Installation of sections of new modern wood flooring on top of historic wood flooring in

those portions of Rooms 103 and 109 where cabinets have been removed and where a bathroom and a closed have been removed.

2. Repair of patches in the exposed historic wood floor where the patches were not well done.

3. Refinishing of all wood flooring.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of finishing material product specified.

B. Sample of new wood proposed for use in Rooms 103 and 109.


A. Do not perform wood flooring finishing operations unless the temperature of the space is above 50 degrees F and the relative humidity is below 50 percent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NEW FLOORING

A. Replacement flooring in Rooms 103 and 109 shall be of the same species, cut, thickness, width, and length as the existing flooring in those rooms.

2.2 CLEANING MATERIALS


A. Paint and Varnish Remover: CitriStrip Paint and Varnish Stripping Gel as manufactured by Cit-riStrip, or approved equal.

B. Solvent: Kleen-Up Solvent as manufactured by Hillyard Chemical Company, St. Joseph, Mis-souri, or approved equal.

2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS

A. Urethane Finish System: Complete water-based system of compatible components that is rec-ommended by finish manufacturer for application intended.

1. Type: Water based. 2. Stain: Penetrating and nonfading type. Color as selected by the Architect from manufac-

turer’s full range. 3. Floor Sealer: Pliable, penetrating type. 4. Finish Coats: Formulated for multicoat application on wood flooring. 5. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-

ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to: a. Basic Coatings, Des Moines, Iowa. b. BonaKemi USA, Inc., Aurora, Colorado. c. Dura Seal Division, Minwax Co., Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Wood Filler: Formulated to fill and repair seams, defects, and open-grain hardwood floors; compatible with finish system components and recommended by filler and finish manufacturers for use indicated.

B. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA’s Installation Guidelines.

C. Thresholds and Saddles: To match wood flooring. Tapered as required by the floor elevations on each side.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Where existing wood baseboard is shown to be retained, ensure that it has been temporarily re-moved before beginning wood flooring restoration work.

3.2 STRIP WOOD FLOORS

A. Strip all wood flooring using paint and varnish stripping gel following the manufacturer’s in-structions.


3.3 REPAIR WOOD FLOOR

A. After floors have been stripped, carefully examine the condition of the wood material and repair any sections requiring same. Where sections of flooring have been replaced with wood that doesn’t match, replace the unmatched sections. Match widths and stagger joints at the ends. Install in the same manner as for the adjoining flooring.

3.4 NEW FLOORING SECTIONS (ROOMS 103 AND 109)

A. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: Where plank flooring is nailed to solid-wood subfloor, install flooring over a layer of asphalt-saturated felt.

B. Install new wood plank flooring sections utilizing the same installation methods as were used for the flooring adjacent to the new sections.

3.5 BUFF EXPOSED FLOORS

A. After stripping and repair work has been completed, lightly buff exposed flooring.

B. Sweep floor with push broom and pick up all particles and dust. Work the stripped floor with a single brush floor machine equipped with a steel wire brush to remove the old finish and excess remover.

C. Sweep all floors, vacuum thoroughly, and tac rag using solvent to remove all sanding dust. Al-low floor to dry at least 12 and preferably 24 hours before applying finish.

3.6 FINISHING WOOD FLOORS

A. Apply filler according to manufacturer’s instructions. Fill open-grained hardwood and fill and repair seams and defects.

B. Apply stain and then floor sealer according to finish manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Apply floor finish according to manufacturer’s instructions. Apply in number of coats recom-mended by manufacturer, but not less than three. For water-based finishes, use finishing meth-ods recommended by manufacturer to minimize grain raise.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION GYPSUM BOARD VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 09 26 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing gypsum wallboard where shown at walls and ceilings.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry, for wood framing and furring members supporting

gypsum board wall and ceiling applications. 2. Section 09 26 13, Gypsum Veneer Plastering, for gypsum base for veneer plaster and for

other components of gypsum-veneer-plaster finishes. 3. Section 07210, Thermal Insulation, for insulation installed in gypsum board assemblies.



1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensa-tion, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer’s written instructions, whichever are more stringent.


B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to dis-

coloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Gypsum Ceiling Board, ASTM C1396/C1396M

1. Thickness: ½ inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047, formed from steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc or plastic.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.

B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape.

C. Joint Compound: Setting-type compounds, factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening setting power products. For topping compound use sandable formulation.

D. Miscellaneous Materials: Auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards.


2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002; Type W for attaching to wood.

B. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00, Thermal Insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including areas where gypsum board is to be installed over exist-ing wood lath, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions af-fecting performance of the Work.

B. Ensure that supplemental wood studs have been installed where spacing between historic wood framing exceeds 24 inches on center. At ceilings, provide supplemental support if joists exceed 24 inches on center.

C. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Shim existing wall studs as required to ensure a level surface over which to apply gypsum base panels.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

1. Prior to installing gypsum panels on the north wall of Room 102 paint the back side of the panels with high gloss white paint.

2. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

3. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.

4. On walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.

5. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of the ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

6. No vertical joints shall occur within 8 inches of external corners of windows, doors, or similar openings.

7. If butt joints occur, stagger joints and locate as far as possible from center of walls.


3.4 ATTACHMENT

A. Secure gypsum board to framing with the screw attachment method in accordance with GA 216.

1. Spacing: Follow Gypsum Association’s recommendations for fastener spacing. 2. Install fasteners no less than 3/8 inch from end or edges. Begin fastening from center of

gypsum board and proceed toward out ends or edges. Drive fasteners with shank perpen-dicular to face of board, applying pressure on gypsum board to ensure that it will be se-cured tightly to framing member.

3. Drive screws with a positive clutch electric power tool. Surface of head shall be slightly below surface of paper without cutting paper or stripping framing member around screw shank.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board.

B. Install cornerbeads at external corners.

C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound.

D. Finishing Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound.

2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints. 3. Use the following joint compound combination:

a. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound. b. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint compound. c. Finish (Third) Coat: Sandable topping compound.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construc-tion, and other causes during remainder of construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

END OF SECTION 09260

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION PAINTING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 09 91 10- 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 09 91 10 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces.

1. Surface preparation of new wood, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to preparation of existing wood noted below, shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. In addition to all interior wood surfaces, paint the following exterior surfaces:

1. The small amount of exterior wood siding. 2. The exterior wood ceiling surface at the front porch.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 06 40 00, Finish Carpentry, for preparation of existing wood trim, existing interior wood plank walls, and wood plank ceilings, ready for painting.

B. Section 08 01 52, Wood Window Restoration, for preparation of existing wood window trim including casings, stool and apron, ready for painting.

C. Section 08 55 10, Wood Door Restoration, for preparation of existing wood doors, including casings, ready for painting.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including primers, provide manufacturer’s technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, product name and description, and contents by volume.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


A. Apply finish material only when temperature is 50 degrees F or above. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Do not apply paint on surfaces in direct sunlight. Apply finishes only when air is free of dust that would speck the finish.

B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces is below the following maximums:

1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Plaster: 12 percent. 3. Exterior Wood: 18 percent.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PREPARATION OF EXISTING WOOD

A. Sandpaper: Garnet, 60 to 120 grade.

B. Tools:

1. Paint scrapers, putty knives, and electric vibrating sanders. 2. Belt sanders may be used only after specific approval from the Architect. Contractor

must demonstrate skillful use of belt sander on sample area.

C. Wood Filler: Plastic wood filler or wood putty as selected by Contractor and approved by Architect.

D. Wood Preservative: Woodlife Classic Clear Wood Preservative by Rust-Oleum Brands, or approved equal.


2.2 PRODUCTS FOR PREPARATION OF NEW WOOD

A. Wood Filler: Plastic wood filler or wood putty as selected by Contractor and approved by Architect.

B. Wood Knot Sealer: Moore’s Speedy Primer Sealer No. 340 as manufactured by Benjamin Moore & Company, or approved equal.

C. Wood Preservative: Same as specified in Paragraph 2.1.D

2.3 PAINT AND FINISH PRODUCTS

A. Paint specified in this Section is based on products manufactured by Sherwin-Williams Company, except where specifically noted otherwise. Other manufacturer’s products may be used provided they are approved as equals.

B. Paint products shall be fresh and well ground; shall not settle readily, cake, or thicken in the container; shall be broken up readily with paddle to a smooth consistency; and shall have easy application properties. Other materials such as linseed oil, turpentine, mineral spirits, miscellaneous thinners, varnish, and shellac shall be the highest quality of an approved manufacturer.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.

1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions

within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

3.2 GENERAL

A. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detri-mental to formation of a durable paint film.

2. Surface treatments, preparation and finishes are specified herein. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Apply material evenly

without runs, sags, or other defects. Leave moldings, trim, ornaments, edges, and


millwork clean and true to details without excess paint in corners or depressions. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlaps.

5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

6. Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the exposed faces.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. Sand lightly between applications to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply

additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush or roller. Use of spray painting equipment is not allowed except where it may be specifically called for.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

1. 2-Coat Work: Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.5 mils for the entire coating system of prime and finish coats.

2. 3-Coat Work: Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils for the entire coating system of prime and finish coats.

E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.


G. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

3.4 PREPARATION AND FINISHING OF EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR WOOD

A. Preparation of New Wood:

1. Remove dust by brushing and remove grease and oil by washing with mineral spirits or other solvent. Remove sap on wood surfaces by scraping and washing with turpentine. Sand surfaces exposed to view, smooth and dust off.

2. Seal all knots or resinous areas with knot sealer and allow to dry at least 2 hours before priming. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3. Prime or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood.

4. Back prime backs, edges, and ends of replacement exterior clapboard siding.

B. Preparation of Existing Painted Wood Stripped to Bare Wood:

1. Preparation of existing wood windows, frames, and casings is specified in Section 08 01 52.

2. Preparation of existing wood doors, frames and casings is specified in Section 08 55 10 3. Preparation of existing wood trim including baseboards, chairrails/aprons, and picture

rails is specified in Section 06 40 00, Finish Carpentry. 4. The exterior surfaces of exterior wood doors were painted during a previous phase of

work. Only the interior side of these doors require paint. The same is true of sidelights and transoms for those doors.

5. Wood window sash was stripped and restored during the previous work phase. The exterior face of all window sashes, along with the exterior trim, were painted as part of that work. The interior faces were prime painted.

6. On any remaining painted exterior wood not included above, and which does not require paint stripping to bare wood, remove loose, flaked, curled, and deeply creased paint on existing surfaces to sound surface using hand scrapers only.

a. Sand surfaces to sound paintable surface by hand or mechanical vibrating sander only. The use of rotary disk sanders will not be permitted.

b. Feather by sanding rough paint layer edges. c. Total removal of sound paint coatings is not required, but prepared surfaces must

be sound and smooth, free of blunt edges, cracks and alligatoring.

7. Spot prime sanded areas of bare wood. 8. After required spot priming, fill all gaps, holes and depressions with wood filler; sand

flush and smooth. 9. Clean surfaces of dust by blowing with dry compressed air or by thoroughly sweeping.

C. Paint Schedule:

1. FINISH NO. 1: Painted Exterior Wood Surfaces: Exterior painted wood clapboard sid-ing, wood porch ceiling, and other exterior wood surfaces where paint is required.


a. Satin 100% Acrylic Latex Finish, two finish coats over primer.

1) Primer: A-100 Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer, Y24WD. 2) 1st Coat: A-100 Exterior Latex. 3) 2nd Coat: A-100 Exterior Latex.

2. FINISH NO. 2: Interior Painted Wood Features: Wood doors, frames and casings; wood window frames and trim; wood base and trim, and other interior wood surfaces where a painted finish is required.

a. Gloss Alkyd Finish, two finish coats over primer.

1) Primer: PrepRite Wall and Wood Primer, B49 Series. 2) 1st Coat: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel, B35 Series. 3) 2nd Coat: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel, B35 Series.

3.5 PREPARATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM DRYWALL

A. Preparation of Gypsum Drywall:

1. Specified in Section 09 29 00, Gypsum Board.

B. Paint Schedule

1. FINISH NO. 3: Painted Gypsum Drywall: Ceilings.

a. Lusterless (Flat) Latex Finish, two finish coats over primer.

1) Primer: PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28 Series. 2) 1st Coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30 Series. 3) 2nd Coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30 Series.

2. FINISH NO. 4: Painted Gypsum Drywall, Walls. a. Eggshell Latex Finish, two finish coats over primer.

1) Primer: PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28 Series. 2) 1st Coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20 Series. 3) 2nd Coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20 Series.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.


3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in Painting and Decorating Contractors of America Manual P1.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 10 28 19 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 10 28 19 – TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes frameless shower doors for use in the view windows (doors) in the interior walls of Rooms 103 and 109.



1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product literature for all specified products. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles.

B. Shop Drawings: For shower doors. Include elevations and attachment details.


A. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on Shop Drawings.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace shower doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period, without monetary limitation. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals and metal finishes.


2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMELESS DOORS

A. Frameless glass panels with mounting and operating hardware of types and sizes required to support imposed loads.

B. Hardware and Trim: Manufacturer’s standard units as indicated and as required for complete installation. 1. Materials: Stainless steel, polished.

a. Hinges: Full-height piano. b. Door Pulls: Single sided. c. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard stainless-steel fasteners.

C. Swinging Doors: Hinged for 90 degrees outwards swing, self-closing. 1. Hinges: Full-height piano 2. Door Pulls: Single-sided, C-pull. 3. Glass Type: Clear, fully tempered, heavy shower glass.

a. Minimum Thickness: 3/8-inch.

2.2 INSULATING GLASS

A. For use in the view window in the ceiling of the front porch.

B. Glass Type Clear insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 3 mm. 3. Top Lite: Annealed float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Bottom Lite: Fully tempered float glass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Frameless glass shower doors walls of Rooms 103 and 109 shall be installed with a full height piano hinge, small door pulls, and wood glass stops on three sides.

B. Prepare and install per manufacturer’s written instructions unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA’s “Glazing Manual.”


C. Clean substrates, removing projections, filling voids, and sealing joints.

D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack, and anchor securely in place.

E. Fasten components securely in place, with provisions for thermal movement. Install with concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

G. Repair, refinish, or replace components damaged during installation.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust operating parts and hardware for smooth, quiet operation and watertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

B. Remove labels and clean surfaces immediately after installation.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 11 90 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 11 90 00 – MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing the following: 1. Retractable ladder with access door. 2. Temporary exterior steps.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 05 10 00, Rough Carpentry, for framing modifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions.

B. Samples of sealant colors.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and store in a protected area at temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RETRACTABLE LADDER WITH ACCESS DOOR

A. Furnish and install a retractable ladder with access door equal to the Husky 655 Model Disappearing Stairway manufactured by American Stairways, Inc., Memphis, TN, with 1 x 6 treads, 1 x 5 stringers, 1 x 5 frame, and rated at 300 pounds. The model size for this project shall have:

1. Rough Opening: 25-1/2 inches by 48 inches. 2. Treads: 10 3. Landing Size: 56 inches. 4. Projection: 60 inches.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 11 90 00 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

5. Pounds per Unit: 68B

2.2 TEMPORARY METAL STEPS

A. Aluminum Steps and Platform: Adjustable OSHA compliant steps and platform for a height of 27-1/2 inches to 42-1/2, equal to Fortress Model 8200 (FOR2742), as manufactured by Fortress Metal Stair Systems, and having: 1. Number of Steps: 4-5. 2. Riser Height: 8-1/2 inches. 3. Riser Tread Depth: 9-1/2 inches. 4. Riser Tread Width: 36-1/2 inches. 5. Handrail Height: 36 inches. 6. Platform Size: 40 inches wide x 60 inches long. 7. Platform Handrail Height: 42-1/2 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RETRACTABLE STAIRWAY INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall verify that the location where the stairway is shown to be installed is suitable for the model specified.

B. Install ladder where shown on the drawings following the manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.2 TEMPORARY METAL STEPS INSTALLATION

A. Install temporary aluminum steps to serve the rear (north) steps of the house. The steps and platform may be used by the Contractor during construction, but shall then be left in place for use by the Owner.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION PROVISIONS

VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 21 01 00 - 1

UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 21 01 00 - GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work covered by Division 21 sections consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, appliances

and material for the piping and plumbing systems in strict accordance with Codes, Specifications

and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. Include all

appurtenances necessary to the proper operation of the systems and equipment specified.

B. Some equipment may be furnished by other divisions. Fire Suppression Contractor is responsible

to check the drawings and specifications for equipment that will be furnished by the others.

C. General Contractor shall furnish and install all ceiling access panels required to service

equipment, valves and controls above gyp board or hidden spline ceilings.

D. General Contractor shall provide all site drive, sidewalk, and other surfaced areas, saw cutting,

and repairs back to preexisting conditions for the required mechanical piping. Fire Suppression

Contractor shall provide the trenching, bedding and backfill required for the pipe installation.


A. The General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, as bound in the specification

preamble, apply to all work under Division 21. Carefully note its contents in performance of the

work.

B. The Architectural, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical and Structural plans and Specifications,

including Information to Bidders and other pertinent documents issued by the Engineer are a part

of the Specifications and the accompanying mechanical plans. Comply with them in every

respect. Examine all the above carefully. Failure to comply does not relieve the Contractor of

responsibility nor may it be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of

architectural, electrical and structural details from the mechanical drawings.

C. All electrical power wiring is specified under Division 26 of the Specifications. Fire Suppression

Contractor shall furnish all motor starters required for the control and protection of all motors

furnished for Division 21, any air compressors, or other fire suppression equipment to be wired

by a licensed electrician.

D. All concrete pads and bases required for installing equipment are specified in another section of

the Specifications. Advise the General Contractor as to the exact sizes required, location of

anchor bolts, etc.

1.3 CODES, FEES AND LATERAL COSTS

A. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility

company regulations, and the applicable requirements of the following latest nationally accepted

codes and standards:

1. Currently adopted Arkansas Fire Prevention Code.

2. Currently adopted AFPLB Rules and Regulations.

3. IBC - International Building Code; latest adopted edition.

4. ASA - American Standards Association.

5. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

6. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials.

7. AWWA - American Water Works Association.




8. NBS - National Bureau of Standards.

9. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

10. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; the edition referenced by the governing Fire

Code or else the latest edition.

11. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

12. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Hazard Association.

13. IFC - International Fire Code; currently adopted edition.

B. In case of difference between building codes, Specifications, state Laws, local ordinances,

industry standards and utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most

stringent governs. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of any such difference.

C. Remove any work installed that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable building

codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, or utility company regulations, correct the

deficiencies, and reinstall all work at no cost to the Owner.

D. The architectural drawings show the general arrangement of all rooms and finishes. Follow as

closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. Final layout will

be governed by actual field conditions with all measurements verified at the site. Conform to the

requirements shown on all of the drawings. General and structural drawings take precedence

over mechanical drawings. Investigate the existing and finish conditions affecting the work and

arrange the work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves and accessories as may be required

to meet such conditions. Contractor shall verify that all equipment, pipes and all other

components will fit in the space provided before fabrication or ordering.

E. Obtain any and all required permits in connection with this work under the Contract and pay any

and all fees in connection therewith. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the

connections to all utilities and pay all charges for same including inspection fees and meters if

required. Refundable deposits will be paid by the Owner.

1.4 GUARANTEE

A. Furnish a written certificate guaranteeing all materials, equipment and labor furnished to be free

of all defects for a period of one (1) year from and after the date of final acceptance of the work

by the Owner and further guarantee to replace such work without charges if any defects appear

within the stipulated guaranty period.

1.5 SOIL CONDITIONS

A. The Specifications and the drawings in no way imply the conditions of the soil to be encountered.

When excavating may be required in execution of the work, this Contractor agrees that he has

informed himself regarding conditions affecting the work.

1.6 INSPECTION OF PREMISES

A. Before submitting a bid, visit the site of the proposed job and determine the conditions relating to

this work.

1.7 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work have been

obtained from substantially reliable sources and are offered as a general guide only, without

guarantee as to accuracy. Verify the location and elevation of all utilities and their relation to the

work before entering into a contract.




B. Identify outdoor underground lines with continuous strip of plastic utility marker tape at regular

intervals (maximum of 10 feet) "Caution FIRELINE below". Install one foot directly above pipe

before backfilling to grade.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Provide new materials bearing the manufacturer's name, trade name and the UL label in every

case where a standard has been established for the particular material. Furnish the standard

product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment.

Provide the manufacturer's latest approved design.

B. Deliver equipment and materials to the site and store in original containers, suitably sheltered

from the elements, but readily accessible for inspection by the Engineer until installed. Store all

items subject to moisture damage (such as controls) in dry, heated spaces.

C. Provide equipment and materials of the same general type and of the same make throughout the

work to provide uniform appearance, operation and maintenance.

D. Tightly cover equipment and protect against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury and

theft. At the completion of the work, clean fixtures, equipment and materials and polish

thoroughly. Turn over to the Owner in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer. Repair damage

or defects developing before acceptance of the work at no expense to the Owner.

E. Insure that items to be furnished fit the space available. Make necessary field measurements to

ascertain space requirements, including those for connections. Furnish and install such sizes and

shapes of equipment that the final installation suits the true intent and meaning of the drawings

and Specifications.

F. Follow manufacturer's directions completely in the delivery, storage, protection and installation

of all equipment and materials. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of any conflicts between

any requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturers' directions. Obtain the

Engineer's written instruction before proceeding with the work. Replace any work that does not

comply with the manufacturers' directions or such written instructions from the Engineer, at no

cost to the Owner.

G. Support all products by service organizations with adequate spare parts inventory and personnel

located within fifty (50) miles of the site.

H. Where multiple units of the same type or class of products are required, provide all units of the

same manufacturer.

2.2 EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections and incidental items necessary to fully

complete all work, ready for use, occupancy and operation by the Owner.

B. Where equipment requiring different arrangement or connections from those shown is provided,

install the equipment to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the drawings and

Specifications.

C. Support, plumb, rigid and true to line, all work and equipment furnished. Study thoroughly all

fire sprinkler, general, structural, electrical and mechanical drawings, shop drawings and catalog

data to determine how equipment, valves, piping, etc., are to be supported, mounted or suspended

and provide extra steel bolts, inserts, pipe stands, brackets and accessories for proper supports

whether or not shown on the drawings. When directed, submit drawings showing supports.




D. If accessories are required to complete the work and meet the intent of the specification, it is the

responsibility of the Contractor to provide such accessories.

2.3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. Submit to the Engineer as soon as practical, six (6) complete sets of the schedule of materials and

equipment proposed for the installation. Include manufacturers' names, catalog data, diagrams,

drawings and other descriptive data and submit under one cover with an index sheet in front.

Also, provide a CD containing PDFs of the materials and equipment proposed, fire sprinkler

drawings, and all RFI correspondence. Use the following folders: Product Manual, FP Drawings,

RFIs.

B. Provide written certification that shop drawings are in accordance with the specifications and are

dimensionally correct with reference to available space.

C. All submittals will be reviewed a maximum of two (2) times. The cost of additional submittal

reviews beyond those two specified will be charged to the Contractor.

D. Shop drawings for the Engineer's files are required on the following items:

1. Booster pumps, starters, controls and instrumentation, etc.

2. Pipe hangers and supports, including any seismic bracing/restraints.

3. Piping materials, including flexible connections, and valves.

4. Complete equipment electrical data and wiring details. Include specifications for pressure

switches, flow switches, alarm devices, and air compressors.

5. Sprinkler heads, escutcheons, and guards. Include manufacturer’s data sheets for all

sprinklers and finish trim, indicating which sprinkler wrenches apply.

6. Sprinkler plans including calculations and approval from the Authorities Having

Jurisdiction.

7. Include all information pertaining to any standpipe and hose systems required, such as hose

connections, stations, and cabinets.

8. Include information for all exterior installation, such as joints, restraints, valves, tapping, fire

hydrants, bedding, thrust blocking, and preliminary Contractor’s Material Test Certificate, to

be signed at later date.

2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS

A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to investigate any desired substitutions for specified

equipment prior to submission of his bid. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall be responsible

for any changes required in mechanical, electrical, or structural systems and shall bear all cost for

those changes whether the substitute equipment is named by manufacturer in the specifications or

is submitted to the Architect for "or equal" consideration. All changes shall be accomplished in a

manner acceptable to the Architect per Section 01 60 00 at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. In order to obtain prior approval on equipment or material not specified in Fire Suppression

Specifications or Equipment Schedules, Fire Suppression Contractor MUST submit to the

Engineer any proposed equipment or material ten (10) working days prior to the bid date.

C. If ANY substitute equipment is submitted to Engineer for approval, without said equipment

having been pre-approved, the entire submittal will be rejected for resubmittal.

D. Any equipment manufacturers which are a subsidiary to the listed acceptable manufacturers are

not considered equal. Therefore, it is the responsibility of the Contractor and equipment supplier

to obtain prior approval as described in paragraph 2.4, this Section.




2.5 ELECTRICAL MOTORS

A. Provide motors of a recognized manufacturer, wound for the voltage specified, and in

conformance to latest standards of the manufacturer and performance of the National Electrical

Manufacturers Association and the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. Provide

motors as manufactured by General Electric, Westinghouse, Century or Siemens-Allis, Baldor or

approved equal.

B. Provide motors rated for continuous duty at 100% of rated capacity and temperature raise of 40

degrees Centigrade open type; 50 degrees Centigrade drip and splash proof; 55 degrees

Centigrade explosion proof and totally enclosed above an ambient of 40 degrees Centigrade.

C. Unless otherwise required, provide integral horsepower, polyphase motors, Class B, general

purpose, squirrel cage, open type induction motors, T-frame.

D. Provide single phase fractional horsepower motors of the open capacitor type. Generally, motors

under 1/2 horsepower may be split phase type unless otherwise specified. Provide motors rated

1/2 horsepower or less with integral overcurrent protection.

E. Insure the insulation resistance between stator conductor and frames of motors is not less than 1/2

megohm. Provide shop test of motors including temperature rise, insulation resistance, motor

terminal voltage, normal operating line current, RPMs, breaker or switch size with fusing and

overload relay sizes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Compare the Fire Suppression drawings and Specifications with the drawings and Specifications

for other trades and report any discrepancies between them to the Engineer and obtain from him

written instruction for changes necessary in the fire suppression work. Install the fire suppression

work in cooperation with other trades installing inter-related work. Before installation, make

proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Engineer. Make all changes

required in the work caused either by neglect or existing field conditions at no cost to the Owner.

B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Electrical Contractor

and Sprinkler Contractor to coordinate installation of all equipment. Equipment installed prior to

proper coordination, which interferes with the harmony and intent of the specifications and

drawings, will be removed and reinstalled at the cost of the responsible Contractor.

C. Furnish anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports required for the fire suppression work. Locate

anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports as directed by the trade requiring them and insure that

they are properly installed.

D. Adjust locations of pipes, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work and for interferences

anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each pipe prior to

fabrication.

1. Provide right-of-way to lines that pitch over those that do not pitch. For example, Plumbing

drains normally have right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have the

right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

2. Make offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes as required to maintain proper

head room and pitch.

E. Install all Fire Suppression work to permit removal without damage to all parts requiring periodic

replacement or maintenance. Insure proper clearance for the backflow prevention, fire sprinkler

valves, alarm switches, and all such components. Arrange pipes and equipment to permit ready




access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of

swinging and overhead doors and of access panels.

3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain record drawings showing exact locations and sizes, as actually installed, of piping,

drains, cleanouts, ductwork, controls and equipment as specified herein. Deliver to the

Owner/Architect upon completion and acceptance of the work, one (1) complete set of contract

drawings marked to indicate all deviations from intended installation.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all required cutting, patching, etc., incidental to

this work and shall make all required repairs thereafter to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Do not

cut into any major structural element, beam or column without the written approval of the

Engineer.

B. Cut, patch, repair and/or replace pavements, sidewalks, roads and curbs as required to permit the

installation of the work and pay all expenses incurred for this work.

C. Pipes, conduits, cables, wires, pneumatic tubes and similar equipment that pass through fire or

smoke barriers shall be protected by the Fire Suppression Contractor in accordance with NFPA

101.

D. All fire stopping assemblies must be UL approved assemblies.

3.4 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING FOR PIPING

A. Excavate to the depths indicated on the Drawings or as required to provide adequate slope and

burial depth. Excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill or fill shall be removed

from the site. Do such grading as is necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into

trenches or other excavations. Water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping or by

other method. Sheeting and shoring shall be installed as may be necessary for protection of the

work and for safety of personnel. Excavation shall be by open cut except that short sections of a

trench may be tunneled if the pipe can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be

properly tamped in such tunnel sections.

B. Trench Excavation: Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for each

section of pipe on undisturbed soil. Where rock is encountered excavate to a minimum overdepth

of 4" below trench depths indicated on the Drawings or specified. Overdepth in rock excavation

and unauthorized overdepths shall be backfilled. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil

incapable of properly supporting the pipe is encountered such soil shall be removed and the

trench backfilled to proper grade as hereinafter specified.

C. Depth of Cover: Trenches shall be of depth that will provide three feet (3') minimum cover or as

required by the local utility authorities for fire lines from existing grade or from indicated finish

grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise specifically shown.

D. Utilities Locating: Locate existing utility lines prior to beginning any excavation

E. Protection of Existing Utilities: Existing utility lines to be retained that are shown on the

Drawings or the locations of which are made known to the Contractor prior to excavation, as well

as all utility lines uncovered during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage during

excavation and backfilling, and if damaged, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.

F. Trenches shall not be backfilled until required pressure and other tests have been performed and

until the utilities systems as installed conform to requirements of Drawings and Specifications.




G. Backfill trenches with excavated materials consisting of earth, sandy clay, sand, gravel, soft shale

or other approved materials, free from clods of earth or stones 2-1/2" maximum dimension,

deposited in 6" layers and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Compaction Test of the maximum

laboratory density determined in accordance with ASTM D698, Moisture-Density Relation of

Soils. If fills fail to meet the specified densities, the Contractor shall remove and re-compact the

fill until specified densities are achieved. Compaction test shall be performed for each fifty linear

feet of trench.

H. Provide a 4-inch thick (minimum) layer of 3/4-inch No. 4 gravel aggregate bedding beneath all

buried piping. Bedding shall be compacted and leveled to provide sloping required.

3.5 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING

A. Instruct the Owner's operating personnel during start-up and separate operating tests of each

major item of equipment. During the operating tests, prove the operation of each item of

equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Give at least seven (7) days notice to the Engineer

of equipment start-up and operating tests.

3.6 CATALOG DATA FOR OWNER

A. Provide, in looseleaf binders, two (2) sets of a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured

item of equipment used in the Fire Suppression work and present this compilation to the

Owner/Architect for transmittal to the Owner before final payment is made. Include descriptive

data and printed installation, operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment.

Provide a complete double index as follows:

1. Listing of products alphabetically by name or by a clearly established, organized method

approved by the engineer.

2. Listing the names of manufacturers whose products have been incorporated in the work

alphabetically together with their addresses and the names and addresses of the local sales

representatives.

3. Certificates of Final Inspections.

4. Complete spare parts data with current prices and supply sources.

5. Extended warranties.

6. As Built Drawings and calculations.

7. Final Release of Lien confirming, or contingent upon, final payment.

B. Deliver to the Owner all special tools, lubricants, extra materials and any other products

necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the fire suppression systems.

C. Provide project record documents indicating all changes from contract documents made during

construction.

D. Submit all Certificates of Final Inspections from the Administrative Authorities.

3.7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Instruct the representative of the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of all elements

of the fire suppression system.

3.8 PROTECTIVE COATINGS

A. Sprinkler Contractor shall clean and prep all exposed sprinkler piping. Painting by others with an

acceptable color selected by the Architect.




3.9 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Do not allow waste material and rubbish to accumulate in or above the premises. After

completion of this work, remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials from and about

the building and leave all work clean and ready for use. Clean all equipment, pipes, valves and

fittings of grease, metal cuttings and sludge. Repair any stoppage, discoloration or other damage

to parts of the building, its finish or furnishings due to failure to properly clean the fire

suppression systems, without additional cost to the Owner. Adjust all automatic control devices

for proper operation.

3.10 ACCESS PANELS

A. General Contractor shall provide access panels as required in all walls and ceilings to service and

have access to all valves and operating parts. For all ceiling and wall access doors that are

required in gypsum board and plaster, provide minimum 24" x 24", unless noted otherwise,

Milcor type appropriate for the construction involved. Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate with

the General Contractor required access locations. See paragraph 1.1C. this Specification Section

for additional information.

3.11 FINALLY

A. It is the intention that this specification shall provide a complete installation except as herein

before specifically excluded or noted. All accessory construction and apparatus necessary or

advantageous in the operation and testing of the work shall be included. The omission of specific

reference to any part of the work necessary for such complete installation shall not be interpreted

as relieving this Contractor from furnishing and installing such parts.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE

SUPPRESSION



SECTION 21 05 01 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 21 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment: Piping

identification.

B. Section 21 13 01 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design.


A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing

Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

B. ASME/ANSI B16.1 - 1998 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings; The American Society

of Mechanical Engineers; (R2006).C.ASME/ANSI B16.3 - 1998 - Malleable Iron Threaded

Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; (R2006).

C. UL 668 - Hose Valves for Fire Protection Service, 2004 rev 2008.

D. ASME/ANSI B16.5 - 1996 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers.

E. ASME/ANSI B16.9 - 2001 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings; The American

Society of Mechanical Engineers.

F. ASME/ANSI B16.11 - 2001 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded; ; The

American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

G. ASME/ANSI B16.18 - 1984 (R1994) - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The


H. ASME/ANSI B16.21 - 2005 - Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe.

I. ASME/ANSI B16.22 - 1995 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

J. ASME/ANSI B16.24 - 1991 (R1998) - Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings; The


K. ASME/ANSI B16.25 - 1997 - Buttwelding Ends; The American Society of Mechanical

Engineers.

L. ASME/ANSI B16.42 - 1998 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 150 and

300; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

M. ASME/ANSI B 36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 1998.

N. ASTM A47/A47M-99(2009) - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

O. ASTM A53/A53M-07 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless.


SUPPRESSION



P. ASTM A 135/A 135M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance Welded Steel Pipe; 2006.

Q. ASTM A 183 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts.

R. ASTM A 193/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting

Materials for High Temperature Service.

S. ASTM A 234/A 234M-07 Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel

and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service R.

T. ASTM A 449 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, heat Treated,

120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use.

U. ASTM A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

V. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.

W. ASTM A 795/A 795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot Dipped Zinc-coated

(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use.

X. ASTM F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardoned Steel Washers, 2009.

Y. AWWA C110/A21.10 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3

In. Through 48 In. (75 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids; American Water

Works Association; 2003.

Z. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings;

American Water Works Association; 2007 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11).

AA. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works

Association; 2002, and Errata 2002 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51).

AB. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection

Association; edition adopted by the state.

AC. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems.

AD. NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.

AE. NFPA 1963 - Standard for Fire Hose Connections, edition adopted by the state.

AF. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current

edition.

AG. UL 262 - Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004.

AH. UL 312 - Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 21 01 00 - General Fire Suppression Provisions.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall

penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping

connections.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.


SUPPRESSION



F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Extra Valve Stem Packings: Two for each type and size of valve.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five years experience. approved by manufacturer.

C. Conform to UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey requirements.

D. Valves: Bear UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and

pressure rating marked on valve body.

E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.


A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13, with components being UL listed for 175 psig

working pressure, made of materials compatible with piping. Where high pressure systems or

regions are called out, such components shall be UL listed for 300 psig working pressure.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code, meeting requirements set forth by

NFPA 13.

2.2 BURIED PIPING

A. Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.

1. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness.

2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket.

3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.

1. Ductile Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10 standard thickness.

2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with steel nuts and bolts.

3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

4. Encasement shall apply and conform to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, PE Film, .008

inches (.20 mm) thick.

2.3 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M Schedule 10, black for grooved piping.

1. Grooved End Fittings: UL listed, ASTM A 536, ductile iron casting with OD matching steel

pipe OD.

2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, threaded fittings.


SUPPRESSION



3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C"

shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized

pipe.

4. No XL pipe allowed.

5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring

pocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto

pipe.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M Schedule 30 or 40, black for threaded piping.

1. Steel Fittings: Steel Fittings: ASME B16.5, B16.9, B16.11, B16.25 & A234

2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1 & B16.4


shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized

pipe.

4. Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733 made of ASTM A 53 or A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe.

5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865

6. No XL pipe allowed.

7. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring

pocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto

pipe.

C. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.

1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, standard thickness.

2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with steel nuts and bolts


shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized

pipe.

2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 6 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 8 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

D. Trapeze Hangers: Should be attached to two (2) steel members.

E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.

F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

H. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier

or steel support.

2.5 GATE VALVES

A. Up to and including 2 inches:

1. Manufacturers: Nibco, Kennedy or equal.

2. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends.

B. Over 2 inches:



SUPPRESSION



2. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch, handwheel,

OS&Y, solid bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged ends.

C. Over 4 inches:


2. Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge, flanged

ends, iron body indicator post assembly.

2.6 GLOBE VALVES (COMPLY WITH UL 262)



2. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable rubber disc,

threaded ends, with backseating capacity.

B. Over 2 inches:


2. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends,

renewable seat and disc.

2.7 BALL VALVES (COMPLY WITH UL 1091)



2. Bronze two piece body, brass or stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever

handle, threaded ends.

B. Over 2 inches:


2. Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle or

gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged.

2.8 BUTTERFLY VALVES (COMPLY WITH UL 1091)

A. Bronze Body:


2. Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck,

handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch

rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.

B. Cast or Ductile Iron Body


2. Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient

replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear

drive and integral indicating device, and internal tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.

2.9 CHECK VALVES (COMPLY WITH UL 312)



2. Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends.

B. Over 2 inches:


2. Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.


SUPPRESSION



C. 4 inches and Over:


2. Iron body, bronze disc, stainless steel spring, resilient seal, threaded, wafer, or flanged ends.

2.10 DRAIN VALVES

A. Size and install per NFPA 13. Must be readily accessible with location, elevations, and

accessibility subject to approval.

B. Compression Stop:

1. Manufacturers: Nibco, or equal.

2. Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap.

C. Ball Valve:


2. Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.

D. Auxiliary Drain Valve:


2.11 POST INDICATOR VALVES (WALL TYPE OR UPRIGHT)

A. Comply with UL 789, upright post type, ductile iron body, with extension rod, locking device,

and ductile iron barrel.

1. Manufacturers: Nibco Model NIP-1AJ, NIP-2AJ, or equal.

2. Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap.

2.12 INDICATING VALVES (COMPLY WITH UL 1091)

A. Integral indicating device, indoor/outdoor rated, ends matching connection piping.

1. Electrical 115 V ac, prewired, single circuit, supervisory switch.

2. All wiring to be performed by a licensed electrician.

2.13 DRY TYPE VALVES (COMPLY WITH UL 260)

A. Tyco DPV-1, or equal, with trim package. Install Quick Opening Device(s), if needed per NFPA

13.

B. Include Air Maintenance Device: UL 260, to correct air pressure in piping and keep such air at

designed operating range.

C. Air Compressor: UL 753 shall be rated for 220 VAC, 60 HZ, Single Phase.

D. Include furnishing and installing PS-10, PS-40, flexible hose connectors, mounting kits, and all

components required for a complete installation of the dry pipe system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.


SUPPRESSION



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA

13.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, sloping as required by

NFPA 13. Maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.

D. Coordinate sprinkler piping installation with work of all other trades. Installation shall maintain

harmony of entire mechanical, electrical and plumbing installation.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. Fire walls should be fire caulked.

G. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, use UL listed assembly to maintain the fire rating of

wall.

H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.

I. Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams.

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt

with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

J. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent

work.

2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

4. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected

horizontal piping.

5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.

K. Slope piping and arrange systems as needed to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to

maintain top of pipe level.

L. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting where exposed to view (not

concealed above ceilings, in walls, etc.). Where pipe support members are welded to structural

building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

M. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.

N. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings and floors. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to

achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.


SUPPRESSION



O. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible

and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure

flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

P. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or

other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after

installation.

R. Provide ball valves for shut-off or isolating service.

S. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.

T. The Fire Sprinkler Contractor is responsible for calling into question any deficiencies or

inconsistencies relating to remote areas, hydraulic calculations/pipe sizing, sprinkler coverages,

and system riser/fire pump/standpipe locations PRIOR to submitting a bid.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



SECTION 21 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Stencils.

D. Pipe Markers.


A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 21 01 00 - General Fire Suppression Provisions, for submittal procedures.

B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.

C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location,

function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Automatic Controls: Tags.

B. Control Panels: Nameplates.

C. Instrumentation: Tags.

D. Major Control Components: Nameplates.

E. Piping: Tags.

F. Pumps: Nameplates.

G. Relays: Tags.

H. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.

I. Thermostats: Nameplates.

J. Valves: Namplates and ceiling tacks where above lay-in ceilings.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.

2. Seton Identification Products

3. Substitutions: See Section 21 01 00 General Fire Suppression Provisions for requirements.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASME%20A13.1





B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.

1. Letter Color: White.

2. Letter Height: 1/2 inch.

3. Background Color: Black.

2.3 TAGS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Advanced Graphic Engraving.

2. Brady Corporation.


4. Seton Identification Products.


B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting

background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.

C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth

edges.

D. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Manufacturers:





B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch

high letters.

2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high

letters.

3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch

high letters.

4. 8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2-1/2 inch high

letters.

5. Over 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch long color field, 3-1/2 inch

high letters.

6. Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.

C. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1.

2.5 PIPE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:



3. MIFAB, Inc.



B. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASME%20A13.1





C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of

fluid being conveyed.

D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and

printed markings.

E. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,

minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

2.6 CEILING TACKS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Craftmark.


B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.

C. Color code as follows:

1. Standard colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with

sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

E. Install metallic detection tape located approximately 12 inches above pipe, where in ground

utility lines are buried outside building footprint. Tape shall be continuous and be marked,

indicating utility type (ie. water, sewer, gas, electric, etc).

F. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel

closest to equipment.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS



SECTION 21 13 01 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system, submittals and quality control.

B. System design, installation, and certification.

C. Fire department connections, Life Safety System coordination and field quality control.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 28 31 04 - Fire Detection and Voice Evacuation System

B. Section 21 05 01 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves.

C. Section 21 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.

D. Division 26 Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.


A. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection

Association; 2007.

B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current

edition.

C. IFC - International Fire Code, latest accepted edition.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 21 01 00 - General Fire Suppression Provisions, for submittal requirements.

B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers

catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support

requirements, and piping connections.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations

coordinated with ceiling installation.

2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers,

components and accessories. Indicate system controls.

3. Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to Fire Marshall for

approval. Submit proof of approval to Engineer.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from

drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds code

requirements.




F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record

drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers

of service depot.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced

NFPA design and installation standard.

2. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type.


A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site.

B. Conform to all code requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum five years documented experience.

D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five years experience approved by manufacturer.

E. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking.

F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary

inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. Keep all materials clean and free

of debris and material damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Tyco Fire Products.

B. Grinnell.

C. Star Manufacturing Company.

D. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler.

E. Substitutions: Approved equal.

2.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM

A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building.

B. Refer to civil and mechanical plans, Sprinkler Contractor shall provide connections for future

building expansions where indicated.

C. Provide Pre-Action Sprinkler System as described on the drawings.

1. Preaction Valve:

a. Operated by detection system listed for releasing service and independent of building

fire alarm system with provisions for local, manual, and indicated remote releases.

b. Incorporate mechanical latching mechanism incorporating valve clappers independent

of system water pressure fluctuations.




c. Provide test detection device for each actuation circuit adjacent to each controlled valve

in accordance with NFPA 13.

2. Provide a modular type control panel for electrically operated detection and extinguishing

systems for each preaction valve.

a. Factory mount in surface mounted, steel cabinet with hinged doors, and cylinder lock.

b. Provide factory wired assembly containing components and equipment as required to

perform specified system operating and supervisory functions.

c. Include isolation switch to allow system testing without activation of the preaction

valve.

d. House batteries in separate and lockable, steel cabinet.

e. Finish interior and exterior of cabinet with enamel paint and provide identification

plates in accordance with Section 22 05 53.

f. Include trouble lights and trouble alarm.

g. Provide 120 volt AC service transformed through a two-winding, isolation type

transformer and rectified to low voltage DC for operation of all system actuating, signal

sounding, trouble signal, and fire alarm tripping circuits.

h. Provide UL (DIR) listed as an extinguishing system releasing panel and separate from

the building's fire alarm control panel.

3. Secondary Power Supply:

a. Provide nickel cadmium, lead calcium, or sealed lead acid rechargeable storage

batteries and battery charger.

b. Storage Batteries:

1) Provide with sufficient ampere-hour rating to operate under supervisory and

trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices under alarm conditions

for an additional 10 minutes and as required in accordance with the equipment

listing.

2) Prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells, battery terminals, and other

metal parts with separate cell construction.

c. Battery Charger:

1) Provide solid state automatic two rate type, capable of recharging completely

discharged batteries to fully charged condition in 24 hours or less.

2) Locate charger within control panel or battery cabinet.

4. AIR COMPRESSOR

a. Compressor: Single unit, electric motor driven, motor, motor starter, safety valves,

check valves, air maintenance device incorporating electric pressure switch and

unloader valve.

5.

D. Fire Department Connection

1. Type: Exposed, projected wall mount made of corrosion resistant metal complying with UL

405.

a. Inlets: Two way, 2-1/2 inch swivel fittings, internal threaded. Thread size and inlets

according to NFPA 1963 or Authority Having Jurisdiction. Brass caps with gaskets,

chains, and lugs.

b. Outlet: With pipe threads, 4 NPS.

c. Rated Working Pressure: 175 psi.

d. Finish: Chrome.

e. Signage: Raised or engraved lettering 1 inch minimum indicating system type.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2013

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%201963




E. Provide anti-freeze loop where required for coverage where wet system areas are exposed to

freezing conditions. Include RPZ and expansion chamber as needed. Coordinate floor drain/sink

locations and sizes needed for proper draining.

F. Remote Area may be decreased where quick response sprinklers are at level, flat ceilings of light

or ordinary hazard wet systems - when such is the case, this SHALL BE THE FIRST

modification made and shall be in accordance with this formula:

1. 675 + 22.5*H (where H is the peak ceiling height, up to 20 ft - minimum remote area is 900

sf).

G. Design Areas (Remote Areas) shall be increased 30% where dry systems are utilized.

H. Where sprinklers are under slopes exceeding 2:12, the remote area (obtained by figures, tables, or

the above formula) must be increased 30%.

I. Occupancy per NFPA 13, Appendix A and elsewhere, and as clarified, amended and outlined

below:

1. Automobile Parking Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

2. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

3. Churches: Light Hazard.

4. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

5. Dry-Cleaners: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

6. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

7. Laundries: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

8. Libraries, Except Stack Areas: Light Hazard.

9. Library Stack Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

10. Machine Shops: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

11. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

12. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

13. Plastics Processing Areas: Extra Hazard, Group 2.

14. Printing Plants: Extra Hazard, Group 1.

15. Repair Garages: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

16. Residential Living Areas: Light Hazard.

17. Restaurant Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

18. Solvent Cleaning Areas: Extra Hazard, Group 2.

19. Upholstering Plants: Extra Hazard, Group 1.

20. Laboratories, including Classroom Laboratories: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 or 2 as

determined by criteria set forth in NFPA 13.

J. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

1. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.

2. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.

3. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.

4. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over 2500-sq. ft.

5. Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm over 2500-sq. ft.

K. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.

1. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft. (20.9 sq. m).

2. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m).

3. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m).

4. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m).

5. Other Areas: NFPA 13, unless otherwise indicated.




L. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13, unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm (6.3 L/s) for 30 minutes.

2. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm (15.75 L/s) for 60 to 90 minutes.

3. Extra-Hazard Occupancies: 500 gpm (31.5 L/s) for 90 to 120 minutes.

M. Water Supply: Obtain static pressure and volumetric flow at residual pressure from a water flow

test data conducted per NFPA 291.

N. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure:

1. Contact the Water Department to request a hydraulic model pressure based on maximum

usage in peak season and maintain 20% safety margin unless flow test was conducted in

peak season in the last 6 months, in which case 10% safety margin is acceptable. If a Fire

Pump is required to meet the requirements of this section, fire sprinkler contractor shall

submit a request for waiver of this requirement to the contractor.

O. If pressure booster pump will be required for achieving required pressure in fire sprinkler system,

sprinkler designer shall size pump to provide required flow and pressure unless such information

is provided in Section 21 30 00.

P. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve. Include

water flow switch tamper resistant hex key (allen wrench), paperwork related to all riser switches,

sprinkler wrenches for each type of sprinkler provided on the job, and spare sprinklers of number

and ratio provided by NFPA 13.

Q. Standpipes: Provide wet type, manual, interconnected standpipes per the pipe schedule method

or calculated and sized, in accordance with NFPA 14. Where Standpipes cover stage areas, Fire

pump sizing shall be based upon NFPA 13 for the fire sprinkler demand and hose connections

shall be provided on each side of the stage designed per the latest accepted edition of the

Arkansas Fire Protection Code.

R. Provide standpipes and hose connections in all stairwells. In addition, provide hose connections

at any point exceeding 100 feet of travel distance plus 30 feet of hose spray from egress or

adjacent hose connections where locations of such hose connections are required by the fire

department. Refer to fire protection drawings, details, and notations for standpipe and hose

connection requirements and locations.

S. 175 PSIG Hose Connection: Comply with UL668, FM and UL approved bronze [no copper alloy

(brass) allowed containing more than 15 percent zinc], 175 psig minimum pressure rating.

Include angle pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose outlet, and lugged cap, gasket and

chain. Include NPS 1-1/2" or NPS 2-1/2" as required and hose valve threads according to NFPA

1963 and matching local fire department threads. Provide NPS 2-1/2" x 1-1/2" adapters where 1-

1/2" male hose threads are furnished throughout the project, so the fire department connects to 2-

1/2" NPS male thread.

T. Reference FP drawings for other information pertaining to the design of this project.

2.3 SPRINKLERS (PER UL 199) SPECIFIED FIRE SPRINKLERS ARE SUBJECT TO TYPES

AND LOCATIONS AS INDICATED BELOW.

A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed pendant type with listed concealed plate.

1. Finish: Enamel, color as selected.

2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected.

3. Glass Bulb Ordinary Temperature Rating with listed Concealed Plate.

4. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for application.




B. Suspended Ceiling Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching screw on escutcheon plate.



3. Glass Bulb: 155 degrees.


C. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type with guard.

1. Finish: Brass plated or color to match painted area.

2. Glass Bulb: 200 degrees.


D. Sidewall Type: Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching screw on escutcheon plate.




E. Sprinkler Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish and to be listed with the fire sprinkler being

protected. Wire cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler such guard is

listed with. Provide Sprinkler Guards where sprinklers are less than 7'9 from finished floor and

anywhere sprinklers are subject to being damaged (such as when located near shelving or racks,

in or in proximity to gymnasiums, over conveyors, in trash chutes, etc…).

F. Special Coatings: Use special coatings where required; however, do not utilize quick response

sprinklers where special coatings are needed. In such cases, manufacturer’s corrosion resistant

paint will be sufficient.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper

to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with pressure retard chamber and

variable pressure trim, with test and drain valve.

B. Water Motor Alarm per UL 753: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum

alloy red enameled gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer.

C. Electric Alarm per UL 464: Electrically operated red enameled 8” gong with pressure alarm

switch, 24 VDC or as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

D. Water Flow Switch per UL 346: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two

contacts; rated to match fire alarm panel by others.

E. Fire Department Connections per UL 405:

1. Outlets: of type and model subject to the "first responder" fire department, with hardware;

threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish as subject to same wall mounted

or free standing, as required by the fire department with signage designating what is supplied

(Auto Sprinkler System, Standpipes, Dry Standpipes Only, etc.). Lockable caps and signage

required by Fire Code shall be provided.

2. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside.

3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, in gravel base at foot of 90 degree elbow below fire

department connection.

4. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection".

5. Refer to drawings for proposed location of fire department's connection. Gain approval of

fire department officials for location of fire department connection prior to commencing




installation. Department connection must be within 100 ft of a fire hydrant by state code and

may be required to be located even closer in some jurisdictions.

F. Supervisory Switches per UL 753: As manufactured by Potter Model OSYSV-2 or approved

equal.

G. Room Temperature Supervisory Switches: As manufactured by approved supplier.

H. Water Flow Switches per UL 346: As manufactured by Potter Model VSR-F2 or approved equal.

I. 24 VDC Electric 8" alarm bell mounted at 9 ft elevation on exterior wall near riser unless other

such means of notification are required by the local fire authority, whether mechanical,

horn/strobe, or otherwise..

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator for each Lead In.

D. Provide approved backflow preventer assembly at sprinkler system water source connection.

Reduced pressure backflow preventer equipment and installation shall conform to the

requirements of the city of Arkansas Backflow Prevention and Cross Connection Control

Program.

E. Locate remote fire department connection, as indicated on plans, with sufficient clearance from

walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench

handle.

F. Locate outside alarm notification device (bell, horn,strobe, or gong) on building wall.

G. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. Coordinate with electrical and other

mechanical trades. Refer to site utility plans.

H. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. In areas where there is a combination

of exposed areas and finished ceiling spaces, piping shall be routed above the finished ceiling

spaces. All piping shall be concealed wherever possible throughout entire project.

I. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required or locate

concealed type sprinklers centered in tiles in one direction and not less than 6" off ceiling grids in

any direction.

J. Apply masking tape, or paper cover, or plastic caps to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates,

and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace

painted sprinklers.

K. Install and connect to fire pump system per NFPA 13 as required.

L. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter per NFPA standard.

M. Install guards on sprinklers as required to prevent damage or injury.

N. Hydrostatically test entire system. Furnish completed test results signed by all required

authorities and furnish a Contractor’s Material Test Certificate per State Rules and Regulations

and NFPA 13.




O. Test to be witnessed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and/or fire official unless the Authority

Having Jurisdiction waives the right to witness and thus defaults the responsibility solely to the

Owner's representative. In such a case, the waiver shall be included in the closeout documents.

In all cases, the signed test certificate shall be provided in the closeout documents.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.

B. All fire sprinkler system components required to interface with the fire alarm system to be

supplied and installed by the Fire Sprinkler Contractor. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall

coordinate these components with the Fire Sprinkler Contractor and provide necessary equipment

and wiring for connection of these components to the fire alarm system.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install in accordance with Section 21 05 53.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Testing: All systems to be hydrostatically tested for the greater of 200 psi OR 50 psi

above the maximum anticipated normal system pressure at 2 hours per NFPA 13. Dry

systems to be air tested per NFPA 13.

2. Electronic/Alarm Equipment Testing: All alarm devices, fire pump controls, air

compressors, and all such electrical equipment and devices interfaced with the fire sprinkler

system to be tested and attested to in Contractor’s Material Test Certificate, noting such tests

were coordinated and verified.

3. Fire Pump Testing: Where Diesel fire pumps are required, diesel fuel shall be supplied for

testing and for continual operation after testing, and fire pump tests shall be conducted per

NFPA 20 and reports shall be included in the Product Manual.

4. Training and Educating: This Contractor shall train and educate the Owner, or his

designated representative, by supplying NFPA 25, with highlighted sections corresponding

to his responsibilities and information he should need to know, AND instructions shall be

given for emergency procedures and general maintenance of the system, and test sheets shall

be given for any periodic tests the Owner is responsible for, beyond the supplier’s annual

testing.

5. Annual Inspection: Include a 1 year annual inspection to be conducted 1 year after this work

is completed and the warranty has expired. Any Work revealed by such inspection that

should have been included in the initial installation shall be so referenced in the inspection

documents and completed as warranty work within 30 days of the inspection.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 26 01 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

SECTION 260100 – BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The scope of the work consists of interior renovations to the Willhaf House, and shall utilize electrical improvements installed during the exterior renovation of the house. The Contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, materials, equipment, machinery, and any and all other items necessary to complete the work shown on the Drawings and/or specified in Division 16.

B. The Contractor shall remove all existing electrical receptacles, switches, and lighting. The Contractor shall remove all branch circuit wiring in the walls, attic, and below to floor from devices back to the existing panelboard in Room 103. The Contractor shall disconnect the power feed to the panelboard in Room 103 from the cellar and demolish the panelboard..

C. The Contractor shall provide and install new raceway and cable for receptacles, switches, and

lighting as shown on the Drawings.

D. The Contractor shall provide and install new raceway and cable from existing electrical equipment to the fire protection hot box as shown on the Drawings.

1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The General and Special Conditions for the construction of this project shall be a part of the Electrical Specifications.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work included in this section and the delegation of

work to a subcontractor shall not relieve him of this responsibility. C. The naming of a certain brand or make or manufacturer in the specifications is to establish a

quality standard for the article desired. The Contractor is not restricted to the use of the specific brand of the manufacturer named unless so indicated in the specifications. However, where a substitution is requested, a substitution will be permitted only with the written approval of the Engineer. All proposed substitutions shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than seven working days prior to bid closing. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing the specified equipment unless approval by the Engineer is granted prior to bid closing.

D. The Contractor shall visit the project site prior to submitting a bid. Any conditions that prevent

installation of equipment in the manner intended shall be clarified prior to submission of the bid.

E. No consideration or allowance will be granted for failure to visit site, or for any alleged

misunderstanding of materials to be furnished or work to be done. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for installation of temporary electrical service required for

the project. Coordinate location with the utility and the Engineer.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS


A. All work and materials shall comply with the latest rules, codes, specifications, local

ordinances, industry standards, and utility company requirements, including but not limited to the following:

1. ASME –American Society of Mechanical Engineers 2. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials 3. EIA – Electronic Industries Association 4. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 5. IPCEA – Insulated Power Cable Engineers’ Association 6. NEC – National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) 7. NBS – National Bureau of Standards 8. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers’ Assoc. 9. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association 10. UL – Underwriters’ Laboratories

B. Code compliance is mandatory. Nothing in these Drawings and Specifications permits work not conforming to these codes. Where work is shown to exceed minimum code requirements, comply with the Drawings and Specifications.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of correcting any work or material found to be

noncompliant. D. In the examination and prior to submission of bid, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of

any conflicts with applicable codes and standards.

1.4 FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS A. Arrange for required inspections and pay all license, permit, and inspection fees. Arrange with

the serving utility companies for the connections to all utilities and pay all charges for same including inspection fees and meters if required.

B. No work shall be concealed until after inspection and approval by the proper authorities or

Engineer. If work is concealed without inspection and approval, the Contractor shall be responsible for all work required to open and restore the concealed areas in addition to the required modifications.

1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. All Drawings and these Specifications shall be considered as a whole and work of this Division shown therein shall be furnished under this Division.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to examine all project documents. Failure to coordinate

the work of this Division with details of other Divisions shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation.

C. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of equipment and wiring.

The most direct routing of conduits and wiring is not assured. Exact requirements shall be governed by architectural, structural, and mechanical conditions of the job. Consult all other Drawings. Extra lengths of wiring and addition of pull boxes, junction boxes, and other


raceways necessitated by such conditions shall be included. The Contractor shall cooperate with all other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others without additional compensation.

D. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary; each to the other, and the work required

by either shall be included in the Contract as if called for by both. E. The Contractor shall keep a complete set of prints in good condition and on these shall indicate

all field changes made. These prints shall be turned over to the Engineer at completion of the project.

1.6 SUBMITTAL DATA

A. Submittal data shall be bound in folders or ring binders. The submittals shall include a table of

contents listing items in order of Specification section and paragraph number. B. Submittals shall consist of detailed shop drawings, specifications, catalog “cut” sheets and data

sheets containing physical and dimensioned information, performance data, electrical characteristics, materials used in fabrication, material finish, and those which are excluded.

C. The Contractor shall not order material until receipt of approved submittals.

1.7 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall compile an O&M manual that will detail each item of equipment and its

operation. These manuals shall also include a recommended spare parts list. B. Submit five copies for review to the Engineer.

1.8 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall issue a certificate of guarantee certifying that all materials and

workmanship supplied and/or installed by the Contractor shall be free of defects for a period of not less than one year from the date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All materials and equipment used on this project shall be new and of equal or greater quality

than specified in the Drawings and Specifications. B. The design, manufacture, and testing of electrical equipment and materials shall conform to or

exceed latest applicable standards as set out in 1.03 (A). C. All materials shall bear a U.L. label. All materials that are not covered by U.L. testing

standards shall be tested and approved by an independent testing laboratory or government agency having code enforcement authority.


D. No substitutions shall be made in the materials submitted and approved without a re-submittal

and prior approval of the Engineer. E. Manufacturer must be shown for all material submittals. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and

dimensions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALIFICATIONS

A. Only quality workmanship meeting today’s industry standards will be accepted. Poor

installation practice will result in the rejection of work. B. The Contractor shall provide supervision at the site at all times. A licensed Arkansas electrical

journeyman shall be the minimum qualifications for a site foreman.

3.2 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Contractor shall coordinate work with other trades to avoid conflict and to provide correct

rough-in and connection for equipment furnished under other trades that require electrical connections. Inform Contractors of other trades of the required access to and clearances around electrical equipment to maintain serviceability and code compliance.

B. Verify equipment dimensions and requirements with provisions specified under this Division.

Check actual job conditions before fabricating work. Report and resolve any discrepancy to prevent rework.

C. The Contractor shall schedule his work according to the master schedule and follow the general

building construction closely. D. The Contractor shall set all pipe and conduit sleeves, or install conduits and raceways where

necessary, prior to the placement of masonry or the pouring of concrete.

3.3 MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS A. Where the specifications call for an installation to be made in accordance with Manufacturer’s

recommendations, a copy of such recommendations shall be kept at all times in the Contractor’s site office.

B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions where they cover points not specifically indicated on the

Drawings and Specifications. Obtain clarification from the Engineer where required.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. The locations and elevations of equipment shown on the Drawings are approximate and subject


to slight revisions if necessary at the time the work is installed. Final locations should be confirmed with the Engineer in advance of construction. Minor changes in location shall be made at no cost by the Contractor.

B. Holes for raceway penetration into sheet metal cabinets and boxes shall be made accurately with

a hole punch. Cutting openings with a torch or other device will not be acceptable. C. Raceway entry into equipment shall be carefully planned. Cutting of the enclosure framework

to accommodate poorly planned raceways will not be acceptable. D. Cabling inside equipment shall be carefully planned, routed, and laced. Cables shall be placed

such that they do not cause obstruction. E. Equipment shall be set level and plumb. Equipment shall be braced and secured for a rigid fit.

3.5 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION A. Provide suitable protection for all equipment, work, and property against damage during

construction. B. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for material and equipment stored at the site. C. Conduit openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during construction. All outlet boxes will

be kept free of concrete, plaster, and debris. D. Equipment shall be covered and tightly sealed against the entrance of dust, dirt, and moisture. E. Interiors of panelboards and motor control centers shall be kept clean and dry prior to placing

into service.

3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the

electrical system. The work shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them dry until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed according to code.

B. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth with allowances made for floor slabs, forms,

beams, finished grades, etc. Ground under conduits shall be compacted prior to raceway installation.

C. All backfill shall be made with selected soil, free of rocks and debris. The backfill shall be

mechanically tamped in six-inch layers to secure a ninety percent density ratio. D. All excavated material not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed to a disposal

area as directed by the Engineer. E. Field check and verify all locations of underground utilities prior to any excavating. In the

event existing utilities are broken, they are to be repaired to the original condition.


F. Where the excavation requires the opening of existing walks, drives, or other existing equipment, these facilities shall be cut as required to facilitate the new construction. The sizes of the cut shall be kept to a minimum. After installation is complete, repair the existing walks, drives, or other pavement to original condition or to match the new installation.

3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and patching required under this section shall be done in a workmanlike manner.

Cutting lines shall be uniform and smooth. B. Use concrete saws for large cuts in concrete and use core drills for small round cuts in concrete. C. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintel or other structural supports to

protect the existing masonry. Adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent damage to the masonry.

D. Patch concrete openings that are to be filled with nonmetallic, non-shrinking grout. Finished

concrete patching shall be smooth and shall be uniform with surrounding surfaces.

3.8 FLASHING A. Provide waterproof flashing for each penetration of exterior walls and roofs. B. Flashing for conduit penetrations through built-up roofs shall be made with patch panel filled

full with pitch.

3.9 EQUIPMENT CLEAN-UP A. Remove all temporary labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from all exposed equipment. Upon

completion of work, clean equipment and the installation such as to produce a first class job suitable for occupancy. No loose or scraps of equipment shall be left at the site.

B. Repair any scars to paint with kits supplied by the manufacturer. C. Clean interiors of each item of electrical equipment.

3.10 FIELD AND OPERATIONAL TESTING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for testing all installations and equipment prior to final

acceptance testing. Testing shall be defined within individual sections of these Specifications. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all protective device settings in accordance with the

Engineer’s Specifications and the functional testing of the protective devices. C. The Contractor shall maintain calibrated equipment required for field and operational testing.

Calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

3.11 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer an acceptance test


to demonstrate operation of all installed equipment.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION RACEWAYS AND BOXES VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 26 05 03 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

SECTION 260503 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide complete raceways systems, boxes and fittings for all required electrical systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 01 00 – Electrical General Provisions 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit seven (7) copies and in accordance with 26 01 00 for all products. 1.4 STANDARDS

A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest

applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

1. Rigid Steel Conduit a. U.L. Standard UL-6 b. A.N.S.I. C80-1 c. Federal Specification WW-C-581E

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing

a. U.L. Standard UL-797 b. A.N.S.I. C80-3 c. Federal Specification WW-C-563

3. Flexible Steel Conduit

a. U.L. Standard UL-1

4. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit


5. Non-Metallic Conduit

a. U.L. Standard UL-651 b. A.N.S.I. Standard F512 c. N.E.M.A. Standard TC-2

6. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters



7. Rigid Aluminum Conduit

a. A.N.S.I. C80.5

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAY TYPES

A. Standard Threaded Rigid Steel Conduit.

1. Rigid conduit heavy wall galvanized. 2. Threaded type fittings: “Erickson” couplings where threaded cannot be used.

B. Electrical Metallic Tubing 1. Continuous, seamless tubing, galvanized on the exterior, coated on the interior with a

smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish, or enamel. 2. Couplings and connectors:

a. Indoor and two (2”) inches in size and smaller, shall be steel set-screw type fittings. b. 2 ½ inch size and larger must employ steel compression gland fittings. c. Outdoor shall be rain tight steel compression gland fittings.

3. Indent type fittings shall not be used. 4. All connectors shall have insulated throat.

C. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (CRSC) shall conform with NEMA RN 1. 1. Provide with a 40 mil external coating. 2. Provide with a 2 mil interior urethane coating. 3. Shall be similar or equal to Robroy Plasti-Bond or Perma-Cote.

D. Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit 1. Same as flexible steel conduit except with tough, insert watertight plastic outer jacket.


2. Cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with one-piece brass grounding bushings that thread to interior of conduit. Spiral molded vinyl-sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and nylon-insulated throat.

E. Non-Metallic Raceway

1. Composed of polyvinyl chloride suitable for 90 degrees C. 2. Raceway, fittings, and cement must be produced by the same manufacturer who must have

had a minimum of ten (10) years experience in manufacturing the products. 3. Materials must have a tensile strength of 7,000-7,200 psi at 73.4 degrees F., flexural

strength of 12,000 psi and compressive strength of 9,000 psi. 4. All joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the recommendations of the

manufacturer.

2.2 LOCKNUTS AND BUSHINGS A. Locknuts shall be steel. Die cast locknuts shall not be used. B. All bushings shall be insulated. Use nylon insulated metallic bushings for sizes 1” and larger.

Plastic bushings may be used in ½” and ¾” sizes.

2.3 OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES A. Cast Type Conduit Boxes, Outlet Bodies and Fittings

1. Provide surface mounted outlet and junction boxes, in indoor locations, where exposed to moisture and in outdoor locations.

2. Use Ferrous Alloy Boxes and conduit bodies with Rigid Steel or IMC. 3. Use Ferrous Alloy or cast aluminum boxes and conduit bodies with Electrical Metallic

Tubing. 4. Covers: Cast or sheet metal unless otherwise required.

5. Tapered threads for hubs. 6. Exterior devices shall be PVC coated.

B. Galvanized Pressed Steel Outlet Boxes

1. General

a. Pressed steel, galvanized or cadmium-plated, minimum of four (4”) inches, octagonal or square, with galvanized cover or extension ring as required.


5. Concrete Box

a. Four (4”) inch octagon with a removable backplate and 3/8” fixture stud, if required. Depth of box shall allow for a minimum of one (1”) inch of concrete to be poured above the backplate.

6. Switch and Receptacle Box, Indoors

a. Nominal four (4”) inches square, 1 ½” or 2 1/8” deep as required, with raised cover unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Gangable boxes shall not be used.

7. Telephone outlet box, Indoors

a. Nominal four (4”) inches square, 2 1/8” deep, with raised cover unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Gangable boxes shall not be used.

8. Lighting Fixture Box

a. Four (4”) inch octagon with 3/8” fixture stud. b. For suspended ceiling work, four (4”) inch octagon with removable backplate where

required, and two (2) parallel bars for securing to the cross-furring channels and extend flexible conduit to each fixture.

9. Plug any open knockouts not utilized.

C. Sheet Steel Boxes Indoors

1. No. 12 USS gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side less than forty (40”) inches, and maximum area not exceeding 1,000 square inches; riveted or welded ¾ inch flanges at exterior corners.

2. No. 10 USS gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side forty (40”) to sixty (60”)

inches, and maximum area 1,000 to 1,500 square inches, riveted or welded ¾ inch flanges at exterior corners.

3. No. 10 USS gauge sheet steel riveted or welded to 1 ½ by 1 ½” by ¼” welded angle iron

framework for boxes with a maximum side exceeding sixty (60”) inches and more than 1,500 square inches in area.

4. Covers

a. Same gauge steel as box. b. Subdivided single covers so no section of cover exceeds fifty (50) pounds. c. Machine bolts, machine screws threaded into tapped holes, or sheet metal screws as

required; maximum spacing twelve (12”) inches.


5. Paint

a. Rust inhibiting primer; ANSI No. 61 light gray finish coat.

b. Where size of box is not indicated, size to permit pulling, racking and splicing of cables.

D. Floor Boxes

1. General

a. Class I, watertight, normal depth cast iron construction Type I, fully adjustable, for use in concrete.

b. Single Gang Round type. c. Multiple Gang or Combination - Rectangular type partitions of separating power from

communication sections.

2. Floor Box Covers

a. Rugged construction, impervious to cleaning detergents. b. Compatible with floor covering. c. Brass or bronze for flush mounting. d. Providing continuous ground path to box. e. Floor box covers shall be equal to Hubbell Raco 6250 brass/rectangular.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS

A. The following applications must be adhered to except as otherwise required by Code.

Raceways not conforming to this listing must be removed by this Contractor and replaced with the specified material at this Contractor’s expense. 1. Use EMT for all indoor raceways. 2. Use PVC Schedule 40 for all underground raceways and conduit stubbed up into the

lighting fixture bases.

3.2 RACEWAY SYSTEMS IN GENERAL


A. Install capped bushings on raceways as soon as installed and remove only when wires are pulled. Securely tie embedded raceway in place prior to embedment. Lay out the work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations of multiple raceway runs.

B. Locate raceways so that the strength of structural members is unaffected and they do not

conflict with the services of other trades. Install one (1”) inch or larger raceways, in or through structural members (beams, slabs, etc.) only when and in the manner accepted by the Engineer. Draw up couplings and fittings full and tight.

C. Raceways shall not be run on roofs or exposed on the outside of the buildings unless

specifically noted as exposed on the drawings or approved by the Engineer. D. Non-metallic raceway installation shall conform to the following:

1. All joints are to be made by the solvent cementing method using the material recommended

by the raceway manufacturer. To insure good joints, components shall be cleaned prior to assembly.

2. Raceway cut-offs shall be square and made by handsaw or other approved means which

does not deform the conduit. Raceway shall be reamed prior to solvent cementing to couplings, adapters, or fittings.

3. Electrical devices that are served by PVC raceways shall be grounded by means of a ground

wire pulled in the raceway. 4. Bends shall be made by methods that do not deform or damage the conduit. The radii of

field bends shall not be less than those established by the N.E.C. 5. Raceway expansion fittings shall be provided where necessary. The position of the

expansion fitting shall be adjusted proportional to the temperature at installation. 6. Raceway supports shall be installed, in such a manner, to allow the PVC conduit to slide

through the supports as the temperature changes.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION WIRE AND CABLE VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 26 05 19 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

SECTION 260519 – WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall provide under this section of the Specifications all materials, labor, equipment, tools and supplies for the installation of wire and cable for a complete installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Conduits and raceways are specified in Section 26 05 03. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit seven (7) copies and in accordance with 26 05 03, including the following minimum information:

1. Manufacturer product data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Wire and cable shall meet all standards and specifications applicable, and shall be in conformance with the latest edition of the NEC. Insulated wire and cable shall have size, type of insulation, voltage and manufacturer’s name permanently marked on outer covering at regular intervals not exceeding four feet. Wire and cable shall be delivered in complete coils or reels with identifying tags, stating size, type of insulation, etc.

B. Wire and cable shall be suitably protected from weather and other damage during storage and

handling, and shall be in first-class condition after installation. C. Wire sizes shall be No. 12 AWG minimum, except as specified for control and instrumentation

circuits. D. Conductors shall be 98 percent conductivity soft drawn copper, ASTM B8 for stranded

conductors. E. Wire and cable shall be factory color-coded with a separate color for each phase and neutral

used consistently throughout the system. The color code below shall be used unless otherwise specified:

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION WIRE AND CABLE VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 26 05 19 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

Phase 208/120V A Black B Red C Blue N White G Green

F. Control conductors shall be colored red for 120V circuits with white for neutral. Control

conductors shall be colored blue for low voltage DC circuits, 24 volts and below. Yellow conductors shall be used for separately powered control circuits entering a control enclosure.

G. All conductors shall be rated 600 volts, unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, or

for electronic or communication use.

2.2 BUILDING WIRE A. NEC type THHN/THWN shall be used for lighting, receptacles, and all circuits not exceeding

150 volts to ground. B. NEC type THHN/THWN shall be used for all circuits above 150 volts to ground.

2.3 CONNECTORS A. Joints on branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide as indicated on plans and

shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the branch from the circuit. No splices shall be made in conductor except at outlet boxes, junction boxes, or splice boxes.

B. All joints or splices for #10 AWG or smaller shall be made with UL approved wire nuts or

compression type connectors C. All joints or splices for #8 AWG or larger shall be made with a mechanical compression

connector. After the conductors have been made mechanically and electrically secure, the entire joint or splice shall be covered with Scotch #33 tape or approved equal to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to the insulation of the conductors. The connector shall be UL approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All wire and cable shall be continuous from origin to panel or equipment termination without splices unless otherwise specified. No splices shall be allowed in handholes below grade.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION WIRING DEVICES VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 26 27 26 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install wiring devices as shown on the Drawings and specified herein in compliance with the NEC. Furnish and install wiring devices suitable for the temperature, conditions, and location where installed.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Conduits and raceways are specified in Section 26 05 03. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit seven (7) copies and in accordance with 26 27 26, including the following minimum information:

1. Manufacturer product data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES

A. Wall switches shall be general duty, totally enclosed with bodies of phenolic compound, butt compact, with an integral mounting strap with provisions for side wiring with captively held binding screws. The following switches shall be used. Single Pole Switch Hubbell 1221 or equal Double Pole Switch Hubbell 1222 or equal Three-Way Switch Hubbell 1223 or equal Four-Way Switch Hubbell 1224 or equal

2.2 RECEPTACLES A. General duty receptacles shall be two pole, three wire grounding, 20 amp, 125 volts. NEMA

configuration 5-20R shall be used unless otherwise specified. The following receptacles shall be used. Duplex Receptacle Hubbell 5362 or equal Duplex Receptacle-GFI Hubbell GF5362 or equal Single Receptacle Hubbell 5361 or equal

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION WIRING DEVICES VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 26 27 26 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

B. Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of the receptacle type indicated, mounted in a box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate. The cap shall be attached to the cover plate by a spring hinged flap.


A. Coordinate switch and receptacle mounting location with detail and heights as noted on the

Drawings. B. Provide ivory switches, unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Furnish device plates to match the wiring device used. Device plates shall be on piece type,

single or multiple gang switch and duplex outlet wall plates for wiring devices. D. Test all wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of ground connections.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION LIGHTING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 26 50 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - AT FORT SMITH

SECTION 26 50 00 – LIGHTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide, install, and test all lighting fixtures as specified herein. B. This specification covers the lights for the interior renovation.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Conduits and Raceways are specified in Section 26 05 03 B. Wire and Cable are specified in Section 26 05 19

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with 26 01 00. B. Submit manufacturer data sheets listing all accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VAPORTIGHT LED LINEAR

A. This article covers pole mounted lighting fixture A. B. The fixture construction shall be one-piece fiberglass housing with integral perimeter channel

utilizing continuous poured-in-place closed cell gasket. The fixture shall be approved as a wireway and through wiring. The fixture shall be provided with stainless steel latches. The fixture shall have power connection pre-drilled holes at each end. The fixture shall be ceiling mounted.

C. The fixture optics shall be 100 percent (100%) impact modified frosted acrylic lens with lineal

ribs. D. The fixture shall use high-efficiency LED's on metal core circuit boards. The fixture shall be

4100K temperature. The fixture LED driver shall operate from 120V through 277V, 50-60HZ. The fixture integral surge protection shall be in accordance with IEEE/ANSI C62.41.2 to Category C Low. The fixture shall include a temperature-sensing component that will limit the temperature of the LEDs in case of excessive ambient temperatures or misapplication. The fixture shall be provided with 0-10V dimming driver standard. The fixture shall have an expected service life of 60,000 hours at 80 percent (80%) lumen maintenance.


E. The fixture warranty shall be 5 years. F. The fixture shall be equal to Lithonia FEM4 L48 6000LM IMAFL WD MVOLT GZ10 35K

80CRI.

2.02 VANDAL RESISTANT DOWNLIGHT

A. This article covers downlight lighting fixture B. B. The optical assembly shall be fully serviceable from below the ceiling. C. The optical assembly shall be marine grade die cast aluminum bezel with low copper alloy. D. The luminaire shall operate from 120-277VAC and have power factor greater than 90%. E. The luminaire housing shall be constructed of galvanized steel with telescoping mounting bars. F. The luminaire shall be suitable for installation into ceilings up to 1.5” thick. G. The luminaire shall be provided with tamper resistant screws and 1/8” clear glass lens. H. The fixture shall be Gotham EV06VR 35/45 AR CGL MVOLT or equal.

2.03 TRAC LIGHTING

A. This article covers trac lighting fixtures C and D. B. Fixture C shall be 4’ of trac with two (2) wall wash fixtures. C. Fixture D shall be 6’ of trac with three (3) wall wash fixtures. D. The trac shall extruded aluminum I beam channel with one piece thermoplastic insulator, two

(2) 12 gauge solid copper conductors rated at 20 amps and 120VAC. Provide and install connector and accessories as required.

E. The track fixtures shall be wall wash illumination with die cast aluminum construction,

concealed wiring, LED driver with 35K color, clear reflector, and standard dimming. F. The fixture shall have 350 degree horizontal coverage and 90 degree vertical aiming. G. The fixture shall be equal to Juno T260L 35K 90CRI OFF BL.

2.04 LED FLOOD LIGHT LARGE

A. This article covers light fixture E.

B. The fixture shall be nominal 4’ length, linear flood light, wide flood distribution.


C. The fixture material shall be copper free die cast aluminum with stainless steel fasteners.

D. The light source shall be dynamic range with 3 channel tunable while, 1000 lumens per foot.

E. The lens shall be high clarity acrylic.

F. The mounting shall be knuckle mount 45 degrees.

G. The fixture shall be provided with 10’ cord length.

H. The fixture shall be equal to Hydrel 4750L QS 4FT 1000LMF TUWH MVOLT WFL KM CSL10 BL.

2.05 LED FLOOD LIGHT SMALL

A. This article covers fixture F.

B. The fixture shall be nominal 2’ length, with twelve LED. C. The fixture material shall be copper free die cast aluminum with stainless steel fasteners. D. The fixture shall be universal input from 120-277VAC. E. The lens shall be glass. F. The mounting shall be knuckle mount. G. The fixture shall be equal to Hubbell ALF-12LU-5K-BZ.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Each fixture shall be a completely furnished unit with all components, mounting, and hanging devices necessary for the proper installation of the fixture in the location as shown on the Drawings.

B. Coordinate all locations with other trades.

3.02 MOCK-UPS

C. In order that the track lighting at the ceilings of Rooms 103 and 109 is as effective as possible a mock-up of two types of light fixtures shall be tested on site.

D. Install one section of track in the location selected by the Architect. Then install two wall

washer flood lights as specified, or as approved as an equal. After determining the effectiveness of the wall washer fixture, then install two spot light fixtures by the same manufacturer and as


approved by the Architect. As a result of this test a decision will be made between the use of the wall washer or the spot light types of fixtures and the light track installation shall be completed. Should the spot light fixtures be selected, and should their cost exceed that of the specified fixture, the difference in cost will be included in a change order.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SECURITY DETECTION ALARM AND MONITORING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 28 30 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

SECTION 283000 – SECURITY DETECTION, ALARM, AND MONITORING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall provide a complete and functional security detection, alarm, and monitoring system for the Willhaf House as shown on the Drawings. The system shall be equal to the existing UAFS system installed at the Drennen-Scott House.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The system shall include a microprocessor based control panel, remote annunciator and keypad, door entry contact switches, and motion detectors.

B. The system shall include the capability to monitor fire alarm contacts from the Fire Alarm

Control Panel. C. The system shall monitor for power loss and alarm the monitoring service on this condition. D. The system shall be connected to AT&T landline for monitoring.

1.3 SUBMITTAL DATA A. Provide submittal data on all system components and operation. B. The Contractor shall not order material until receipt of approved submittals.






A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model.

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SECURITY DETECTION ALARM AND MONITORING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 28 30 00 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.

C. All Equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.

D. Wire and cable shall be installed in conduit.

E. The system shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz.

2.2 PROGRAMMING

A. The system and its motion detectors, door contacts, and other miscellaneous inputs shall be programmed to call and annunciate the type alarm in condition to the remote monitoring service.

B. All field-defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory and shall not be lost if AC mains and/or battery is lost.


A. Installation shall be in accordance with the local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and

as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas

and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.

3.2 TESTING

A. Test each device for proper function. B. Program security codes into the system for the Owner as directed.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 28 46 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT FORT SMITH

SECTION 284600 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall provide a complete and functional fire alarm system for the Willhaf House as shown on the Drawings. The system shall be equal to the existing UAFS system installed at the Drennen-Scott House.

B. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the microprocessor controlled, addressable reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, fire alarm control panel, auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA standard No. 72 for protected

premises signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent addressable reporting devices shall be encoded onto a Class B (NFPA Style 4), or Class A (NFPA Style 6, 7) Signaling Line Circuit (SLC).

B. Initiation Device Circuits (IDCs) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) or Class A (NFPA

Style D). C. Notification Appliance Circuits shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style

Z). D. Built-in Horn Strobe Synchronization w/ selective silence. E. Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling. F. A single ground or open on the system Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) shall not cause system

malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm.

G. Alarm signals arriving at the main FAP shall not be lost following a power failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.

H. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices the

following functions shall immediately occur: The System Alarm LED shall flash, a local electric signal in the control panel shall sound, all system output programs assigned via control-by-event equations to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated System Outputs (alarm Notification Appliances and/or Relays) shall be activated, a HMI display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises, and remote alarm


reporting shall commence.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with these standards:

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 72 Central Station Signaling Systems No. 72 Protective Signaling Systems No. 72 Automatic Fire Detectors No. 72 Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems. No. 72 Testing Procedures for Signaling Systems. No. 101 Life Safety Code Underwriters Laboratories (UL): No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 268ASmoke Detectors for Duct Applications. No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances. No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. No. 1971Visual Notification Appliances for the hearing impaired

1.4 FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS A. Arrange for required inspections and pay all license, permit, and inspection fees. Arrange with

the serving utility companies for the connections to all utilities and pay all charges for same including inspection fees and meters if required.

B. No work shall be concealed until after inspection and approval by the proper authorities or

Engineer. If work is concealed without inspection and approval, the Contractor shall be responsible for all work required to open and restore the concealed areas in addition to the required modifications.

1.5 SUBMITTAL DATA

A. Provide submittal data on all system components and operation. B. The Contractor shall not order material until receipt of approved submittals.







A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling (fire alarm) system.

B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.

C. All Equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.

D. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.

E. Wiring for 24 volt control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals.

F. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits.

G. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70.

H. Wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded and installed in conduit unless specifically excepted by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer. The system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the communication loop.

I. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: addressable detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.


J. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and

annunciation panel that shall include a backlit, 80-character Liquid Crystal Display, individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the Field Programming and control of the Fire Alarm System.

K. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of expansion to exceed the number of required installed devices and modules by 50%.

L. The signaling circuit interface shall provide power to, and communicate with, all of the Addressable Detectors and Addressable Modules over a single pair of wires. This SLC Loop shall be capable of NFPA Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 operation.

M. The signaling circuit shall be capable of distances required for the facility installation.

N. The control panel shall be housed in a UL listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected.

O. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators.

P. A remote annunciator shall be supplied and installed.

Q. The FACP shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz.

2.2 PROGRAMMING

A. The system and its smoke detectors and modules shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of electronic integrated circuits.

B. All programming may be accomplished through the standard FACP built-in keypad or via remote computer interface.

C. All field-defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory and shall not be lost if AC mains and/or battery is lost.

2.3 SYSTEM DEVICES

A. Programmable Electronic Sounders

1. Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 2. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to provide

slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones (Temporal Pattern) with an output sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device.

B. Strobe Lights

1. Shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.


2. Shall meet the requirements of the ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) as well as UL

Standard 1971.

C. Audible/Visual Combination Devices 1. Shall meet the applicable requirements of Section A listed above for audibility. 2. Shall meet the requirements of Section B listed above for visibility.

D. Addressable Manual Pull Box 1. Addressable Manual Stations shall be provided to connect to the Fire Alarm Control Panel

Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. 2. The Manual Pull Box shall, on command from the Control Panel, send data to the panel

representing the state of the manual switch. Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.

3. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation that cannot be reset

without the use of a key. 4. Manual Stations shall be constructed of LEXAN (or polycarbonate equivalent) with clearly

visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches or larger.

5. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting, or semiflush mounting as shown on the

plans, and shall be installed in accordance with ADA and local codes. 6. The Manual Station shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches.

Addressable manual stations that use binary address setting methods, such as a dip switch, are much more difficult to install and are subject to installation error, and are not allowable substitutes.

E. Addressable Photoelectric Detectors

1. Smoke detectors shall be addressable and shall connect with two wires to the Fire Alarm

Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit. Up to 318 addressable detectors may connect to two separate SLC loops.

2. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke

density. 3. The detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base. 4. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and

report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.


5. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using decimal switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers on dipswitches to set the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector.

6. The detectors shall provide an alarm and power LED. The LED shall flash under normal

conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED is placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.

F. Addressable Photoelectric Detectors with Fixed Thermal Sensor

1. Smoke detectors shall be addressable and shall connect with two wires to the Fire Alarm

Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit. Up to 318 addressable detectors with fixed thermal sensors (135 degree F) connect to two SLC loops.

2. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke

density. 3. The detectors with fixed thermal sensors shall alarm at a fixed temperature of 135 degree F. 4. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base. 5. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and

report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.

6. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using decimal

switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers on dipswitches to set the detector address are not acceptable. Systems that require a special programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are labor intensive and not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector.


conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED is placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.

G. Addressable Ionization Smoke Detectors

1. Smoke Detectors shall be low profile addressable and connect with two wires to the Fire

Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit. Up to 318 addressable detectors may connect to two SLC loops.

2. The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products of

combustion.


3. The detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base. 4. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and

report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself, by activating a switch, or may be activated remotely on command from the control panel.

5. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using decimal

switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or dipswitches to set the address are not acceptable. They shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector.


conditions. The LED is placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect a remote alarm LED.


A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on

the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas

and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.

C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be

flush mounted when located in finished areas.

3.2 TESTING A. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the

manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system.

B. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits,

ground faults, continuity, and insulation. C. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP. D. Verify activation of all flow switches.

E. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.

F. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.


G. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.

H. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.

I. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all addressable smoke detectors.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 31 23 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 31 23 00 – EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required; and perform all trenching for storm drains, pipelines and appurtenances, and other miscellaneous construction, including excavation, bedding, backfilling, disposal of surplus or unsatisfactory soil material, and restoration of trench surfaces and easements.

B. Excavation shall extend to the width and depth shown on the Drawings or as specified herein, and

it shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and appurtenances.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02 50 00 – Site Preparation B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete C. Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling D. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control E. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding

F. Section 33 14 00 – Water Distribution


A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), latest edition:

1. AASHTO M 57 Standard Specification for Materials for Embankments and Subgrades

2. AASHTO M 145 Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-

Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes

3. AASHTO M 146 Standard Specification for Terms Relating to Subgrade, Soil-Aggregate, and Fill Materials

4. AASHTO T 99 Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5-kg (5.5-lb) Rammer and a 305-mm (12- in.) Drop

5. AASHTO T 180 Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18- in.) Drop


6. AASHTO T 310 Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition:

1. ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2. ASTM D2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

3. ASTM 6938 Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), latest edition:

1. All excavation, trenching and related sheeting, bracing, etc., shall comply with the requirements of OSHA safety standards (29 CFR Part 1926.650 Subpart P – Excavation) and any applicable State requirements. Where conflict between OSHA and State regulations exists, the more stringent requirements shall apply.

2. The current edition of Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standard for

Excavation and Trench Safety Systems, 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P, is specifically incorporated and made a part of these specifications and contract documents as required by Arkansas Code Annotated 22-9-212.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Submit the proposed method of backfilling and compaction to the Engineer for review.

C. Submit an excavation and trench safety plan to the Engineer for review.

D. Furnish test data to indicate compliance of backfill, bedding and compaction with this

specification. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Furnish manufacturer or supplier certification for all products and materials. Furnish the Engineer with quality assurance testing of all materials from offsite sources including select material, topsoil, sand, rock, and crushed stone.

B. Unless otherwise noted, conduct testing in accordance with the following minimum frequencies:

1. Determine a moisture-density relationship for each type of subgrade and backfill material

encountered, and conduct testing in accordance with AASHTO T 99 or T 180.


2. Conduct field density and moisture testing of initial trench subgrade and all backfill in accordance with AASHTO T 310. Unless otherwise indicated, in-place density and moisture testing frequency shall be one (1) test per 400 linear feet (every other lift) of trench backfill.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Completely coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before commencement of items herein specified.

B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be built into the

work of other sections. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Take field measurements at the site to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper coordination of all other construction items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BEDDING

A. GENERAL

1. Pipe bedding shall conform to the class specified. When no bedding class is specified, the requirements for Class "D" bedding shall apply. If trench conditions are mucky, bedding shall be Class "B".

B. CLASS "B" GRANULAR BEDDING

1. Class "B" Granular Bedding: Crushed stone or gravel, well graded, and containing several

sizes of particles ranging from 3/4-inch maximum to No. 4. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the material shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33, Gradation 67.

C. CLASS "D" BEDDING

1. Class "D" Bedding: Firm soil excavated from the trench and free of rocks, which will provide uniform bearing for the full length of the pipe barrel.

2. Excavate bell holes in the trench at each joint to permit proper jointing and to prevent the joint of the pipe from being a point of support. Correct over excavation of any portion of the trench with thoroughly compacted soil material approved by the Engineer.


2.2 SELECT BACKFILL

A. Select Backfill: Granular material with a maximum particle size of 3 inches, graded from coarse to fine, conforming to AASHTO classification A-1, A-2-4 or A-2-5, or a sandy or gravely clay conforming to classification A-2-6 or A-6 with the exception that the plasticity index shall not exceed 15. 1. Crusher screenings, including nepheline syenite granite fines (Donna Fill®) will not be

allowed as select fill or backfill material.

B. The Contractor shall furnish, at his expense, test data to indicate compliance of select material with this specification.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Excavate the trench so that the pipe can be laid to the required lines and grades as indicated on the Drawings. Do not deviate from the required line or grade except with the written consent of the Engineer.

B. Grade the trench to the approximate depth shown on the plans and maintain a depth that will

provide not less than 30 inches of cover from the top of the pipe to the finished surface of the ground. Install the pipe to a grade such that the entire line will have a minimum number of high and low points. At utility or street crossings requiring greater line depth, install the pipe approach to the crossing on a gradual and uniform grade.

C. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work

and interfere to such an extent that an alteration in the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the owners of the structures for the removal, relocation or reconstruction of the obstructions.

D. Furnish temporary support and provide adequate protection and maintenance of all underground

and surface utility structures, drains, conduits, sewers and other structures encountered in the progress of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing structures, the Contractor shall permanently support, relocate, remove or reconstruct the obstruction in cooperation with the owners of such utility structures. Determine the location of existing underground utility structures, including coordinating utility location services, examining available records, and making all explorations and excavations necessary to determine the exact location of the underground utility.

E. Proceed with caution in the excavation and preparation of the trench to determine the exact

location of underground structures and utilities, both known and unknown. The Contractor is responsible for the repair of structures broken or otherwise damaged because of careless construction procedures.

F. Do not advance the excavation of trenches more than 150 feet ahead of the completed pipe work

and completed backfill without permission from the Engineer. Refer to other sections of these Specifications for the requirements for cutting and replacing pavements.


G. Lay water mains at least 10 feet horizontally from any existing or proposed gravity or pressure

sewer. Measure the distance from edge to edge. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a 10-foot separation, deviation must be specifically approved by State regulatory officials and the Engineer. Vertical separation of water and sewer mains at crossings shall provide for a minimum of 18 inches of distance from the outside of the water line to the outside of the sewer line. At crossings, one full length of water pipe shall be laid such that both joints are installed as far from the sewer as possible. Special structural support of the water and/or sewer line may be required by the Design Engineer, i.e., clay, concrete, or pipe encasement.

H. Cut and repair street and highway crossings in accordance with the requirements of the local

municipality or government agency. Obtain street cut permits for any and all such cuts. 3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate all the material encountered within the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and as specified and directed by the Engineer. Saw all paved driveway, parking lot and street cuts at the trench limits or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Below a point 12 inches above the outside top of the pipe, the trench shall have vertical sides and

shall have a minimum width equal to the outside pipe diameter plus 18 inches and a maximum width equal the outside pipe diameter plus 30 inches.

C. At any point where the width of the lower portion of the trench exceeds these limits, the Contractor

shall take corrective measures. As directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide either pipe of adequate strength, special pipe embedment, or a concrete cradle as required by the loading conditions. The Contractor shall furnish and install these corrective items at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Stockpile material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the

banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove or waste all excavated materials not required or unsuitable for backfill as indicated in the Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.

E. Where necessary to protect the labor, the work or adjacent property, the Contractor shall provide

and install shoring. The material used shall be of suitable dimensions and strength to prevent the settlement or movement of the ground adjacent to the trench and to prevent damage to surface or subsurface structures. The adequacy and need of the sheeting and bracing shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor. The shoring shall remain in place until the backfill has proceeded to a point where it can safely be removed, except that, if in the opinion of the Engineer, damage is likely to result from withdrawing shoring, it shall remain in place. No separate payment will be made for sheeting, shoring and bracing.

F. If the soil at the bottom of the trench is unstable and in such condition that it cannot be properly

graded, excavate the trench to a depth determined by the Engineer and backfill to grade with crushed stone or gravel well compacted by tamping.

G. Dewater all excavation before any construction is undertaken therein. Lay all pipe in dry trenches

and place all concrete only upon dry and firm foundation material. The Contractor shall pump, bail, or temporarily provide drainage for any water encountered.


H. Should the specified methods of dewatering the trenches be unsuccessful, excavate the trench to a depth of approximately 6 inches below grade. Backfill the trench to grade with gravel bedding. Form a sump below the gravel to provide a place for a pump to take suction and thus lower the water level to a point below the bottoms of the pipe joints. Continue the pumping until the joints have been placed and the presence of water will not injure them. Do not commence backfilling until the trench has been dewatered.

I. If rock is present at the grade line of the trench, excavate it to an elevation approximately 6 inches

below grade. Rock shall consist of sedimentary or other types of rock that cannot be excavated without the use of rippers or impact hammers. Rock excavation shall include boulders and deposits of concrete with a volume of 1/2 cubic yard or more. Backfill the trench to grade with crushed stone or gravel. Place this backfill prior to laying the pipe. Remove and dispose of all excavated rock from the site.

J. When indicated on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer, construct an impervious dam or

bulkhead in the trench to interrupt the unnatural flow of groundwater after construction. Key the dam into the trench bottom and sidewalls. Where directed, provide at least one (1) clay or other impervious material dam in the trench line every 300 linear-feet of pipe or between each manhole.

K. Avoid heavy machinery traffic above installed pipe until at least 3 feet of trench backfill is placed

and compacted. Monitor pipe deflection during trench backfill. 3.3 BEDDING

A. Bed all pipe accordance with Subsection 2.1.

B. Prior to installation of the pipe, shape the bedding to provide uniform support for the bottom quadrant of the pipe barrel.

C. Accomplish the placement of material on each side of pipe (haunching) and immediately above

the top of the pipe (initial backfill) in a manner that will prevent displacement or deflection of the pipe.

3.4 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill all trenches immediately after the pipe is laid and approved. Install backfill by methods that will not disturb the pipe. Repair pavement cuts with paving materials of the type and design of the original surface. Do not commence pavement repair until the Contractor has achieved proper subgrade compaction. Such backfilling, before testing, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for correction of leaks in the line.

B. Backfill material shall consist of on-site material excavated from the trenches except where the

Drawings require the use of special backfill materials or as directed by the Engineer. On-site backfill material shall be free of rocks, clods or frozen masses over 3 inches in diameter or organic matter. The Engineer will approve backfill material prior to placement in the trench.

C. Place backfill up to a level of 12 inches above the top of the pipe by hand shoveling or other

approved methods, and deposit backfill in maximum layers of 4 inches. Compact each layer by mechanical tamping. Do not displace pipe during tamping of the backfill. Control the moisture content of the backfill material as required to obtain the specified compaction.


D. From a point 12 inches above the top of the pipe, place backfill by any approved method that will

not injure or disturb the pipe and will result in the specified compaction.

E. Trench backfill density requirements vary with the location and depth of the trench. Generally, perform compaction tests in every second lift of any fill area to demonstrate the compliance with the specifications. The percentage of compactive requirements for the various locations are the minimum densities that will be accepted. All densities specified herein are based on the maximum dry density of the material obtained by the standard method of test as determined by AASHTO T 99, latest revision. Field density determination shall conform to AASHTO T 310.

Location and Depth

Percent Compaction

Bottom of trench to 12 inches above the top of the pipe. 95% Upper portions of the trench not under pavement. 95% Upper portions of the trench under streets, driveways, sidewalks and paved areas. Subgrade (top 12 inches).

100%

Remainder of fill. 100%

F. When conflicts exist between these densities due to location or depth of trench, obtain the higher

specified density.

H. Replace or rework materials or workmanship that fail to meet the specified requirements.

I. All trenches shall be backfilled, settled, and the ground restored to its original condition as soon as possible after the pipe is installed. Any unnecessary delay in restoring trenches to their original condition shall constitute just cause for stopping all other work until the trenches are so restored. If at any time within 12 months after the completion and final acceptance of the work embraced in this Contract, there shall be any settlement of the trenches requiring repairs to be made, the Owner may notify the Contractor to make such repairs as may be necessary. Should the Contractor fail to do so within 15 days after the date of such notice, or should the nature of such defect be such as to require immediate attention, the Owner shall make such repairs as may be necessary, and bill the actual cost of such repairs to the Contractor.

3.5 SLURRY BACKFILL

A. Where designated by the Engineer, the Contractor shall backfill trenches with a plant mixed slurry of sand, cement, and fly ash in a ratio of 3,185 lb.: 150 lb.: 100 lb. This mixture shall meet the minimum criteria of a compressive strength of 300 psi at 28 days. The Contractor shall use this material to help facilitate the reapplication of traffic over the trenches across streets and driveways where dictated by the Engineer. The Engineer may modify the design as required by the construction conditions. Place slurry to neat trench lines as indicated on the plans, not to exceed a trench quantity 24 inches wider than the diameter of the pipe in the trench.

B. The Engineer may elect to place a temporary surface over the slurry. The Contractor shall consult

the trenching details in the Drawings as to the required depth of bedding, slurry and surface material depths. This procedure may be used for drainage, water lines, sanitary sewer lines or other pavement crossings.


C. Allow utility backfill to achieve a 24-hour set before allowing traffic on it, or before the placement

of base course or paving materials. Protect utility backfill against frost and rapid drying. 3.6 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives are prohibited. END OF SECTION – 31 23 00

WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 31 25 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 31 25 00 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals; and install, maintain, remove, and clean up erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The work shall include installation of temporary access ways and staging areas, silt fences, ditch

checks, sediment removal and disposal, erosion control device maintenance, removal of temporary erosion control devices, temporary mulching, excelsior matting installation, and final cleanup.

C. The Drawings include typical erosion and sedimentation control details for the Contractor’s

convenience and do not relieve him from installing different or additional devices where required to properly protect the site.

D. The Owner has prepared a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) for use on this Project. The Contractor agrees to become a signatory to the SWP3. The Contractor further agrees to abide by the conditions of the SWP3, furnish and install all features of the SWP3, and amend the SWP3 as necessary to accommodate site conditions and construction elements.

E. For construction sites in Arkansas, the Owner will submit to ADEQ the Notice of Termination for

Dischargers of Storm Water Runoff Associated With Construction Activity authorized under NPDES General Permit ARR150000 following final stabilization of the construction site.


A. Section 02 50 00 – Site Preparation


C. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding 1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS

A. Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department – Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, latest edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Best Management Practices (BMPs): Schedules of activities, prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures, and other management practices to prevent or reduce the pollution of waters of the State. BMPs also include treatment requirements, operating procedures, and practices to control plant site runoff, spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal, or drainage from raw material storage.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. For all construction projects involving sites of one (1) acre or greater the Contractor shall:

1. Prior to the start of construction, submit a schedule for installing temporary and permanent erosion control work. Work shall not commence until the Engineer approves the erosion control schedule and methods of operation.

2. Sign and return three (3) copies of the SWP3 to the Engineer. Designate a qualified inspector

responsible for performing inspections as specified in the SWP3.

3. Submit any amendments as necessary to the SWP3 to prevent sediment from leaving the construction site.


A. Install and maintain all sedimentation control devices, including accepted Best Management Practices (BMPs), necessary to prevent the movement of sediment from the construction site to off-site areas or into the stream system via surface runoff or underground drainage systems. Install measures in addition to those shown on the Drawings as necessary to prevent the movement of sediment off-site and as directed by the Engineer. Maintain, remove and clean up sedimentation devices at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Sedimentation and erosion control measures shall conform to the requirements of the SWP3.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Implement the SWP3 according to the requirements of the General Permit. B. Do not discharge pollutants such as chemicals, fuels, lubricants, asphalt, raw sewage, concrete

drum wash water, and other harmful waste into or alongside any waters of the United States. Dispose of these pollutants in accordance with governing State and Federal regulations and in accordance with the SWP3 and the General Permit.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before commencement of items herein specified.





PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Crushed stone for sediment filtration devices, driveway and access ways, and staging areas: Hard, durable, crushed stone, 1 1/2-inch to 6-inch conforming to the Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department Standard Specification for Stone Backfill.

B. Rock ditch check rip-rap: Sound, durable rock, roughly rectangular in shape conforming to

following:

1. Well graded within the following limits.

Weight of Stone Percent Finer by Weight 40 lbs 100% 12 lbs 50% 3 lbs 0%

2. Free of rounded stones, boulders, sandstone or similar soft stone.

3. Free of overburden, spoil, shale and organic material.

C. Silt fence: Prefabricated commercial product made of woven polypropylene, ultraviolet resistant

material similar to Mirafi Silt Fence by TenCate Mirafi, Inc. or approved equal.

D. Filter box mesh: 1/4-inch galvanized steel woven wire mesh or hardware cloth.

E. Straw mulch: Threshed straw of oats, wheat, barley, or rye, free of noxious weeds, mold or other objectionable material. Straw mulch shall contain at least fifty percent (50%) by weight of material that is 10-inch or longer. Provide straw in an air-dry condition, suitable for placement with blower equipment.

F. Erosion control blanket: One hundred percent (100%) agricultural straw matrix, stitch bonded

with degradable thread between two (2) photobiodegradable polypropylene nettings, similar to Model S150 Double Net Short-Term Blanket by North American Green or approved equal.


A. Comply with the requirements of the Federal Clean Water Act; the Arkansas Water and Air Pollution Control Act 472, as amended; and the regulations, orders, or decrees issued pursuant thereto. In case of conflict between these regulations, orders, or decrees and the provisions shown on the construction plans, the more restrictive requirements shall apply.

B. The National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) requires permit coverage in order

to discharge storm water associated with construction sites into waters of the United States. This coverage within Arkansas is obtained under ADEQ General Permit ARR150000.


C. The Owner will file a Notice of Intent (NOI) and develop a Storm Water Pollution Prevention

Plan (SWP3) for construction sites of five (5) acres or greater. The Contractor shall Implement the SWP3 according to the requirements of the General Permit and be prepared to install, construct, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control items throughout the contract period. When the project site is stabilized per the requirements of the NPDES General Permit, the Contractor shall provide written notice to the Owner. Once the site is deemed stabilized, the Owner will file the required Notice of Termination (NOT).

D. Operations performed by the Contractor on lands located outside the proposed areas of

disturbance or project limits such as borrow pits, plant sites, waste sites or other facilities, may require separate coverage under NPDES permit and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

E. If the Contractor fails to properly maintain, install, or construct erosion and sedimentation control

items, the Owner may take the following actions: cessation of the Work, withholding of Contractor payments, suspension of the project, or default of the Contractor.

F. Additional erosion and sedimentation control work required due to Contractor negligence,

carelessness, or failure to install permanent controls as scheduled, shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. In addition, the Contractor may be assessed damages resulting from negligence in complying with the SWP3 at the rate assessed against the Owner by the permitting authority.

G. The work and measures associated with erosion and sedimentation control shall include but not

be limited to the following best management practices (BMPs).

1. Staging of Earthwork Activities: Schedule excavation and moving of soil materials so that the smallest possible areas will be unprotected and subject to possible erosion for the shortest time feasible.

2. Seeding: Apply seed and fertilizer and establish a stand of grass to protect disturbed areas in

accordance with Section 32 92 19, Seeding.

3. Mulching: Apply mulch to provide temporary protection to soil surfaces from erosion.

4. Solid Sod: Install solid bermuda sod as needed for temporary erosion control.

5. Diversions: Grade ditches to divert water away from work areas and/or to collect runoff from work areas for treatment and safe disposal.

6. Stream Crossings: Install culverts or bridges where equipment must cross streams.

7. Sediment Basins: Construct sediment basins to settle and filter out sediment from eroding

areas to protect properties and streams below the construction site.

8. Baled Straw Filter Barriers: Install temporary baled straw filter barriers to protect drainage inlets and junction boxes and trap sediment in ditches from areas of limited runoff. Remove bales when permanent measures are installed.


9. Waterways: Utilize waterways for the safe disposal of filtered runoff from fields, diversions and other structures or measures.

H. Install and monitor a rain gauge on the construction site. Maintain a daily record of rainfall

amounts. I. Maintain a signed copy of the SWP3 at the job-site throughout the contract period.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install silt fences as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Position silt fences to prevent offsite movement of sediment produced by construction activities.

B. Prior to setting the access casting, install filter boxes on drainage inlets and junction boxes as

shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. C. As an alternative to filter boxes, install baled straw filter barriers surrounded by silt fence around

drainage inlets and junction boxes as shown on the Drawings and prior to setting the access casting.

D. Install rock ditch checks across stream and drainage channels just below a sandbag wall and as

shown on the Drawings. E. Install stabilized construction entrances with 6 inches (minimum) of crushed stone as shown on

the Drawings. F. Install 4 inches (minimum) crushed stone surface on staging areas and other access ways as shown

on the Drawings. G. The above requirements shall be in place prior to the initiation of construction activities.

3.3 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS

A. Inspections

1. Visually inspect all erosion and sedimentation control devices in accordance with the SWP3 and promptly after every 1/2-inch or greater rainstorm. If such inspection reveals that additional measures are needed to prevent movement of sediment to off-site areas, promptly install additional devices as needed and note any corrective measures on the inspection form in the SWP3.

2. Promptly repair sediment controls in need of maintenance within the time frame established

in the SWP3.

B. Device Maintenance

1. Silt Fences


a. Remove accumulated sediment once it builds up to fifty percent (50%) of the height of the fabric.

b. Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2-foot minimum overlap.

c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure that the fence is filtering all runoff directed to

the fence.

2. Filter Boxes

a. Replace crushed stone when it becomes saturated with silt.

3. Rock Ditch Check

a. Muck out trapped silt from dewatering operations when it has built up to within 6 inches of the top of the berm.

b. Replace crushed stone filter when saturated with silt.

4. Add crushed stone to driveway entrances, access ways, and staging areas as necessary to

maintain a firm surface free of ruts and mudholes. 3.4 TEMPORARY MULCHING

A. Apply temporary mulch and seed to areas where rough grading has been completed but final grading is not anticipated to begin within 14 days of the completion of rough grading.

B. Apply straw mulch at the rate of 100 lbs/1,000 square-feet and tackify with latex acrylic

copolymer at a rate and diluted in a ratio per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.5 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS

A. Install erosion control blankets in all seeded drainage swales and ditches as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Finish grade, fertilize and seed the area before the blanket is applied.

B. Unroll the blanket such that the netting is on top and the fibers in contact with the soil over the

entire area. Lap the blankets in the direction of water flow and staple. Place blankets in a minimum of three (3) rows wide (4 feet each for a total width of 12 feet) within the drainage swale/ditch and staple together in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Overlap blanket side edges a minimum of 4 inches.

C. To secure the blankets, install staples made of wire, 0.091-inch in diameter or greater, "U" shaped

with legs 10 inches in length, and with a 1 1/2-inch crown. Commercial biodegradable stakes may also be used with prior approval by the Engineer. Drive the staples vertically into the ground, spaced approximately 2 linear-feet apart, on each side of the blanket, and one (1) row in the center alternately spaced between each side.


D. Bury the upper and lower ends of the matting to a depth of 4 inches in a trench. Create erosion stops every 25 feet by making a fold in the fabric and carrying the fold into a slit trench across the full width of the blanket. The bottom of the fold shall be 4 inches below the ground surface. Staple on both sides of the fold.

E. Where the matting must be cut or more than one roll length is required in the swale, turn down

upper end of downstream roll into a slit trench to a depth of 4 inches. Overlap the lower end of the upstream roll 4 inches past the edge of the downstream roll and staple.

F. To ensure full contact with soil surface, roll matting with a roller weighing 100 lbs/ft. of width

perpendicular to flow direction after seeding, mat placement, and stapling. Thoroughly inspect channel after completion. Correct any areas where matting does not present a smooth surface in full contact with the soil below.

3.6 SPILL PREVENTION

A. In the event that spills occur that are the direct result of the Contractor’s actions or negligence, the clean-up and reporting of the spill shall be performed by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

1. Petroleum Products: Monitor all on-site vehicles for leaks and provide regular

preventative maintenance to vehicles and equipment to reduce the chance of petroleum leakage on the project site. Store petroleum products in tightly sealed containers that are clearly labeled. Apply all asphalt substances according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and/or these specifications.

2. Fertilizers: Apply fertilizers only in the manner and amounts required by the

specifications. Store materials in a covered area and do not expose to precipitation. Remove and dispose of partially used fertilizer bags properly.

3. Paints and Solvents: Store all paint and solvent in tightly sealed containers when not

required for use. Remove and dispose of excess material and waste according to the manufacturer’s instructions and/or State and Federal Regulations.

4. Concrete Trucks: Direct concrete trucks to discharge surplus concrete or drum wash water

on site only in concrete washout areas designated on the construction plans or SWP3. 5. Concrete Curing Agents: Apply concrete curing agents only in the manner and amount

required by the specifications. Do not allow excess material to run off the areas being treated.

6. Off-site Sediment Control: Minimize off-site sediment transportation by limiting vehicle

tracking and dust generation. The development and implementation of a dust control plan and off-site vehicle tracking plan will be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be in accordance with the specifications.


3.7 REMOVAL AND FINAL CLEANUP

A. Once the site has been fully stabilized against erosion, remove sediment control devices and all accumulated silt. Dispose of silt and waste materials in a proper manner. Regrade all areas disturbed during this process and stabilize against erosion with surfacing materials as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Provide written notice to the Owner that the site has been stabilized in accordance with the SWP3

and the General Permit prior to removing temporary sediment control devices.

3.8 MAINTENANCE, REMOVAL AND RESTORATION

A. Maintain all pollution control measures and works in a functional condition as long as needed during the construction operation. Remove all temporary measures and restore the site to as nearly original conditions as practicable.

3.9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement and payment for erosion and sedimentation control will be specified in the bid

documents. If no method of payment is specifically included in the bid proposal, all work associated with Erosion and Sedimentation Control will be considered incidental to the Work and will not be paid for separately.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION ASPHALT PAVING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 32 12 16 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 32 12 16 – ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to construct asphalt paving for streets, parking lots, driveways and other areas as designated on the Drawings. The Drawings identify the right-of-way limits available for construction.

B. The work includes installation of aggregate base course and hot mix asphalt binder and surface

courses. C. This project includes installation of utility piping, storm drains, and other improvements requiring

the demolition of paved asphalt surfaces. Sawcut trench edges through paved areas in straight lines to achieve a consistent repair width. The Drawings include details for slurry backfill and repair of trenches in paved areas.

D. Repairs to gravel surfaces and aggregate base courses shall conform to the requirements for Base

Course in this Section. Repair or replacement of concrete features such as curbing, sidewalks and ditch paving shall conform to the requirements the specifications.

E. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all City, County, State or Federal regulations

and requirements for the repair or replacement of pavements and the restoration of rights-of-way. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required regulatory permits for street cuts and repairs.


A. Section 02 50 00 – Site Preparation B. Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling

C. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control

D. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding

E. Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage



1. AASHTO M17 Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures

2. AASHTO M57 Standard Specification for Materials for Embankments and Subgrades


3. AASHTO M81 Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)

4. AASHTO M82 Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)

5. AASHTO M85 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

6. AASHTO M140 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt

7. AASHTO M145 Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes

8. AASHTO M146 Standard Specification for Terms Relating to Subgrade, Soil-Aggregate, and Fill Materials

9. AASHTO M208 Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt

10. AASHTO T2 Standard Method of Test for Sampling of Aggregates

11. AASHTO T27 Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course

Aggregates

12. AASHTO T30 Standard Method of Test for Mechanical Analysis of Extracted Aggregate

13. AASHTO T78 Standard Method of Test for Distillation of Cutback Asphalt

(Bituminous) Products

14. AASHTO T96 Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

15. AASHTO T99 Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5-kg (5.5-lb) Rammer and a 305-mm (12-in.) Drop

16. AASHTO T104 Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

17. AASHTO T164 Standard Method of Test for Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Binder

from Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)

18. AASHTO T166 Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity (Gmb) of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens

19. AASHTO T167 Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Hot-Mix Asphalt

20. AASHTO T168 Standard Method of Test for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures


21. AASHTO T180 Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop

22. AASHTO T209 Standard Method of Test for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity

(Gmm) and Density of Asphalt Mixtures

23. AASHTO T310 Standard Method of Test for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition:

1. ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

2. ASTM C88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium

Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

3. ASTM C131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

4. ASTM C136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates

5. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

6. ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))

7. ASTM D977 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt

8. ASTM D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))

9. ASTM D2041 Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Asphalt Mixtures

10. ASTM D2172 Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Binder

from Asphalt Mixtures

11. ASTM D2397 Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt

12. ASTM D5444 Standard Test Method for Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate

13. ASTM D6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil

and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

C. Arkansas Department of Transportation t (ArDOT):

1. Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, current edition.


D. City of Van Buren, Arkansas:

1. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition and including all

Supplemental Specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00, Submittals for submittal procedures. B. Furnish test data to indicate compliance with the following:

1. Source and classification of select backfill material.

2. In-place density of pavement subgrade.

3. Gradation and mechanical properties of base course material.

4. In-place density of base course and bituminous surface course.

5. In-place density of base course and asphalt surface repairs.


A. Responsibilities for providing the quality control and quality assurance testing activities are defined in the specifications. Testing frequencies are defined under the paragraph on Field Testing at the end of this Section.

B. Furnish manufacturer or supplier certification for all products and materials from off-site sources

for approval by the Engineer. Materials shall include but not be limited to select and base course materials. Provide initial material certifications at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.6 COORDINATION



work of other sections.




PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASE COURSE

A. Obtain base material from approved sources with approved crusher equipment. Handle the materials in such a manner that secures a uniform and satisfactory product.

B. Material shall consist of crusher run stone or a mixture of crushed stone (ninety percent (90%)

minimum crusher-run material) and soil mortar uniformly mixed and so proportioned as to meet all the requirements hereinafter specified. The stone shall be hard and durable with a percent of wear of not greater than 45, as determined by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test.

C. Unless otherwise noted, crushed stone base course material shall conform to Class 7 Aggregate

Base Course (SB-2) as described in Table 1 below.

Table 1 Gradation Requirements for

Class 7 Aggregate Base Course

Sieve Size Percent Passing 1-1/2-inch 100% 1-inch 60% - 100% 3/4-inch 50% - 90% No. 4 25% - 55% No. 40 10% - 30% No. 200 3% - 10%

D. The fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall not be greater than two-thirds (2/3) the fraction

passing the No. 40 sieve. The fraction passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a Liquid Limit (L.L.) not greater than 25 and Plasticity Index (P.I.) not greater than six (6).

E. The material shall not contain more than five percent (5%) by weight of shale, slate, or other

objectionable, injurious, or deleterious matter. The blading of materials on the roadway in order to obtain a mixture that will comply with the above requirements will not be permitted.

2.2 PRIME AND TACK ASPHALTS

A. General: For prime coats, use a medium curing cut-back asphalt, an anionic emulsified asphalt, a cationic emulsified asphalt, or an asphalt penetrating prime. For tack coats, use a rapid curing cut-back, a cationic emulsified asphalt, or an anionic emulsified asphalt. Materials shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Rapid Curing Cut-back Asphalt (RC-70, RC-250, RC-800 or RC-300) conforming to

AASHTO M81.


2. Medium Curing Cut-back Asphalt (MC-30, MC-70, MC-250, MC-800, or MC-3000) conforming to AASHTO M82.

3. Anionic Emulsified Asphalt (SS-1 or SS-1h) conforming to AASHTO M140 (ASTM D977).

4. Cationic Emulsified Asphalt (CSS-1 or CSS-1h) conforming to AASHTO M208 (ASTM D2397).

5. Asphalt Penetrating Prime conforming to the requirements of Table 2 below:

Table 2

Asphalt Penetrating Prime

Property Min. Max. Flash Point, Pensky Martens 100° F -- Viscosity, Saybolt Furol at 122° F, seconds 40 120 Distillation AASHTO T78: Over at 437° F vol. percent total solvent 15 45 Over at 500° F vol. percent total solvent 55 80 Over at 600° F vol. percent total solvent 85 -- Residue from distillation to 680° F, volume percent 50 -- Test of residue from distillation: Softening point (R&B) 115° F 165° F Penetration at 77° F, mm/10 10 90

2.3 BITUMINOUS BINDER AND SURFACE COURSES

A. The asphalt wearing surface shall consist of a mixture of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral

filler, and asphalt cement in the proportions by weight shown in Table 3 below. All materials used shall comply with ArDOT Standard Specification Section 409 and this subsection.

B. Unless otherwise noted, asphalt surface course shall be Type 3 Asphalt. Type 2 Asphalt shall be used only when specifically authorized by the Engineer. Asphalt Binder and Asphalt Surface courses (Type 2 and Type 3) shall conform to the requirements of Table 3.


Table 3

Gradation Requirements for Mineral Aggregate and Asphalt Cement Binder

Sieve Size

Percent Passing

Binder Type 2 Asphalt Type 3 Asphalt 1 1/4-inch 100% -- -- 1-inch 92% - 100% -- -- 3/4-inch 75% - 97% 100% -- 1/2-inch 55% - 86% 85% - 100% 100% No. 4 31% - 60% 47% - 80% 54% - 80% No. 8 19% - 48% 28% - 63% 32% - 64% No. 16 13% - 38% 19% - 50% 22% - 51% No. 30 9% - 32% 13% - 40% 14% - 43% No. 50 5% - 26% 8% - 29% 8% - 32% No. 100 3% - 19% 5% - 20% 5% - 21%

Other Requirements Fines to Asphalt Ratio* 0.6 – 1.4 0.6 - 1.4 0.6 - 1.4 Asphalt Binder Content 3.7% - 7.0% 4.5% - 7.5% 4.5% - 7.5% Number of Blows 50 50 50 Minimum Marshall Stability 1,500 lbs. 1,500 lbs. 1,500 lbs. Marshall Flow (0.01 inch) 7 - 16 7 - 16 7 - 16 % Air Voids 4.0% 4.0% 4.0% Min. % Voids in Mineral Aggregate 13% 14% 15% Min. Water Sensitivity Ratio 75% 75% 75% Percent Anti-strip As required for all types * Note: Fines to asphalt ratio is defined as the weight of the aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve, expressed as a percentage of the total mix weight, divided by the percent asphalt binder content.

C. At least fifty percent (50%) of the fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall comply with the

requirements for mineral filler, and in no case shall the mineral aggregate contain less than five percent (5%) mineral filler.

D. The aggregates, mineral filler, and asphalt binder shall be measured separately and accurately

mixed in the proper proportions according to the approved mix design. The aggregates shall be thoroughly coated and the mixture shall not show an excess or deficiency of asphalt binder, injury or damage due to burning or overheating, or an improper combination of aggregates.

E. The mineral aggregate in both Binder and Surface Course shall contain, if required by laboratory mix design, mineral filler complying with the physical requirements of AASHTO M 17. When required by the mix design, the asphalt binder shall contain a heat-stable anti-strip additive. It


shall be added at the rate determined by the laboratory mix design. The anti-strip additive shall be added by an in-line blending process just before introduction of the asphalt binder to the mixer.

F. The Engineer will have the option to inspect and test materials at the source or upon delivery to

the site. The Engineer shall have full access for plant inspection during preparation, manufacture, or delivery of materials. The Contractor shall furnish certifications of material manufacture, analysis or other information when specified or requested by the Engineer.

G. The general composition limits set forth in Table 3 are master ranges of tolerance to govern mixtures made from any raw material meeting specification requirements, and are maximum and minimum for all cases. The Engineer will specify or approve a job mixture for each project coming within the above limits, which in the Engineer’s judgment will be suitable for the project. Maximum permissible variations from the mixture shall be as indicated in Table 4 below:

Table 4

Maximum Permissible Variations in Mineral Aggregate and Asphalt Cement

Material Properties Percent Variation

Total retained on 1-inch sieve 7% (+/-) Total retained on 3/4-inch sieve 7% (+/-) Total retained on 1/2-inch sieve 7% (+/-) Total retained on No. 4 sieve 7% (+/-) Total retained on No. 10 sieve 5% (+/-) Total passing No. 40 sieve 4% (+/-) Total passing No. 80 sieve 4% (+/-) Total passing No. 200 sieve 2% (+/-) Asphalt Binder 0.4% (+/-) Mixture temperature on delivery 15° F (+/-)

H. Unless otherwise noted on the bid form, recycled or reclaimed asphalt product (R.A.P.) may not

be used in bituminous binder or surface course material. Coarse aggregates shall contain no limestone.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LINE AND GRADE

A. The Engineer shall provide survey control points, as indicated on the Drawings, for use by the Contractor. The Contractor shall set construction line and grade stakes, including but not limited to street and drainage baselines and other alignments, profile grades and elevations, and temporary benchmarks. Exercise care to preserve the survey control points. In the event of willful or careless destruction of these points, the Contractor shall re-establish all survey control points at no additional cost to the Owner.


3.2 AREA FILL

A. Place excess material obtained through the excavation of the required street grading in the on-site area shown on the grading plan, in a disposal area off-site, or as directed by the Engineer. Clear and grub the area prior to applying fill. Install the fill in lifts not to exceed 8 inches and compact in accordance with the following density requirements. Compact the top 12 inches of existing subgrade or select fill beneath the pavement section to a minimum density of one hundred (100%) standard proctor in accordance with AASHTO T99 (ASTM D698). Compact all other soils to a minimum density of ninety five percent (95%) standard proctor.

3.3 PAVEMENT SUBGRADE

A. Prepare and shape the subgrade to the line and grade necessary to obtain the finished elevations as shown on the Drawings. Compact the top 12 inches of existing subgrade to a density of not less than one hundred (100%) of standard proctor in accordance with AASHTO T99 (ASTM D698), within two percent (2%) (+/-) of optimum moisture. Proof roll and inspect the subgrade prior to placing the base course.

3.4 UNDERCUT, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL (SELECT MATERIAL)

A. When encountering soft areas or areas in which the proper compaction cannot be obtained, undercut those areas and remove the unsuitable material to the depth necessary to obtain the proper density. Place select backfill material in the undercut area in lifts not to exceed 8 inches and compact each lift to the specified density listed above and at or near the optimum moisture content.

3.5 BASE COURSE

A. Deliver the material to the job site and deposit it in uniform loads along the proposed street. Deposit and compact base course materials in layers not to exceed 3 inches.

B. After the base course has been deposited by truck, blade the materials and spread uniformly over

the entire surface of the street. Continue this method until the base thickness is obtained. Water the material when necessary during the spreading procedure to obtain the appropriate moisture content. Compact base course to a density of not less than ninety five percent (95%) of modified proctor in accordance with AASHTO T180 (ASTM D1557).

C. Proof roll the finished base course with a loaded dump truck and inspect for rutting or soft areas.

Remove and replace unsatisfactory areas of the base course and proof roll again prior to the installation of the asphalt surface.

3.6 PRIME AND TACK COAT

A. Surfaces to receive prime or tack coat shall be dry and shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Apply primer and tack coats in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Apply primer to

contact surfaces of curb and gutters. Apply prime coats on prepared base or subbase courses and tack coats on asphalt or concrete surfaces at the following rates:

1. Prime Coat: 0.20 to 0.30 gallons-per-square-yard


2. Tack Coat: 0.05 to 0.10 gallons-per-square-yard

3.7 BITUMINOUS SURFACE COURSES A. The methods employed in installing bituminous (asphalt) surface courses and all equipment, tools,

and plant machinery used in executing any part of the Work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. When they are found unsatisfactory, change and improve equipment and procedures as required by the Engineer and these Specifications. Maintain all equipment, tools, and plant machinery in a satisfactory working condition.

B. Prior to arrival of the asphalt mixture at the jobsite, clean the prepared surface of all loose and

foreign materials, and prime or tack the surface as specified. Do not place asphalt on a surface that shows evidence of moisture. Paint surfaces of curbing, gutters, manholes, and other structures that will be exposed to the asphalt with a thin coating of rapid curing cut-back asphalt or emulsified asphalt.

C. If a previously laid asphalt course becomes coated with dirt or foreign material so as to prevent

proper adhesion of the later course, clean the earlier course and apply a tack coat, if necessary, prior to placing the succeeding course.

D. At the time of delivery to the job site, the temperature of asphalt mixture shall not be lower than

250 degrees Fahrenheit (250° F). E. Do not place asphalt when the atmospheric temperature is below 40° F or during unsuitable

weather. F. Upon arrival at the job site, dump the asphalt mixture immediately into a mechanical spreading

and finishing (lay down) machine, and spread and strike off in a uniform layer of sufficient thickness. Hand spreading will be permitted only on small turnouts and other small areas inaccessible to the spreader. Spread and finish asphalt on normal two-lane roads in one-half (1/2) widths. Unless two (2) machines are employed, the spreader shall alternate between the two (2) half-widths with such frequency that the second half width shall be laid the next day after the first half is laid.

G. When more than one (1) asphalt course is called for on the Drawings, the succeeding course shall

follow not later than 72 hours unless the preceding course is given a tack coat. If for any reason proper bond is not obtained between the two (2) courses, a tack coat shall be used even though the lapsed time has been less than 72 hours.

H. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the side and proceed toward the center of the roadway,

overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) of the width of the rear roller wheel. Roll the mixture continuously until all roller marks are eliminated and no further compaction is possible. At all times, the motion of the roller shall be slow enough and smooth enough to avoid displacement or cracking of the mixture. Correct displacement resulting from reversing the direction of the roller, or from any other cause, by the use of rakes and fresh material. To prevent adhesion of asphalt to the roller, keep the wheels properly moistened with water and/or oil. Excess


of such moisture will not be permitted. Compact finished asphalt surface courses to a density of not less than ninety two percent (92%) of theoretical density.

I. Asphalt rollers shall be of a type approved by the Engineer. As a guide, three (3) axle tandems

and three (3) wheeled rollers shall be of such weight that the compression load on the drive wheels is not less than 325 pounds-per-inch of tire width. Tandem rollers shall weigh not less than eight (8) tons.

J. When the mixture is laid in a half width and a satisfactory joint is not secured, or if breakdowns

cause a delay in placing the second half, cut back the existing joint and paint it with a thin coat of hot asphalt cement or asphalt thinned with naphtha. See the following requirements for preparing transverse joints at the end of the day's work.

K. The roller shall pass over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture only when the laying of

the course is discontinued for such length of time as to permit the mixture to become chilled. In all cases, make provisions for proper bond with the new mixture by cutting or trimming back the joint to expose an unsealed or granular surface for the full specified depth of the course.

L. At the end of each day's work, form joints by laying and rolling against boards of the thickness of

the compacted mixture, placed across the entire width of the base course, or by other methods as may be approved by the Engineer. When the laying of the course is resumed, paint the exposed edge of the joint with a thin coat of hot asphalt cement or asphalt cement thinned with naphtha. Rake the fresh mixture against the joint, thoroughly tamp with hot tampers, and roll the finished surface. If approved by the Engineer, hot smoothing irons may be used for sealing joints, but in such cases, exercise extreme care to avoid burning the surface.

M. Before the completion of the rolling, test the surface for thickness and contour and correct as

necessary while still hot by adding or removing material. Restore and re-roll until the finished surface complies with the test requirements.

N. The finished surface, when checked with a ten (10) foot straight edge placed parallel to the

centerline, shall show no variation more than 1/4-inch for base or intermediate courses, and not more than 1/8-inch for surface courses.

O. Remove and replace defective portions of the completed base or surface course with suitable

materials at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.8 PAVEMENT PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. General: The finish surface of the patch shall be uniform and shall match the surrounding

pavement slope and grade. The density and surface smoothness of the patch shall meet the requirements specified below.

B. Surface Patch: Surface patch shall consist of removing and replacing the existing asphalt surface

course. The existing asphalt surface course shall be removed in square or rectangular sections and shall be removed to the full depth of the surface course.

1. Pavement cuts shall be straight and vertical and shall be cut with a saw or air spade.


2. The area to be patched shall be cleaned; re-compacted to one hundred (100%) as specified in Section 31 23 00, Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling; and a tack coat applied.

3. Asphalt concrete surface course (Type 3) shall be placed in the patch area and shall be

compacted by rolling. C. Deep Patch: Deep patch shall consist of removing and replacing the entire pavement section,

including surface course(s) and base course, to a minimum depth of 6 inches below the proposed finished pavement grade, and shall include compaction of the subgrade.

1. The existing pavement within the limits of the patch shall be removed in square or rectangular

sections. Pavement cuts shall be straight and vertical and shall be cut with a saw or air spade. Forms shall be used for the placement of deep patch materials where directed by the Engineer. The patch area shall be cleaned and all existing materials removed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

2. The exposed subgrade shall be compacted by rolling or by other approved equipment and

shall be compacted to one hundred percent (100%) of Standard Proctor (Method D) as specified in Section 31 23 00, Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling. Where unstable subgrade is encountered, the Contractor shall undercut the subgrade and backfill with crushed stone or select material as authorized and directed by the Engineer and as specified in Section 31 23 00.

3. Replacement of the base shall include furnishing and installing Portland Cement Concrete

Base (High Early Strength) to a minimum depth of 6 inches. A tack coat shall be applied to the surface of the concrete at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gallons per square-yard, prior to placement of the asphalt surface.

4. The surface of the deep patch shall be given a “Tined” finish. The deep patch shall be floated, and then a metal tine finishing device shall be used to cut continuous grooves across the surface of the deep patch. The grooves produced shall be transverse to the centerline of the pavement and shall be from 1/8-inch to 3/16-inch in depth and width. The grooves shall be spaced on 1/2-inch to 3/4-inch centers.

5. The Engineer shall decide when the base course shall be opened to traffic and/or when

placement of pavement surfacing can proceed. The base course shall not be subjected to any traffic until it has reached seventy five percent (75%) of the design strength. If High Early Strength Concrete is used, the base course may be opened to traffic in 24 hours, or earlier if previous test data indicates adequate strengths. Traffic may be placed on the deep patch areas prior to placement of the overlay if temporary ramps, constructed of asphalt concrete cold plant mix, are installed to provide smooth transitions between patch areas and existing pavement surface.


3.9 FIELD TESTING

A. Prior to and during the placement of earthen fill and base course material, coordinate with the soils testing laboratory to perform in-place soil density tests to verify existing subgrade soil meets the requirements herein. Unless otherwise noted, conduct testing in accordance with the following minimum frequencies. For small quantities of pavement patching and repair, conduct a minimum of one of each test per day as directed by the Engineer.

1. Determine a moisture-density relationship for each type of subgrade and aggregate base

course material encountered or provided, and conduct testing in accordance with AASHTO T99 or T180 (ASTM D698 or D1557).

2. Test all aggregates for base course for gradation, wear, and soundness in accordance with AASHTO T27 (ASTM C136), T96 (ASTM C131), and T104 (ASTM C88), respectively. Conduct a minimum of one (1) test each to determine the characteristics of each type of aggregate proposed for the project.

3. Test all aggregates for bituminous mixtures for gradation, wear, and soundness in accordance

with AASHTO T30 (ASTM D5444), T96 (ASTM C131), and T104 (ASTM C88), respectively. Conduct a minimum of one (1) test each to determine the characteristics of each type of aggregate proposed for the project

4. Conduct field density and moisture testing of pavement subgrade in accordance with AASHTO T310 (ASTM D6938). Conduct in-place density and moisture testing at a frequency of one (1) test per 5,000 square-feet of subgrade.

5. Conduct field density and moisture testing of select fill under pavements in accordance with

AASHTO T310 (ASTM D6938). Conduct in-place density and moisture testing at a frequency of one (1) test per 750 square-yards of area in each lift of fill. Conduct a minimum of two (2) tests per lift of fill or backfill.

6. Conduct field density and moisture testing of aggregate base course in accordance with AASHTO T310 (ASTM D6938). Conduct in-place density and moisture testing at a frequency of one (1) test per 5,000 square-feet of base course.

7. Test bituminous mixtures for maximum specific gravity (maximum theoretical density), extraction and gradation in accordance with AASHTO T209 (ASTM D2041), T164 (ASTM 2172) and T30 (ASTM D5444), respectively. Conduct bitumen extraction and sieve analysis of extracted aggregate at a frequency of one (1) test each per 300 tons of asphalt surface course.

8. Collect asphalt samples for the determination of density from the finished pavement by coring and test for bulk specific gravity in accordance with AASHTO T166 (ASTM D2726). The testing laboratory taking such samples shall repair the cuts in a manner agreeable to the Owner and the Engineer. Conduct in-place density testing at a frequency of one (1) test each per 400 linear-feet of pavement and at least one (1) each per street.

9. Conduct sampling and testing of area fill in accordance with Section 31 23 00, Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.


3.10 PAVEMENT SMOOTHNESS

A. Asphalt paving courses shall be placed and finished to the grades and slopes shown on the

Drawings. Pavement repairs and patching shall be true to the existing pavement grade and cross section.

1. Surface Courses: When checked with a 10-foot straight edge placed parallel to the centerline,

the finished surface shall show no variation more than 1/8-inch for surface courses. When surface tests indicate that surface tolerances do not meet these requirements, changes to the paving operations shall be made before beginning the next day’s operations. All transverse joints shall have straight edges immediately following rolling of the joint.

2. Areas not meeting the above surface test requirements shall be corrected in such a manner as

to maintain a quality pavement having the same uniform texture and appearance as the adjoining surface. Skin patching the final surface course will not be permitted. All work and material necessary to correct surface tolerance deficiencies for surface courses shall be at no cost to the Owner.

B. Identification and Correction of Deficiencies:

1. Regardless of testing results, the Contractor shall correct any deficiencies identified in the

finished pavement surface at no cost to the Owner. Deficiencies in the finished pavement surface include, but are not limited to, cracking, bleeding, brown appearance, poor surface texture, rough uneven surface, honeycomb or raveling, uneven joints, roller marks, pushing or waves, rocks broken by roller, tearing of surface during laying, and surface slipping on the base course. If a deficiency is detected during paving operations, paving shall cease until the problem has been corrected.

2. The Engineer shall review and approve the method utilized to correct said deficiency, which

may include re-laying the asphalt, dependent upon the severity of the deficiency. The Engineer will also determine the extent of removal and replacement of pavement. The Engineer may order additional density tests to delineate failure areas. The cost of these additional tests shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

C. Fill and compact holes produced by core sampling with asphalt concrete hot mix.

3.11 SITE RESTORATION A. Prior to commencement of work, strip and stockpile the topsoil from all areas to be disturbed by

street or drainage construction. Spread, disk, and lightly roll topsoil over all graded areas after the installation of structures.

B. Apply seed, fertilizer and mulch in accordance with Section 32 92 91, Seeding.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION SEEDING VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 32 92 19 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 32 92 19 – SEEDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals; place topsoil; provide finish grading; and apply lime, fertilizer, seed, mulch and water on all areas that have been disturbed by construction work.



1.3 COORDINATION





1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit material and equipment furnished under this Section including seed mixtures and product label information in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Seed certificates shall include guaranteed percentages of purity, weed content, and germination, and shall indicate the net weight and date of shipment. No seed shall be sown until the certificates have been submitted.

B. Submit samples of all materials for inspection and acceptance upon request by the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, loamy surface soil without admixture and free of stones, stumps, roots, sticks, debris, and clay balls greater than 1 inch in diameter. Topsoil shall be stripped from naturally well drained sites, and be free of noxious weeds and other materials deleterious to plant growth. It shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7.5 and have a minimum organic content of six percent (6%).

B. Lime shall be agricultural grade ground limestone or approved equivalent, containing not less than

eighty five percent (85%) calcium and magnesium carbonates.


C. Fertilizer shall be a commercial grade, 10-20-10, uniform in composition, suitable for application

with mechanical equipment, and conforming to State fertilizer laws. Deliver fertilizer to the site in original, unopened containers, bearing the name, trademark and manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis. Store fertilizer so that it remains dry and free flowing.

D. The seed shall be labeled in accordance with current rules and regulations of the Arkansas State

Plant Board, shall have a minimum of ninety eight percent (98%) pure seed and eighty-five percent (85%) germination by weight, and shall contain no more than one percent (1%) weed seeds. A combined total of 50 noxious weed seeds shall be the maximum amount allowed per pound of seed with the following exceptions: Johnson grass seed, wild onion seed, wild garlic seed, field bindweed seed or nut grass seed will not be allowed in any amount whatsoever. Deliver seed in original, unopened containers, bearing the name, trademark and warranty of the producer. Seed that has become wet, moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not be acceptable.

E. Mulch cover shall consist of straw from threshed rice, oats, wheat, barley or rye; of wood

excelsior; or from hay obtained from various legumes or grasses, such as lespedeza, clover, vetch, soybeans, Bermuda, carpet sedge, Bahia, fescue, or a combination thereof. Mulch shall be dry and reasonably free from Johnson grass or other noxious weeds and shall not be excessively brittle or in an advanced state of decomposition. All material will be inspected and approved prior to use.

F. Hydraulically applied mulch shall be a specially processed cellulose fiber containing no growth

or germination-inhibiting factors. It shall be manufactured in such a manner that after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with water, the fibers in the material become uniformly suspended in a homogenous slurry. When sprayed on the ground, the material shall allow adsorption and percolation of moisture. Each package of cellulose fiber shall be marked by the manufacturer to show the air dry weight content.

G. Water shall be of irrigation quality and free of impurities that would be detrimental to plant

growth. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Seeding shall consist of furnishing and applying seed, mulch, water, and fertilizer on all areas that have been disturbed by the construction work. These areas shall include lawns, pastures, ditches, ditch banks, embankment areas, compacted fill areas, cut or fill slopes and any area disturbed by construction.

B. Perform seeding, mulching and conditioning only during those periods within the season that are

normal for such work as determined by the weather and locally accepted practice, as approved by the Engineer. Hydroseed only on calm days.

C. Submit schedules for seeding and fertilizing to the Engineer for approval prior to the work.


3.2 APPLICATION

A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, place topsoil to a minimum depth of 4 inches.

B. For all areas to be seeded:

1. Obtain soil samples, to a depth of 5 inches, from each major soil area, and have a lime requirement analysis conducted. Apply lime at the rate determined by the requirement test.

2. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 800 lbs per acre.

3. Apply grass seed, composed of the following varieties (premixed), at the following rates:

Dates Variety Lbs/Acre

a. Spring, Summer & Fall Bermuda-Common-Hulled 10 lbs/acre

b. Fall Bermuda-Common-Unhulled 10 lbs/acre

c. Spring, Summer & Fall Red Fescue 20 lbs/acre

d. Spring & Fall Annual Rye 30 lbs/acre

4. Apply mulch cover at a rate of 4,000 lbs per acre.

C. The application of fertilizer and lime may be performed hydraulically in one operation with

hydroseeding and mulching. If lime is applied in this manner, clean all structures and paved areas of unwanted deposits.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Seed Bed Preparation

1. Remove and dispose of off-site all excess dirt, construction materials, trees, rubbish, debris, roots and stumps. Rake to loosen the subgrade immediately prior to the application of topsoil and remove all rubbish, sticks, roots and stones larger than 2 inches. Subgrade shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before topsoil is placed.

2. Place topsoil over approved areas to a depth sufficiently greater than required so that after

natural settlement and light rolling, the complete work will conform to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Do not spread topsoil in water or while frozen or muddy.

3. Uniformly spread lime and then thoroughly pulverize the seedbed by means of disk harrows,

hand raking, or other approved methods, thoroughly mixing lime and soil to a depth of 4 inches. Remove rocks, large clods, lumps, brush, roots, litter, and other objectionable foreign matter turned up during mixing, and apply water in order to maintain the desired moisture content in the soil. Follow disk harrowing with a spiked-tooth harrow to provide a finer surface texture.


B. Fertilizing

1. Apply fertilizer uniformly and incorporate it into the soil to a depth of at least 2 inches. Fertilizer may be worked into the soil alone or in conjunction with the required lime. The fertilizer may be broadcasted, drilled into the soil or combined with the seed in the hydroseeding operation.

2. Roll the prepared surface with a hand roller weighing not more than 100 lbs/ft. of roller width.

Refill with additional topsoil and regrade all depressions caused by settlement during rolling.

C. Seeding

1. Place seed either by broadcasting, drilling or by hydroseeding, and within ten (10) days following soil preparation. When the seed is drilled, it shall be in rows parallel to the toe of the slope. Drills shall not be more than 6 inches apart. Fertilizer and seed shall not be drilled together.

2. If a hydroseeder is used, fertilizer and seed may be incorporated into one operation, but a

maximum of 800 lbs of fertilizer shall be permitted per each 1,500 gallons of water. The area shall be lightly compacted with a cultipacker immediately prior to hydroseeding. Prior to the start of work, furnish the Engineer for approval a certified statement as to the number of pounds of materials to be used per 100 gallons of water. This statement shall also specify the number of square feet of seeding that can be covered with the quantity of solution in the hydroseeder.

D. Mulching

1. Immediately after seeding, spread mulch uniformly over the entire area by approved power

mulching equipment. Mulch shall be anchored or otherwise stabilized to hold the mulch in place until the seedbed has germinated. Asphalt may not be used as an anchoring agent. Mulch that is windblown or otherwise disturbed shall be replaced and the excess shall be promptly removed from the site.

E. Water

1. After application of the mulch cover, apply water in sufficient quantity to thoroughly moisten

the soil to a depth of pulverization and as necessary to germinate the seed and maintain growth at the direction of the Engineer until the completion and acceptance of the project by the Owner. The time required for application of water will not be included in the computations of contract time for completion of the project provided all other work under the contract has been completed.

2. Water used in the seeding operation will not be furnished by the Owner. Make provision to

obtain water for this operation at no additional cost to the Owner.


3.4 SEEDING IN WOODED AND UNGRADED AREAS

A. For preparation and seeding in wooded areas under this Contract and where no grading is required, all of the specified materials and procedures shall be utilized except that no disking shall be performed within the drip line of trees to be preserved. The seed bed shall be prepared by the addition of a thin layer of top soil roughly 1-inch deep.

3.5 CLEANUP

A. Prior to final acceptance and payment, the Contractor shall remove all machinery, equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, etc., from the project. Pavement, driveways, sidewalks, and storm drainage facilities shall be cleaned and all soils or other debris removed.

3.6 MAINTENANCE AND PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Keep all seeded areas watered and in good condition, reseeding if and when necessary until a good, healthy, uniform growth is established over the entire area. Maintain these areas in an approved condition including a minimum of two (2) mowings of the all seeded and restored areas until provisional acceptance.

B. Provide against washouts on slopes by an approved method. Any washout that occurs shall be

regraded and reseeded at the Contractor's expense until a good sod is established.

C. The Engineer will inspect all work for provisional acceptance at the end of the eight (8) week grass maintenance period, upon the written request, received at least ten (10) days before the anticipated date of inspection.

D. A satisfactory stand of grass will be defined as a section of grass of 10,000 square-feet or larger

that has:

1. No bare spots larger than 3 square-feet. 2. No more than ten percent (10%) of total area with bare spots larger than 1 square-foot.

E. Furnish full and complete written instructions for maintenance of the seeded and restored areas to

the Owner at the time of provisional acceptance.

F. The inspection by the Engineer will determine whether maintenance shall continue in any area or manner.

G. After all necessary corrective work and cleanup has been completed and maintenance instructions

have been received by the Owner, the Engineer will certify in writing the provisional acceptance of the seeded and restored areas. Maintenance of seeded and restored areas shall cease on receipt of provisional acceptance, except that the Contractor shall groom and mow all restored areas immediately prior to Final Acceptance by the Owner.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION TESTING OF PIPELINES VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 33 05 05 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 33 05 05 – TESTING OF PIPELINES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to perform exfiltration testing and deflection testing of gravity pipelines and to perform pressure and leakage testing of pressure pipelines.


A. Section 33 14 00 – Water Distribution


A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition:

1. ASTM F1417 Standard Practice for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Non-pressure Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA), latest edition:

1. AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

2. AWWA C605 Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Molecularly

Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) Pressure Pipe and Fittings PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Where potable water is required in large quantity for pipeline testing, it will be provided by the Owner. For temporary installations, the Owner will install a flow meter at a fire hydrant on site for the Contractor’s use. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying a meter deposit, and constructing and maintaining a heated enclosure for the meter. In the event that the Owner installs a water main tap and permanent meter connection, the Contractor shall be responsible for constructing all temporary and permanent water main extensions, and all work shall be approved by the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and equipment, including test pump with regulated bypass meters and gauges, required for conducting pipeline tests. Furnish temporary piping and valves as required to transport water used in testing from source to test location.



A. Field-test the entire length of installed gravity and pressure lines for water tightness.

B. Conduct hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests on all pressure pipelines carrying water or wastewater (sanitary sewage).

C. Schedule time and sequence of testing, subject to observation and approval by the Owner and the

Engineer. Provide adequate labor, tools and equipment for the test.

D. Coordinate all valve operation with the Owner. Water valves on the Utility’s existing distribution system may only be operated by Utility personnel.

E. Locate and repair any leaks discovered during the initial filling of the pipeline or during the course

of the tests at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 CLEANING

A. At the conclusion of the work, thoroughly clean all pipelines by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, or other material that may have entered the pipes during the construction period. Remove debris cleaned from the lines from the low end of the pipeline. Remove all temporary pipeline plugs or other obstructions after cleaning and/or testing. After the pipelines are cleaned and if the groundwater level is above the pipe or following a heavy rain, the Engineer will examine the pipes for leaks. Repair any defective pipes or joints.

3.3 TEST PROCEDURES FOR GRAVITY PIPELINES

A. Gravity Pipelines, General: After laying pipe and consolidating backfill, test pipe using Low-Pressure Air Testing and the Allowable Deflection Test.

B. Low-Pressure Air Testing of Gravity Sewers

1. Perform low-pressure air testing in accordance with ASTM F1417. For safety reasons, limit air testing to pipe sections 24-inch diameter and smaller (average inside diameter). Sewers larger than 24-inch diameter may be air tested at each joint with the Engineer’s approval.

2. For sections of pipe 24-inch diameter and smaller, compute the minimum time allowed for the pressure to drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig by the following equation:

T =0.085 ∗ D ∗ K

Q


Where: T = time for pressure to drop 1.0 psi gauge, in seconds K = 0.000419 * D * L, but not less than 1.0 D = average inside diameter, in inches L = length of line of same pipe size being tested, in feet Q = rate of loss, assume 0.0015 ft3/minute/square feet internal surface

3. Repair all observed leaks regardless of the air test results.

C. Allowable Deflection Test

1. Conduct pipe deflection testing on all gravity pipes constructed of flexible materials.

2. Pipe deflection measured not less than 90 days after the backfill has been completed as

specified shall not exceed five percent (5%). Compute pipeline deflection by multiplying the amount of deflection (nominal diameter less minimum diameter when measured) by 100 and dividing by the nominal diameter of the pipe.

3. Measure deflection with a rigid mandrel (Go/No-Go) device, cylindrical in shape and

constructed with a minimum of nine or ten (9 or 10) evenly shaped arms or prongs. Submit drawings of the mandrel with complete dimensions to the Engineer for each diameter of pipe to be tested. Manually pull the mandrel through all sewer lines.

4. Uncover any section of sewer not passing the mandrel, and replace bedding and backfill to prevent excessive deflection, at no additional cost to the Owner. Retest all repaired pipe.

5. Provide a mandrel approved by the manufacturer of epoxy lined sewer pipes, particularly

those lined with Protecto 401 liner. In general, sizing mandrels for epoxy-lined pipes shall be plastic balls with grooves to allow the passage of debris, or metallic mandrels with polyethylene or other plastic skid plates at pipe contact points.

D. Exfiltration Water Testing of Gravity Sewers: Gravity pipelines may be tested using the following

alternative Exfiltration Water Testing method only with the prior, written approval of the Engineer:

1. Fill the section of pipe with water and allow it to stand for a sufficient time to adsorb such

water as it will and for the escape of all entrapped air from the line. Carefully examine the sections undergoing testing for leakage. Repair all known leaks, regardless of these test requirements or results.


2. Fill the pipeline to a reference level in a manhole or reservoir of sufficient capacity to allow a reference level to be established. The reservoir must be of sufficient capacity to prevent the water level from dropping below the crown of the pipe during the 24-hour test period. If the water level drops below the crown of the pipe, the test shall be voided and conducted again until such time that the water level is maintained above the crown throughout the duration of the test.

3. At the end of a 24-hour period, add water as necessary to the pipeline to bring the water level

back to the referenced line. Accurately measure all added water with an approved water meter to establish an exfiltration rate.

4. Leakage during the above test shall not exceed a rate equal to 50 gallons per inch of internal

diameter per mile per 24 hours. 5. Repair all observed leaks regardless of the measured leakage rate.

6. Exfiltration testing results are not acceptable under circumstances wherein the soils are

saturated or the groundwater elevation is above the pipe being tested. Groundwater monitoring test procedures shall be used to confirm the groundwater level for exfiltration testing.

3.4 TEST PROCEDURES FOR PRESSURE PIPELINES

A. GENERAL

1. After laying pipe and consolidating backfill, subject all newly laid pipe or any isolated section thereof, to hydrostatic pressure testing. Conduct the pressure testing for the duration as described below, unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. Disconnect all meters, fixtures, devices or appliances which are connected to the pipeline system and which might be damaged if subjected to the specified test pressure. Plug or cap the ends of branch lines during the testing procedures.

2. Fill each isolated (capped or plugged) section of pipe slowly with water and expel all

entrapped air. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, install corporation or blow-off cocks at such points to expel air as filling takes place. After expelling all air, close the cocks and keep the pipe filled until tested. Examine all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints while under test pressure, and repair all visible leaks. Remove and replace any cracked or defective pipe, fittings, valves or hydrants discovered during testing. Replace the damaged pipe or appurtenances and repeat the testing to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

B. Do not conduct hydrostatic pressure testing until at least five (5) days have elapsed after

installation of concrete thrust blocking. Do not conduct testing until at least two (2) days have elapse for concrete blocking containing high-early-strength cement.

C. Hydrostatic Leakage Tests

1. Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid

pipe, or any isolated section thereof, to maintain the specified leakage test pressure after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and the pipe has been filled with water.


2. Determine leakage by recording the quantity of water pumped into the pipeline through a

standard water meter of a size appropriate to secure an accuracy of ±2% at the average flow rate pumped. The Engineer must approve other methods of measuring the quantity of water pumped prior to commencing the hydrostatic test.

3. Test pressure shall not be less than 1.25 times the stated working pressure of the pipeline

measured at the highest elevation along the test section and not less than 1.5 times the stated working pressure at the lowest elevation of the test section. In all cases, the test pressure shall never less than the minimum test pressures listed in Table 1 below. Maintain the test pressure for a period of two (2) hours. The test pressure shall not vary by more than 5 psi (+/-) for the duration of the test.

Table 1

Minimum Pressure Test Requirements

Piping Description Test Pressure Pumped Process Piping 50 psi Plant Water Piping 100 psi Potable Water Piping 150 psi

4. Conduct hydrostatic testing of ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C600, and

testing of PVC piping in accordance with AWWA C605. Testing allowance shall be defined as the maximum quantity of water that is added into the pipeline in order to return it to the original test pressure. Allowance quantity for ductile iron and PVC piping shall not exceed that calculated by the following formula:

L =S ∗ D ∗ √P148,000

Where: L = the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour

S = the length of pipeline tested, in feet D = the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches P = the average test pressure during the leakage tests, in psi gauge

5. In the event any section of the tested line fails to meet the specified requirements for water

tightness, repair the cause of the excessive leakage and retest the section of line at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. The Owner will not accept pipe installation as completed until the Contractor has repaired all known leaks, whether or not leakage is within allowable limits. Locate and repair all leaks at no additional cost to the Owner.


B. The Engineer will certify successful completion of all required pressure and leakage tests before the pipeline is accepted by the Owner.

3.6 WATER SOURCE

A. Unless otherwise noted in the plans, notify the Owner 24 hours prior to obtaining water for testing purposes.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION DUCTILE IRON AND FITTINGS VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 33 05 19 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 33 05 19 – DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals; and install, disinfect potable water lines, and test buried ductile iron pipe and fittings as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Piping shall be located substantially as shown on the Drawings. The Engineer reserves the right

to make modifications in piping locations and alignments to avoid interference between pipes or for other reasons. Pipe fitting notation is for the Contractor’s convenience and does not relieve the Contractor from installing and jointing different or additional items where required to achieve a complete piping system.

C. Pipe or piping refers to all pipe, fittings, materials, and appurtenances required to construct ductile

iron pipelines unless otherwise noted. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete


C. Section 33 05 05 – Testing of Pipelines

D. Section 33 14 00 – Water Distribution

E. Section 33 14 19 – Valves, Hydrants and Appurtenances 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition:

1. ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature of High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

2. ASTM A194 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel

Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service or Both

3. ASTM A674 Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids

4. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement


1. AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings


2. AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe System 3. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

4. AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 5. AWWA C116 Protective Fusion-Bonded Coatings for the Interior and Exterior

Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 6. AWWA C150 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe 7. AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast 8. AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings 9. AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances 10. AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains

C. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF):

1. NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings and accessories. Provide design calculations confirming that piping materials meet the required installation and operational conditions. All calculations shall be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project will be constructed.

C. Laying Schedule: Submit a tabulated laying schedule referencing stations and piping elevations

as well as all fittings, bends, outlets, restrained joints, tees, special deflection bells, adapters, solid sleeves, and specials. Include the manufacturer's detailed drawings and specifications. Show pipe class, station limits, and transition stations for various pipe classes. Submit the laying schedule to the Engineer for approval before manufacture and shipment.

D. Submit anticipated production and delivery schedule.

E. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that pipe, fittings, gaskets, linings and exterior coatings meet

or exceed the specified requirements of these specifications and the referenced ASTM and AWWA standards.


A. Furnish all pipe and fittings from manufacturers experienced in the manufacture of the items. It is not necessary that a single manufacturer furnish all the pipe and fittings, provided that the pipe and fittings are compatible. Design, construct and install all piping systems and appurtenances in accordance with the best practices and methods, and suitable for the intended service.


B. Inspect and test all ductile-iron pipe and fittings supplied for this project at the foundry as required

by the standard specifications to which the material is manufactured.

C. Hydrostatically test ductile iron pipe per AWWA C151.

D. The Owner may elect to hire an independent testing laboratory, at the Owner’s expense, to inspect all pipe and fittings at the foundry for compliance with these Specifications.

E. Permanently mark all pipe and fittings with the following information:

1. Manufacturer and date 2. Size, type, class, or wall thickness 3. Standard produced to (AWWA, ASTM, etc)

F. The Engineer or representative of the Owner may inspect the pipe and fittings after delivery. The

pipe will be subject to rejection at any time because of failure to meet any of the Specification requirements, even though sample pipes may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. The Engineer will mark pipe rejected after delivery for identification, and the Contractor shall remove the pipe from the project.

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The piping materials specified herein are intended to be of standard types for use in transporting water or sewage, either pressurized or non-pressurized; and for use as drain pipe for buildings or other structures as noted on the Drawings.

B. Note any supplementary information listed in pipe schedules on Drawings or in this Section, especially concerning pressures, minimum thickness, etc. In case of a conflict, information given in the pipe schedule shall govern.

C. Contractor is responsible for compatibility between pipe materials, fittings and appurtenances. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Bundle or package all items in such a manner as to provide adequate protection of the ends during transportation to the site. Exercise care in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe and coatings. Do not drop or skid pipe joints or fittings against each other. Use padded slings, hooks or pipe tongs to prevent damage to the external surface coating or internal lining of the pipe. Any pipe damaged in shipment shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Store materials protected from damage and exposure to harmful weather conditions. Keep the

interior of all pipes, fittings and other appurtenances free from dirt or foreign matter.


E. Do not stack pipe higher than the limits recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Keep the bottom tier off the ground on timbers, rails or concrete.

F. Store gaskets for mechanical and push-on joints in a cool location out of direct sunlight. Prevent

contact between gaskets and petroleum products. Use gaskets on a first-in, first-out basis. 1.8 COORDINATION




C. Do not disrupt service to utility customers during installation of the piping improvements except for the time required to make connections to a new main.

D. Notify the Public Utility Department and Engineer at least 48 hours prior to scheduled connections

of mains.

E. Schedule the sequence of construction and connection as follows:

1. Install new mains, including fire hydrants. 2. Connect new mains to system.

3. Test, disinfect and sample potable water mains.

4. Following approval of testing and disinfection (if required), place mains into service.

F. Work may proceed on one or more lines simultaneously; however, once work has commenced on

any given line, continue that construction until its completion.

G. Vary the sequence of construction as directed by the Engineer. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, water distribution (potable and process water) and force main (pressurized) piping shall be constructed of ductile iron pipe with restrained joint fittings, cement lining, and bituminous exterior coating, conforming to AWWA C104, C111, C150 and C151.


B. Water distribution and force main piping shall be constructed with one of the following methods:

1. Unrestrained push-on joint pipe, similar and equal to Fastite Joint Pipe, by American Ductile

Iron Pipe, with restrained push-on joint or restrained mechanical joint fittings and concrete thrust blocking. Fittings shall be standard or compact size conforming to AWWA C110 or C153, respectively.

2. Restrained push-on joint pipe, similar and equal to Fastite Joint Pipe with Fast-Grip gaskets

or Flex-Ring joints, by American Ductile Iron Pipe, with restrained push-on joint or restrained mechanical joint fittings. Fittings shall be standard or compact size conforming to AWWA C110 or C153, respectively.

C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, gravity sewers and gravity process piping shall be

constructed of ductile iron pipe with Protecto 401 lining and bituminous exterior coating, conforming to AWWA C104, C111, C150 and C151.

D. Gravity process piping shall be constructed with one of the following methods:

1. Unrestrained push-on joint pipe, similar and equal to Fastite Joint Pipe, by American Ductile

Iron Pipe, with restrained push-on joint or restrained mechanical joint fittings plus two (2) restrained pipe lengths (i.e., 40 linear-feet) in all directions from the fitting, unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. Fittings shall be standard or compact size conforming to AWWA C110 or C153, respectively.

E. All buried ductile iron pipe shall be installed with polyethylene wrap conforming to AWWA

C105. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. American Cast Iron Pipe Company, U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Inc., all divisions of McWane, Inc., or approved equal.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe:

1. Conform to AWWA C151. Supply in standard lengths. 2. Thickness design per AWWA C150, except provide minimum Class 350 for piping 12-inch

and smaller, provide minimum Class 350 for piping from 14-inch to 20-inch, provide Class 250 for 24-inch and larger piping.

3. Ductile iron pipe for gravity sewer: conform to ASTM A746.


C. Pipe Joints:

1. Ductile iron pipe shall have rubber-gasket push-on joint or rubber-gasket mechanical joint, conforming to AWWA C111. Unless otherwise noted, gaskets shall be styrene butadiene rubber (SBR). Confirm that gasket materials are compatible with the liquids to be transported and the temperature requirements.

2. Restrained push-on pipe joints shall use a "Grip Gasket-type" or "Flexible Ring-type"

restraint system manufactured by the pipe and fitting manufacturer, and suitable for the specified test pressure.

a. Provide all pressure pipes with restrained joints. b. Provide all fittings for lines 3-inch in diameter and larger with restrained joints. c. Refer to the Drawings for required length of restrained joints.

3. The Contractor may substitute a wedge action mechanical joint gland to restrain the pipe

bells, similar and equal to the Megalug Series 1100 or 1700 by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. 4. Sleeve type couplings: mechanical joint solid sleeves, Dresser Style 38 or 138, or approved

equal. 5. Restrained flanged adapters: Megaflange Series 2100 by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. or approved

equal.

D. Ductile Iron Fittings: 1. Conform to AWWA C110 or AWWA C153 as applicable. 2. Provide Class 350 psi for piping 24-inch and smaller and Class 250 for piping 30-inch and

larger. Provide minimally the same pressure rating as the connecting pipe. 3. Make pipe closures with mechanical joint ductile iron solid sleeves, located in straight runs

of pipe at minimum cover outside the limits of restrained joint sections. Unless specifically detailed in the Drawings, closure locations are subject to approval of the Engineer.

4. Restrain push-on fittings, 3-inch and larger, with “Grip Gasket-type” or “Locked-type”

restraint system. Restrain mechanical fittings with “Wedge-type” gland similar and equal to one of the following: Megalug Series 1100 by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. or Uni-Flange Series 1400 by Ford Meter Box Co., Inc.

E. Interior Lining:

1. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have the same type of lining as specified herein unless

approved by the Engineer. 2. Potable water lines and pressurized process lines: Cement mortar lining conforming to

AWWA C104.


3. As an option, the pipe supplier may line fittings in accordance with AWWA C550 and NSF 61.

4. Gravity sewer or gravity process (drains) lines: Ceramic epoxy lining, amine-cured, with a

minimum thickness of 40-mils, similar and equal to Protecto 401. Provide certification that the lining was applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Fusion bonded epoxy coating conforming to AWWA C116 or AWWA C550 and NSF 61.

F. Exterior Coating:

1. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have the same type of exterior coating as specified herein

unless approved by the Engineer. 2. Asphaltic coating conforming to AWWA C110 and C151. 3. Shop prime and field paint all exterior pipe and fitting surfaces exposed in interior locations.

Coat flange faces with a rust preventative compound similar and equal to Dearborn Chemical “No-Ox-Id”, Rust-Oleum “R-9”, or Houghton “Rust Veto 344”.

4. All buried ductile iron pipe shall be installed with polyethylene wrap conforming to AWWA

C105 and ASTM A674. The wrap shall consist of fused layers of low-density polyethylene film with an anti-microbial biocide and a volatile corrosion inhibitor. The wrap shall be similar and equal to V-Bio Enhanced Polyethylene Encasement.

2.3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE DESIGN

A. Ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi with minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi. Design for external and internal pressures separately using the larger of the two for the net design thickness. Include service allowance and casting tolerance per AWWA C150.

B. The pipe classes determined for various sizes and conditions shall provide the total calculated

thickness at a minimum or conform to minimum pipe class specified elsewhere in this Section, whichever is greater.

C. Net thickness design for external loading shall be taken as the greater of the following conditions:

1. Depth of cover: 30-inch minimum with AASHTO H-20 wheel loads, and an impact factor

of 1.5. 2. Depth from existing ground level of future proposed grade (whichever is greater) to top of

pipe as shown on the Drawings, with truckload. 3. Soil Density: 120 pounds per cubic foot. 4. Laying Conditions: AWWA C150, Trench Type 4.

D. Net thickness design shall be based on the following internal pressure conditions:

1. Design pressure: 150 psi. (pressurized piping) or 25 psi (gravity piping)


2. Surge allowance: 100 psi 3. Safety factor: 2 4. Total internal pressure design: 2 (150 + 100) = 500 psi for pressurized piping

E. Furnish copies of design calculations in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 2.4 TRACER WIRE

A. All ductile iron pipe, both buried and encased, shall be installed with tracer wire. See Section 33 14 00 Water Distribution.


A. Exercise care in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. Do not drop pipe or fittings.

B. Examine all pipe and fittings for soundness before laying, and do not install defective pieces.

Repair damaged pipe coatings per manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Remove any defective pipe discovered after laying and replace with sound pipe in a satisfactory manner.

3.2 INSTALLING DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Install ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C600, except as otherwise provided herein. Provide a firm, even bearing throughout the length of the pipe by digging bell holes at each joint and by tamping backfill materials at the side of the pipe to the springline per details shown on the Drawings.

B. Thoroughly clean all pipe and fittings before laying. When laying is not in progress, close open

pipe ends with a watertight plug or other approved means. Place sufficient backfill to prevent flotation. Do not exceed 75 percent (75%) of the allowable joint deflection recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Provide a minimum of 30-inch of cover over all ductile iron pipe unless otherwise specified or

shown on the Drawings. Lay pipe such that the invert or centerline elevations shown on the Drawings are not exceeded.

D. Provide fittings in addition to those shown on the Drawings where required, and when making

elevation changes to cross existing buried utilities. Install solid sleeve closures at locations approved by the Engineer.

E. Maintain a dry and broom-clean pipe interior throughout the construction period.


F. Cut pipe sections with a machine, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe.

Bevel pipe ends for insertion in a bell to conform to the manufactured spigot end. Repair damaged cement lining and seal field-cut pipe ends with Protecto 401 Joint Compound (or approved epoxy for potable water) in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

G. The method of restraining field cut pipes shall be approved by the Engineer. The restraint system

shall incorporate restrainer glands by EBBA Iron or the pipe manufacturer’s field adaptable restraint system. The pipe laying schedule shall include details of the proposed restraint system.

H. Jointing Ductile-Iron Pipe

1. Install push-on joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWWA C600. Lay

pipe with bell ends looking ahead. Clean joint surfaces and insert a rubber gasket in the groove of the pipe bell. Lubricate the plain end of the pipe, align with the adjacent pipe bell, and push home.

2. Assemble mechanical joints in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and AWWA

C600. Lay pipe with bell ends looking ahead. Clean and lubricate joint surfaces and the rubber gasket, align pipe with the adjacent bell, and push home. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Under no condition shall extension wrenches or a pipe over an ordinary wrench handle be used to secure greater leverage.

3. Tighten bolts in mechanical or restrained joints alternately and evenly. 4. Install restrained joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

I. Install polyethylene encasement around ductile iron pipe to limits shown on the Drawings and in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

J. Install all blow-offs, outlets, valves, fittings, and other required appurtenances as indicated on the

Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURES

A. Wherever a 3-inch or larger pipe passes horizontally through concrete to earth, install two (2) flexible joints, spaced from 2 to 4 feet apart depending on pipe size, and within 2-foot of the exterior face of the wall.

B. Wall pipes shall have a thrust collar located at mid-depth of wall.

3.4 TESTING

A. After installation, test the pipe compliance with the Specifications and in accordance with AWWA C600.

B. Submit detailed test procedures and methods for Engineer's review at least ten (10) days before

starting the test.


C. The Owner will provide water for the testing of pipelines. Coordinate connection with the Owner and provide an air gap or backflow preventer.

D. Install and make all valves operational before testing. Provide suitable restrained bulkheads with

a sufficient number of outlets for filling and draining the line and for venting air.

E. Furnish gauges, meters, pressure pumps and other equipment needed to fill the line slowly and perform the required hydrostatic pressure leakage tests. Provide an accurate means for measuring the quantity of water required to maintain test pressure.

F. Unless otherwise specified, subject pressure pipelines to a hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times the

working pressure at the highest point along the test segment, and maintain this test pressure for a minimum of two (2) hours. The leakage rate shall not exceed those indicated in AWWA C600.

G. The leakage test may be conducted in conjunction with the pressure test, but shall not be less than

two (2) hours in duration. Repair and eliminate all leaks evident at the surface regardless of the total leakage as shown by the test. Repair and retest all lines that fail to meet tests as many times as necessary to achieve compliance with the testing requirements. Remove and replace all defective materials, pipes, valves and accessories.

3.5 CLEANING

A. At the conclusion of the work, thoroughly clean all of the pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of woods, or other material that may have entered during the construction period. Flush the lowest segment outlet last to assure debris removal.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION WATER DISTRIBUTION VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 33 14 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 33 14 00 – WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install and test water mains and water services, including all appurtenances.

B. The work of this section includes installation of potable and pressurized process water lines.


A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete


C. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding

D. Section 33 05 05 – Testing of Pipelines

E. Section 33 05 19 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

F. Section 33 14 19 – Valves, Hydrants and Appurtenances 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME), latest edition:

1. ANSI/ASME B2.1 Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal)

B. American National Standards Institute / NSF International (ANSI/NSF), latest edition:

1. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Drinking Water System Components –

Health Effects

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition:

1. ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

2. ASTM A438 Standard Standard Test Method for Transverse Testing of Gray Cast Iron (Withdrawn 2003)

3. ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

4. ASTM B88 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tubing


5. ASTM D2241 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

6. ASTM D2737 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic

Tubing

7. ASTM F441 Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80

D. American Water Works Association (AWWA), latest edition:

1. AWWA C104 Cement Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings

2. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

3. AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

4. AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast

5. AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings

6. AWWA C500 Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

7. AWWA C502 Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants

8. AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances

9. AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains

10. AWWA C700 Cold-Water Meters – Displacement Type, Metal Alloy Main Case

11. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4

In. Through 60 In. (100 mm Through 1,500 mm)

12. AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe & Fabricated Fittings, 14 In. Through 48 In. (350 Mm Through 1,200 Mm), For Water

Transmission and Distribution [AWWA has designated C905 as obsolete] 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 for Engineer's review.

B. Submit a tabulated laying schedule that references stations and piping elevations as shown on the

Drawings as well as all fittings, bends, outlets, restrained joints, tees, special deflection bells, adapters, solid sleeves and specials, along with the manufacturer's drawings and specifications indicating complete details of all items. The laying schedule shall show pipe class, class coding, station limits and transition stations for various pipe classes. Submit laying schedule to the Engineer for approval before manufacture and shipment. The location of all pipes shall conform to the locations indicated on the Drawings.


C. Submit anticipated production and delivery schedule.

D. Prior to shipment of pipe, submit a certified affidavit of compliance from the manufacturer stating

that the pipe, fittings, gaskets, linings and exterior coatings for this project have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA and ASTM standards and requirements specified herein.


A. Furnish all pipe and fittings from manufacturers experienced in the manufacture of the items. It is not necessary that a single manufacturer furnish all the pipe and fittings, provided that the pipe and fittings are all compatible. Design, construct and install all piping systems and appurtenances in accordance with the best practices and methods, and suitable for the intended service.

B. Inspect and test all pipe and fittings at the factory as required by the standard manufacturing

specifications.

C. The Owner may elect to hire an independent testing laboratory, at the Owner’s expense, to inspect all pipe and fittings at the plant for compliance with these Specifications.

D. The Engineer or other representative of the Owner may inspect the pipe and fittings after delivery.

The pipe will be subject to rejection at any time because of failure to meet any of the Specification requirements, even though sample pipes may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. The Engineer will mark pipe rejected after delivery for identification, and the Contractor shall remove the pipe from the project.

E. Permanently mark all pipe and fittings with the following information:

1. Manufacturer and date.

2. Size, type, class, or wall thickness.

3. Standard produced to (AWWA, ASTM, etc.).


A. Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Exercise care in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings.

Under no circumstances shall pipe joints or fittings be dropped or skidded against each other. Use padded slings, hooks, or pipe tongs to prevent damage to the external surface coating or internal lining of the pipe.

D. Store materials protected from damage and exposure to harmful weather conditions. Keep the

interior of all pipe, fittings and other appurtenances free from dirt or foreign matter.


E. Do not stack pipe higher than the limits recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Keep the bottom tier off the ground on timbers, rails or concrete.

1.7 COORDINATION




C. Do not disrupt service to water customers during installation of the water line improvements except for the time required to make connections to new main as specified in this specification.

D. The Contractor shall notify the Van Buren Municipal Utilities at least 48 hours prior to scheduled

connections of mains. Scheduling shall be subject to the approval of the Water Department and the Engineer.

E. The Contractor shall schedule the sequence of construction and change as follows:

1. Install new mains as shown on the Drawings, including fire hydrants.

2. Connect new mains to system as shown on the Drawings.

3. Test, disinfect and sample mains as specified. After samples are approved, place mains into

service.

F. Work may proceed on one (1) or more lines simultaneously; however, once work has commenced on any given line, the Contractor shall continue that construction until its completion.

G. The Contractor shall vary the sequence of construction as directed by the Engineer.




A. All materials and construction methods shall conform to these specifications and with the standards referenced herein. Manufacturer shall furnish certification of compliance with the referenced standards.


B. All materials and components in potable (drinking) water systems shall comply with the federal definition of “lead free” and the requirements of Public Law 111-380 titled “Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act”. Materials and components shall show certification in accordance with NSF Standard 61, Annex G or NSF Standard 372.

2.2 PVC PIPE

A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, 4-inch and larger: Push-on joint, conforming to AWWA C900; cast iron outside diameter; elastomeric-gasket type joints with integral bell; and minimum pressure Class 150 unless otherwise specified on the plans or in the proposal.

B. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, 2-inch to 3-inch: Push-on joint, conforming to ASTM

D2241; elastomeric-gasket type joints with integral bell; and minimum pressure Class 200 unless otherwise specified on the plans on in the proposal.

C. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, 1/2-inch to 1 1/2-inch: Type I, Grade 1 PVC 1120

compounds; conforming to ASTM D1784, Cell Class 12454-B and ASTM D1785; and Schedule 80 unless otherwise specified on the plans or in the proposal.

D. Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pressure pipe: Type IV, Grade 1 CPVC 4120 compounds;

conforming to ASTM D1784, Cell Class 23447 and ASTM F441; and Schedule 80 unless otherwise specified on the plans or in the proposal.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Fittings: Ductile-iron, cement lined, bituminous exterior coated, polyethylene wrapped, conforming to AWWA C110 or C153 (compact fittings); pressure Class 350 unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. Furnish and install restrained push-on or restrained mechanical joint fittings unless otherwise designated on the Drawings.

B. Furnish mechanical joints with anchor fittings or restrained glands if specified on the plans or in

the proposal. Design restrained glands suitable for use with the pipe material, similar and equal to Megalug retainer glands as manufactured by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.

2.4 SERVICE LINES

A. Water service line shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall be either copper or plastic tubing. Copper tubing shall be in accordance with ASTM B88, "Seamless Copper Water Tubing". All copper pipe shall be type K suitable for flared fittings.

B. Flexible plastic tubing shall be manufactured of polyethylene plastic and in accordance with

ASTM D2737, "Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing". The outside diameter of all plastic tubing shall be same as copper tubing. All plastic tubing shall be capable of maintaining a pressure of 200 psi at 23 degrees C for 1,000 hours, shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 200 psi, and shall be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation. If compression fittings are used on plastic tubing, stainless steel stiffener inserts shall be used at each end.


2.5 SERVICE METERS

A. Meters shall be for the intended use of measuring the consumption of cold water and shall be of the Nutating-Disc or Oscillating-Piston type. Meters shall be Sensus II, Neptune T-10, Badger LP, or an approved equal.

B. All meters shall be in accordance with AWWA C700, NSF/ANSI Standard 61, and the Reduction

of Lead in Drinking Water Act. The supplying manufacturer shall furnish a written certificate stating all meters supplied will meet the above specification.

C. All meters shall have an outer case with a separate measuring chamber in which the piston or disc

operates. Castings shall be of a frost-proof design and cases shall be made of bronze. The inlet and outlet spuds or flanges shall be 180 degrees apart and located in the same horizontal plane.

D. Measuring chambers shall be carefully machined and secured in position on the outer casings.

The measuring chamber shall be positioned so that any distortion that might occur at an internal pressure of 150 psi will not affect the sensitivity or registration of the meters. Measuring chambers may be made of a corrosion resistant thermoplastic material formulated for long-term performance. There shall be no stuffing box.

E. All meters will be provided with a strainer made of thermoplastic material. F. All registers shall be hermetically sealed and will read in U.S. gallons with a minimum of ten (10)

U.S. gallon sweep hand. The register will be magnetically driven and all gearing will be contained in a hermetically sealed, tamper proof unit.

G. The size, model, and direction of flow through the meter shall be cast in raised characters on the

outer case of all meters. Additionally, the manufacturer's serial number shall be imprinted on both the meter lid and the case.

H. The size of the meter will be in terms of the nominal size of the opening of the inlet and outlet

spuds or flanges. Meters shall be 5/8-inch unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or in the proposal.

I. The main case connections for all meters shall be meter casting spuds having external threads

conforming to the American Standard Pipe Threads, ANSI B2.1.

2.6 SERVICE METER BOXES AND YOKES

A. Meter boxes shall be of cast iron with cast iron locking lid. The words "WATER METER" shall be cast in the lid. Inlet and outlet connections shall be waterworks brass. A meter clamping device within the box shall be provided to enable wrench-free changing of the meter and shall be of waterworks brass. The outlet shall be straight. The inlet shall incorporate a quarter-turn valve with O-ring seal. The inlet connection shall be angled down from horizontal. Boxes shall be Ford Yokebox-YM244 or approved equal.


2.7 SERVICE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Pressure reducing valves shall be for the intended use of protecting residential and commercial customer water systems by controlling excessive pressure. The valves shall be built for long reliable service with ASTM grade materials. Pressure reducing valves shall be Apollo Model PR-36 or an approved equal.

B. All pressure reducing valves shall be in accordance with NSF 61 and the U.S. Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) latest revision.

C. The valves shall be constructed of a corrosive resistant sealed bronze body and bonnet with

stainless steel strainer.

D. The pressure reducing valves shall not be direct buried. Refer to construction drawings for details of installation. Unless otherwise noted, pressure reducing valves shall be installed in a service meter box.

2.8 CORPORATION STOPS AND SERVICE SADDLES

A. Corporation stops shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall be bronze with AWWA thread on inlet end. Outlet end shall be flared or compression. Corporation stops to be similar and equal to Mueller H-15000 or H-15008.

B. Service saddles body shall be cast malleable or ductile iron or cast bronze, and shall be tapped for

AWWA thread. A neoprene gasket shall be cemented in place to saddle body. The saddle shall have either a single or double strap. Saddle straps shall be flattened to increase bearing surface on the pipe and shall be galvanized, cadmium plated or stainless steel, and shall be Smith-Blair 311 or 313, Mueller or equal.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS

A. Couplings for joining sections of pipe shall be manufactured of gray cast iron in accordance with ASTM A48 or A438. Flanges may be of malleable iron conforming to ASTM A48 or of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Gaskets shall be of a permanent and set resistance material. Bolts shall conform to AWWA C111.

B. Adapters for connecting pipes of dissimilar materials shall be manufactured of gray cast iron in

accordance with ASTM A48 and A438. Flanges may be of fine grained malleable iron conforming to ASTM A48 or of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Gaskets shall be of a natural rubber compound that will provide permanence and resistance to set. Bolts for adapters shall be high strength steel or iron and shall be galvanized.

C. Repair clamps shall be made of stainless steel Type 302 or 304, or of gray iron conforming to

ASTM A48 and A438. Gaskets shall be of a natural rubber compound that will provide permanence and resistance to set. Bolts and nuts shall be high strength steel or iron and shall be coated and treated for corrosion protection. Repair clamps shall be of full circle design and shall have adequate length to properly repair line defects and thereby prevent future leakage at the repaired point.

D. Miscellaneous fittings and adapters for service lines shall be wrought copper, cast bronze or brass.


2.10 TRACER WIRE

A. All non-metallic pipe installed for mains shall be laid with tracer wire. Tracer wire shall be AWG TDW #14 solid copper and installed in a continuous non-interrupted circuit. Tracer wire junction boxes shall be installed at intervals shown on the Drawings, but not exceeding 1,000 feet unless specifically authorized by the Engineer.

2.11 GRAVEL BEDDING

A. The granular fill used as gravel bedding shall be crushed stone, crushed gravel or gravel. The materials shall be well graded containing several sizes of particles ranging from a 3/4-inch maximum size to a No. 4 material. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the material shall meet the gradation requirements of ASTM C33, Gradation 67.

2.12 CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall be 2500 psi, unless noted otherwise. See Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.13 MAIN LINE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Pressure reducing valves for main water lines shall be Model 90-48 ABY as manufactured by Cla-Val Company, or an approved equal. The pressure reducing valve shall incorporate a low-flow bypass, flow clean strainer, “Y” strainer, and isolation valves. The discharge pressure shall be set as shown on the plans.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. General: Refer to Section 31 23 00, Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.

3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. General: Unload pipe, fittings and accessories near the place where they are to be laid in the trench, and handle with care to avoid damage. Cutting of pipe shall be done by means of an approved type of mechanical cutter.

B. Placement of Pipe

1. Clean and inspect all sections of pipe, fittings and accessories for damage immediately prior

to placement in the trench. Reject all defective materials, and remove them from the project. Place pipe, fittings and accessories in the trench, and position them utilizing hoisting equipment. Lay pipe true to line and grade, with uniform bearing under the full length of the pipe barrel.


2. Connect pipe joints and fittings in accordance with the pipe manufacturers' recommendations. Gaskets and lubricants shall be the type recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Insert the spigot end of the pipe into the bell to the required depth and in such manner as to avoid displacement of the gasket. Jointing of mechanical-joint pipe shall be accomplished such that the gland is positioned evenly by tightening alternately the bolts spaced 180 degrees apart.

3. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, close the open ends of the pipe with a watertight

plug. This provision shall apply during the lunch period, overnight, or any other time when work is not in progress.

4. No pipe shall be laid in wet trench conditions that preclude proper bedding, or on a frozen

trench bottom, or when in the opinion of the Engineer, the trench conditions or the weather are unsuitable for proper installation.

C. Concrete Thrust Blocking

1. Install concrete thrust blocking at the locations shown on the Drawings. Place the concrete

between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Care shall be taken to place the thrust block such that the pipe and fitting joints will be accessible for repair.

2. The shape and contact area of the concrete thrust blocks shall be as shown on the Drawings

and as directed by the Engineer. The contact area of backing shall be as required to prevent movement of the joint, but in no case shall the contact area be less than one (1) square-foot.

D. Connections to Mains

1. Connect new water mains to existing mains as shown on the Drawings.

2. Prior to valving off the existing main, assemble all equipment and fittings before excavating

and exposing the main. Coordinate closing and opening of valves with the Van Buren Municipal Utilities. Connect to the new main using adapters and fittings specified. Bedding, backfilling, concrete blocking and other related items shall be as specified in other sections of this specification.

3. The main shall be connected and a corporation stop installed near the point of connection to

permit expelling air from the line. Installation of the tap shall be as directed by the Engineer.

3.3 SERVICES

A. Service Taps and Service Lines

1. Service taps shall be made by installation of corporation stops and service saddle on the water mains. Taps shall be made at an approximate 45 degree angle from the vertical.

2. Place service lines to the line and grade shown on the Drawings or as established by the

Engineer. Place service lines at right angles to the water main. Lay service lines to a minimum depth of 18 inches below the finish ground surface, except at street crossings where the minimum cover below subgrade shall be 30 inches. Full lengths of tubing shall be used; no splices shall be installed between the service tap and the water meter.


3. The trench shall have a minimum width of 6 inches and a trench bottom free of rocks or boulders. The bottom of the trench shall be flat, smooth and even to provide a surface with a uniform bearing for the pipe.

4. If rock is encountered in the bottom of the trench, it shall be removed and a minimum bedding

depth of 4 inches provided between the trench bottom and the service line pipe. Fill the excavated area below the grade line with sand or select material free of rocks, boulders, debris of any kind, or other objectionable matter, or material that may be injurious to the pipe. Tamp the bedding material prior to installation of the pipe.

5. Place and tamp the backfill material in layers not exceeding 4 inches in thickness. Use only

backfill material that is free from stones, rocks, and clods and is not frozen. Tamp the backfill uniformly along the full length of the pipe to a point 4 inches above the top of the pipe. The backfill densities shall be the same as those specified in other Sections of the specifications depending upon the location of the service line.

6. Service lines extending beneath existing pavements, which are to remain in place, shall be

installed by boring or other subsurface method. The method used shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be a method that will avoid subjecting the service tubing to excessive stress. If obstructions are encountered and installation of a service line cannot be accomplished by boring, the service line shall be installed by the open trench method. Cutting and replacement of existing pavements shall be as specified in other Sections of this specification.

7. Tubing shall be connected using the specified fittings and in such a manner to avoid excessive

stress on the line.

B. Service Meters: Install water service meters and meter boxes as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. Install meter boxes with the top of the box flush with the sidewalk surface. The meter and yoke shall be approximately centered within the box.

3.4 STREET CROSSINGS

A. Installation of water mains at street crossings shall be in open cuts unless boring is authorized in writing by the Engineer. Excavation, trenching, backfilling and pipe installation shall be as specified in other sections of this specification and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Replacement of pavement shall be as shown on the Drawings. The surface of the replacement

shall match the existing grade and shape of the pavement.

C. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all street crossing permits and repairing the pavement in accordance with the municipal, county or state highway authority.

3.5 DISINFECTION

A. All materials, work, workmanship and methods shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA C651 for Disinfecting Water Mains.


B. Samples of water shall be taken by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer and shall be submitted for analysis by a testing laboratory certified for water bacteriological analysis in the State where the project is located. A copy of the test results shall be furnished to the Engineer. A minimum of two (2) consecutive safe samples are required on each line section. Samples are to be collected on successive days.

C. The disinfection procedures shall be repeated as necessary until all samples indicate that the water

is safe and approved by the State regulatory agency.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION VALVES, HYDRANTS AND APPURTENANCES VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 33 14 19 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 33 14 19 – VALVES, HYDRANTS AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide all buried and non-buried valves, valves in underground vaults, and appurtenances, complete with actuators and all accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Valves specifically excluded from this Section are as follows:

1. All interior valves for process piping. 2. All valves for plumbing work. 3. All valves for heating and ventilation work. 4. All valves for fuel oil piping. 5. All valves specifically included with equipment.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS (NONE)

1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS

A. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified.


1. AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

2. AWWA C500 Metal-Seated Gate Valves, for Water Supply Service

3. AWWA C502 Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants

4. AWWA C504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves, 3In. (75mm) through 72 In. (1,800 mm)

5. AWWA C508 Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-In. Through 48-In.

(50-mm Through 1200-mm) NPS

6. AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

7. AWWA C512 Air-Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Water and Wastewater Service

8. AWWA C517 Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves


9. AWWA C541 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Cylinder and Vane-Type Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates

10. AWWA C542 Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates

11. AWWA C550 Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), latest edition:

1. ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition:


2. ASTM A126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges

and Pipe Fittings

3. ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

4. ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

5. ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPVC), latest edition:

1. SSPC SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit materials required to establish compliance with these Specifications in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals for shop drawings. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data including:

a. Dimensions b. Size c. Materials of construction d. Weight e. Protection coating f. Actuator weight g. Calculations for actuator torque where applicable. h. Actuator wiring diagram including ladder diagrams and point-to-point wiring.

B. Test Reports: Four (4) copies of all certified shop test results specified herein.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Including copies of all approved Shop Drawings.


D. Certificates: Certificates of compliance where required by referenced standards: For each valve specified to be manufactured and/or installed in accordance with AWWA and other standards, submit an affidavit of compliance with the appropriate standards, including certified results of required tests and certification of proper installation.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:

1. Valves and appurtenances provided under this Section shall be the standard product in regular production by manufacturers whose products have proven reliable in similar service for at least five (5) years. If required, the manufacturer shall furnish evidence of installation in satisfactory operation.

2. All units of the same type shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer.

B. Design Criteria: All valves and appurtenances shall be new and in perfect working condition.

Valves shall be designed for continuous use with a minimum of maintenance and service required and shall perform the required function without exceeding the safe limits for stress, strain or vibration. In no case will used or damaged valves be acceptable. The selection of equipment to meet the specified design conditions is the responsibility of the Contractor. Both workmanship and material shall be of the very best quality and shall be entirely suitable for the service conditions specified.

C. Source Quality Control

1. Shop test valves in accordance with the referenced AWWA or other standard.

2. Obtain each type of valve from no more than one (1) manufacturer.

3. Plug valves shall be hydrostatically tested for 30 minutes at two-times (2x) the maximum

working pressure, with no evidence of distress, leakage or weeping. Plug valves shall be capable of providing drip tight shut-off up to the full pressure rating.

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: All valves for buried piping or valves installed in vaults, as shown on the Drawings, shall be as specified in this Section.


A. Deliver materials to the site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work.

B. Protect threads and seats from corrosion and damage. Rising stems and exposed stem valves shall be coated with a protective oil film that shall be maintained until time of use.

C. Furnish covers for all openings.

1. All valves 3-inch and larger shall be shipped and stored on site until time of use with wood

or plywood covers on each valve end.


2. All valves smaller than 3-inch shall be shipped and stored as above except that heavy

cardboard covers may be furnished instead of wood.

D. Store equipment to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Any corrosion in evidence at the time of Owner acceptance shall be removed, or the valve shall be removed from the job.

E. Store all equipment in covered storage off the ground.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate with the work that is related to this Section including buried piping installation, site utilities, etc.

B. Coordinate the location and placement of concrete thrust blocks when required.


A. All buried valves shall open counter-clockwise.

B. The use of a manufacturer's name and/or model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.

C. Valves shall be of the size shown on the Drawings or as noted and as far as possible, equipment

of the same type shall be identical and from one (1) manufacturer.

D. Valves shall have the name of the maker, nominal size, flow directional arrows, working pressure for which they are designed and standard to which they are manufactured cast in raised letters on some appropriate part of the body.

E. Valves shall be rated for the adjoining piping system pressures as indicated on the Drawings.

Unless otherwise noted, valves shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psi or be of the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher.

1. 3 to 12-inch diameter: 200 psi 2. 14 to 36-inch diameter 150 psi

F. Valves shall be of the same nominal diameter as the pipe or fittings to which they are connected.

Except as otherwise noted, joints shall be mechanical joints, with joint restraint where the adjacent piping is required to be restrained.

G. Valves shall be especially constructed for buried service.


2.2 VALVE BOXES

A. All buried valves shall be provided with extension shafts, operating nuts and valve boxes as follows:

1. Extension shafts shall be Type 304 stainless steel and the operating nut shall be 2-inch square.

Shafts shall be designed to provide a factor of safety of not less than four. Operating nuts shall be pinned to the shafts.

2. Top of the operating nut shall be located 2 inches below the rim of the valve box.

3. Valve boxes shall be of the cast iron extension type. Boxes may be of the screw or sliding

type, with a lap of 6 inches when in the most extended position. Lids shall be marked with the inscription “WATER” cast into the top depending on the associated line, and bases shall be of the proper size for the valve. Aluminum or plastic covers are not acceptable. A means of lateral support for the valve extension shaft shall be provided in the top portion of the valve box.

4. The boxes shall be similar and equal to Tyler Two Piece Valve Box Series 6850 or 6855, with

5 1/4-inch shaft. Valve boxes shall have one (1) priming coat and two (2) coats of coal tar paint.

5. The upper section of each box shall have a bottom flange of sufficient bearing area to prevent

settling. The bottom of the lower section shall enclose the stuffing box and operating nut of the valve and shall be oval.

6. An approved operating key or wrench shall be furnished, except for when floor stands are

required.

7. All fasteners shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2.3 GATE VALVES

A. General:

1. Valves 2 1/2-inch and smaller shall be all bronze construction; valves 3-inch and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted.

2. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, all gate valves shall conform to the requirements

of AWWA C500 or C509, except as may be specifically modified herein.

B. Gate valves 2 1/2-inch and smaller:

1. Screwed ends, solid wedge, rising stem and screwed-in bonnet with minimum nonshock working pressure of 150 psig.

2. Product and Manufacturer. Furnish valves as manufactured by one (1) of the following:

a. Stockham Model B103


2.4 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES

A. Resilient seated gate valves shall be of cast iron or ductile iron, designed for a working pressure not less than 200 psi. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C509, by Mueller or equal as modified herein.

B. Valves shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) O-ring stem seals.

C. Bonnet and gland bolts and nuts shall be either fabricated from a low alloy-steel for corrosion

resistance or electroplated with zinc or cadmium. The hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A153 is not acceptable.

D. Wedges shall be totally encapsulated.

E. Units shall be UL and FM approved.

F. The valve manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit that the gate valves have been manufactured and

tested in accordance with AWWA C509. 2.5 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING VALVES

A. Tapping sleeves shall be of cast iron or ductile iron, designed for working pressure not less than 200 psi. Armored end gaskets shall be provided for the full area of the sleeve flanges. Sleeves shall be as manufactured by Mueller or equal. Nuts and bolts shall be Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Contractor may substitute a stainless steel tapping sleeve, Smith-Blair Model 663 or approved

equal. Tapping sleeve shall have a Type 304 stainless steel body with full circumference rubber gasket rated for water service and conforming to ASTM D2000. Sleeves shall be rated for 250 psig service (4-inch to 8-inch), 200 psig service (10-inch to 24-inch), or 150 psig service (26-inch to 30-inch). Stainless steel sleeves with iron tapping flanges are not acceptable.

C. Field verify existing water line type and pipe O.D. before ordering the tapping sleeve.

D. Include a 3/4-inch NPT test plug, and pressure test the sleeve in the presence of the Engineer

before commencing tap.

E. Tapping valves shall conform to the requirements specified above for gate valves except that one end shall be flanged and one mechanical. Tapping valves shall be provided with an oversized opening to permit the use of full size cutters.

F. The valve manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit that the tapping valves have been manufactured

and tested in accordance with AWWA C509. 2.6 PLUG VALVES

A. All plug valves shall be of the eccentric type with bodies and plugs of cast-iron construction and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C517. Valves shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 175 psig. The area at the valve port shall be at least eighty percent (80%) of the full pipe area. All valves shall open by turning counter-clockwise.


B. Valves shall have balanced plugs with a resilient facing of neoprene solidly bonded thereto to assure bubble-tight shutoff.

C. Seats shall have a welded-in overlay of ninety nine percent (99%) pure nickel on all surfaces

contacting the plug face.

D. Valves shall be furnished with bolted bonnets and self-adjusting vee-type packing. Packing shall be replaceable without disassembling the valve or removing the bonnet from the valve.

E. Corrosion-resistant, permanently lubricated bearings shall be provided at both ends of the valve

shafts.

F. All valves shall be supplied with mechanical joint ends conforming to ANSI B16.1, Class 125, unless otherwise noted herein or on the Drawings.

G. All exterior hardware on valves shall be of Type 316 stainless steel.

H. Plug valves shall be Cam-Centric Plug Valve as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and

Manufacturing Corp, PEC Eccentric Plug Valve as manufactured by DeZurik, or equal.

I. The valve manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit that the plug valves have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA C517.

2.7 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Fire hydrants shall be three-way with two (2) hose nozzles and one (1) pumper nozzle, similar and equal to Mueller Super Centurion 200 Fire Hydrant, Catalog No. A-421. Hydrants shall be furnished with a mechanical joint base shoe, and all fittings shall be anchor type. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the inlet connection shall be 6-inch diameter.

B. Hydrants shall have incorporated in their design, a breakable connection feature including a safety

stem coupling immediately above the bury line. This breakable connection shall have a lower breaking strength than the remainder of the unit.

C. Hydrants shall be furnished and set for a minimum depth of cover of 30 inches unless otherwise

indicated on the Drawings. Provide the appropriate fire hydrant extension necessary to place the centerline of the pumper nozzle a minimum of 18 inches above finished grade. Where fire hydrant extensions are required, they shall be of the proper design to accommodate the make of fire hydrant installed.

D. The hydrant manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit that the fire hydrants have been manufactured

and tested in accordance with AWWA C502.

E. Field paint hydrants with a color as approved by the Owner.

2.8 FLUSHING HYDRANTS

A. Flushing hydrants shall be of the non-freezing type with a 2-inch hose nozzle and a 2-inch FIP inlet. Flushing hydrants shall be set at the locations as shown in the Drawings and shall have a depth of bury that will meet the elevations given in the Drawing or a depth of 30 inches, whichever


is greater. The hydrant shall have a locking operating rod, and shall be serviceable from above grade. Flushing hydrants shall be Eclipse Model No. 77 Mainguard Hydrant as manufactured by the Kupferle Foundry Company.

2.9 YARD HYDRANTS

A. Yard hydrants shall be the non-freezing type with a 1-inch inlet connection and a 3/4-inch hose coupling adapter. Yard hydrants shall be set at the locations as shown in the Drawings and shall have a depth of bury that will meet the elevations given in the Drawings or depth of 30 inches, whichever is greater. Yard hydrants shall be Merrill Hi-Cap 1-inch, Anyflow or approved equal. Yard hydrants shall include a brass anti-siphon vacuum breaker.

2.10 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS

A. The interior ferrous metal surfaces for potable water service valves, except finished or bearing surfaces, shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-6 and painted with two (2) coats of an approved two-component coal tar epoxy coating specifically formulated for potable water use. The coating used must appear on the current edition of the United States Environmental Protection Agency's list entitled "Accepted Categories and Subcategories of Coating, Liners and Paints for Potable Water Usage".

B. Exterior ferrous metal surfaces of all buried valves and hydrants shall be blast cleaned in

accordance with SSPC SP-6 and given two (2) shop coats of a heavy coal tar enamel or approved two-component coal tar epoxy paint.

C. Exterior ferrous metal surfaces of all nonburied valves shall be shop painted with one (1) coat of

primer in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 91 10. 2.11 VALVE ACTUATORS – GENERAL

A. The valve and control gate manufacturer shall supply and integrally, rigidly mount all actuators, including any type of manual or powered actuators, on valves at the factory. The valves and their individual actuators shall be shipped as a unit.

B. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, non-buried process valves and control gates shall have a

hand wheel mounted on the operator. Buried process valves shall have a 2-inch operating nut and extension stem unless otherwise noted on the plans.

C. All actuators shall be capable of moving the valve or control gate from the full open to full close

position and in reverse and holding the valve at any position part way between full open or closed.

D. Each operating device shall have cast on it the word "OPEN" and an arrow indicating the direction of operation.

E. Where required by the installation, or as specified, provide the following: floor box; extended

stem; floor stand and handwheel; position indicator and etched or cast arrow to show direction of rotation to open the valve; resilient, moisture-resistant seal around stem penetration of slab.

1. Floor boxes for operating nuts recessed in concrete shall be standard cast iron type, cast-in-

place, with fastening top by Clow or equal.


2. Stem guides shall be of the adjustable wall bracket type, bronze bushed, with maximum

spacing of 10-foot as manufactured by Clow; Rodney Hunt or equal. Extended operating nuts and/or stems shall have universal joints and pin couplings, if longer than 10-foot and a rating of at least five-times (5x) the maximum operating torque. Stem adapters shall be provided.

F. Gear Actuators

1. Unless otherwise noted, gear actuators shall be provided for the following: all valves of larger

than 8-inch nominal diameter; all buried valves with operating shaft mounted horizontally (butterfly, plug, etc) and where specified and/or indicated on the Drawings.

2. Gear actuators shall be of the worm or helical gear type with output shaft perpendicular to

valve shaft, having a removable hand wheel mounted on the output shaft.

3. Actuators shall be capable of being removed from the valve without dismantling the valve or removing the valve from the line.

4. Gearing shall be machine-cut steel designed for smooth operation. Bearings shall be

permanently lubricated, with bronze bearing bushings provided to take all thrusts and seals and to contain lubricants. Housings shall be sealed to exclude moisture and dirt, allow the reduction mechanisms to operate in lubricant and be of the same material as the valve body.

5. Manual operator input effort to the handwheel shall be a maximum of 40 ft-lbs for operating

the valve from full open to full close, under any conditions. Gear actuators shall indicate valve position and have adjustable stops. Maximum handwheel size shall be 24-inch diameter.

G. All position indication and direction of opening arrows shall be embossed, stamped, engraved,

etched or raised decals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. During installation of all valves, control gates, and appurtenances, verify that all items are clean, free of defects in material and workmanship and function properly.

B. All valves shall be closed and kept closed until otherwise directed by the Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BURIED VALVES AND VALVE BOXES

A. Buried valves shall be cleaned and manually operated before installation. Buried valves and valve boxes shall be set with the stem vertically aligned in the center of the valve box. Valves shall be set on a firm foundation and supported by tamping pipe bedding material under the sides of the valve. The valve box shall be supported during backfilling and maintained in vertical alignment with the top flush with finish grade. The valve box shall be set so as not to transmit traffic loads to the valve.


B. Before backfilling, all exposed portions of any bolts shall be coated with two coats of bituminous

paint comparable to Series 46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar by Tnemec Co., Inc.

C. Install valve floorstand operators with stainless steel bolts. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES

A. The proper authority shall be contacted and their permission granted prior to tapping a "live" line. The required procedures and timetable shall be followed exactly.

B. Installation shall be made under pressure and flow shall be maintained. The diameters of the tap

shall be a minimum of 1/4-inch less than the inside diameter of the branch line.

C. The entire operation shall be conducted by workers experienced in the installation of tapping sleeves and valves. The tapping machine shall be furnished by the Contractor.

D. Determine the location of the line to be tapped to confirm that the proposed location will be

satisfactory and that no interference will be encountered such as joints or fittings. No tap or sleeve will be made closer than three feet from a pipe joint.

E. Tapping sleeve and valve with boxes shall be set squarely centered on the line to be tapped.

Adequate support shall be provided under the sleeve and valve during the tapping operation. Thrust blocks or other permanent restraint acceptable to the Engineer shall be provided behind all tapping sleeves. Proper tamping of supporting pipe bedding material around and under the valve and sleeve is mandatory for buried installations.

F. After completing the tap, the valve shall be flushed to ensure that the valve seat is clean. All

proper regulatory procedures (including disinfection) shall be followed exactly. 3.4 FIELD TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Conduct a functional field test of each valve, including actuators and control equipment, in presence of Engineer to demonstrate that each part of all components together function correctly. All testing equipment required shall be furnished by the Contractor.

3.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE

A. Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the tapping equipment manufacturer to provide on-site instruction during wet tapping of the existing water mains indicated on the Drawings.


WILLHAF HOUSE INTERIOR RESTORATION STORM DRAINAGE VAN BUREN, ARKANSAS 33 40 00 - 1 UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS - FORT SMITH

SECTION 33 40 00 – STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to construct storm drainage systems including modifications and connections to existing storm drainage systems.



B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

C. Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling D. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control

E. Section 32 92 19 – Seeding



1. AASHTO M105 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

2. AASHTO M170 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

3. AASHTO M198 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and

Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

4. AASHTO M199 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

5. AASHTO M206 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

6. AASHTO M207 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert,

Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

7. AASHTO M259 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers


8. AASHTO M273 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections

for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers with Less Than 2 ft of Cover Subjected to Highway Loadings

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition


2. ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

3. ASTM C76 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,

and Sewer Pipe

4. ASTM C478 Standard Specification for Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

5. ASTM C506 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

6. ASTM C507 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

7. ASTM C990 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

8. ASTM C1433 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers

9. ASTM D1056 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge or Expanded Rubber

C. Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department (AHTD):

1. Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Submit manufacturer’s data for drainage pipe culvert including classification.

C. Submit shop drawings for proposed precast box culverts and drainage inlets detailing size,

opening locations and dimensions, standard reinforcing, additional reinforcing required for openings, and layout plans. Include manufacturer’s certifications that all materials meet the requirements of the referenced standards.

D. Submit concrete mix design for cast-in-place concrete and manufacturer’s data on precast

concrete structures. Submit compressive strength test results on all cast-in-place concrete.


E. Submit manufacturer’s data on castings and other appurtenances.


A. The Contractor is responsible for providing the quality control and quality assurance testing activities. Testing frequencies are defined under the paragraph on Field Testing at the end of this Section.

B. Furnish manufacturer or supplier certification for all products and materials from off-site sources for approval by the Engineer. Provide initial material certifications at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trade’s adjoining items of work in this Section before commencement of items specified herein.




PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE

A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): Reinforced concrete pipe culvert shall have tongue and groove or bell and spigot joint design unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Pipe culvert shall have Wall “B” and be minimum Class III or the classification shown on the Drawings.

1. Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) shall conform to ASTM C76 (AASHTO M170).

2. Reinforced concrete arch pipe (RCPA) shall conform to ASTM C506 (AASHTO M206).

3. Reinforced concrete elliptical pipe (RCPE) shall conform to ASTM C507 (AASHTO

M207).

B. Reinforced Concrete Flared End Section (FES): Flared end sections for circular, arch or elliptical pipe culvert shall be of the same material as the culvert and comply with applicable standards for each type of culvert listed above.


C. Gaskets: Gaskets for concrete pipe culvert and box culvert joints shall be of tubular cross-

sections manufactured from extruded closed-cellular rubber. The base polymer shall be a blend of nitrile and vinyl in accordance with ASTM D1056 (Type 2, Class C, Grade 1), and meeting the chemical resistance requirements of ASTM C990 (AASHTO M198). Gaskets shall be Omni-Flex Gaskets as manufactured by Superior Pipe Products, Inc., Depew, OK, or approved equal.

2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS AND INLETS

A. Manufacture and furnish precast box culverts in accordance with ASTM C1433 (AASHTO M259 or M273) as applicable. Special designs for precast box culverts shall utilize a design program similar to the Box Culvert Analysis and Reinforcing Design (BOXCAR) by the American Concrete Pipe Association and shall be designed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is located.

B. Manufacture and furnish precast drainage inlets in accordance with ASTM C478 (AASHTO M199), rated for H-20 loading, and with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. Precast units may be used for drainage inlet bottoms and walls on with Engineer’s approval. Inlet tops and extensions must be cast-in-place.

2.3 CONCRETE

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: A five and one-half (5 1/2) bag mix with a 28 day compressive strength of at least 3,500 psi.

B. Use an air-entraining agent with all mixtures when the concrete will be exposed, for freeze/thaw

damage resistance.

C. Maximum aggregate size shall be 1 1/2-inch with a gradation conforming to ASTM C33, Gradation No. 467.

2.4 CASTINGS

A. Storm Drain Manhole Frame and Cover: Heavy-duty cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 35 (AASHTO M105) and rated for H-20 loading. Covers subject to traffic shall have machined bearing surfaces to prevent rocking of the cover. Size, style and cover graphics shall be as indicated on the Drawings. If no casting is shown on the Drawings, covers shall be an East Jordan Iron Works No. 2750 or approved equal.

B. Storm Drain Grated Frame and Cover: Heavy-duty cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 35 (AASHTO M105) of the type and size as indicated on the Drawings.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LINE AND GRADE

A. The Engineer shall provide survey control points, as indicated on the Drawings, for use by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting construction line and grade stakes, including but not limited to street and drainage baselines and other alignments, profile grades and elevations, and temporary benchmarks. Exercise care to preserve the survey control points. In the event of willful or careless destruction of these points, the Contractor shall be responsible for re-establishing all survey control points at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 CULVERT INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Perform trench excavation, backfill and related earthwork in accordance with Section 31 23

00, Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.

2. Examine each pipe culvert prior to laying and reject any defective or damaged culvert section. Mark defective pipe culvert and remove from the job site.

B. Laying Pipe Culvert:

1. Lay pipe culvert to the elevations, inverts, grades, and alignment as indicated on the

Drawings. Provide proper equipment for lowering sections of pipe culvert into trenches. Unless otherwise noted, lay pipe culvert upgrade.

2. Under no circumstances lay pipe culvert in water. Do not lay pipe culverts when trench

conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work.

C. Joining Pipe Culverts: 1. Lay drainage pipe culvert with the separate sections joined firmly together.

2. Keep the space between the pipe joints free from dirt and grit so that the connections fit

snugly. Protect jointing materials from the air and sun to prevent drying or deterioration.

3.3 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

A. Set or construct drainage structures in the proper location at the invert elevations indicated on the Drawings. Set structures plumb and true on well-compacted gravel base. Construct cast-in-place inlet lids with manhole lids or grate castings at the proper elevation.

B. Install precast reinforced concrete drainage structures in a manner to ensure watertight construction. Repair or replace damaged precast concrete units as required to obtain watertight construction. Install pipe culverts using approved gaskets for sealing joints.

C. Protect newly installed drainage inlets to preclude sediment from any tributary areas from

entering the structures until such areas have been stabilized.


3.4 EXISTING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Cleanly cut new openings in existing drainage structures, to accept new pipe culvert. Carefully install the new piping and join to the existing structure. Make connection using non-shrink grouted as required to provide a neat, sturdy, watertight connection.

B. Remove and replace existing pipe culverts that have been damaged to such an extent that they cannot be field repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, plug abandoned storm drains with slurry backfill as

defined in Section 31 23 00, Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling. 3.5 CONCRETE DITCH PAVING

A. Excavate the ditch subgrade to the required depth. Remove all soft or yielding material and replace it with suitable material, thoroughly compacted.

B. Provide concrete forms that are clean, oiled, free from warps, sufficiently strong to maintain

alignment, and securely staked and braced. Spade or vibrate the concrete to prevent honeycombing and finish with a wood float. Round all edges with a 1/4-inch edger.

C. Tool transverse contraction joints with a 1/4-inch jointer or saw cut joints at intervals not greater

than 5 feet measured longitudinally along the flow line.

D. Install an expansion joint at each structure with a space of not less than 1-inch left between the paving and the structure. Fill the space with poured bituminous joint filler. Maximum spacing of expansion joints shall be 50 feet and at all structures.

3.6 FIELD TESTING

A. Unless otherwise noted, conduct testing of trenching subgrade and backfill in accordance Section 31 23 00, Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.

B. Unless otherwise noted, conduct testing of cast-in-place concrete, including air and slump, in

accordance with Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Take a minimum of one (1) set of concrete test cylinders for each class of concrete placed each day, for each 50 cubic-yards of concrete.

C. Conduct sampling and testing of concrete ditch paving in accordance with Section 03 30 00,

Cast-In-Place Concrete. Test concrete for slump, temperature and air content at delivery at a frequency of one (1) per 500 linear-feet of ditch paving, a minimum of one (1) each per day. Cast one (1) set of cylinders for compression testing every 500 linear-feet of ditch paving; a minimum of one (1) set per day.


3.7 RESTORATION

A. Prior to commencement of work, strip and stockpile the topsoil from all areas to be disturbed by storm drainage construction. Spread, disk, and lightly roll topsoil over all graded areas after the installation of structures.

B. Apply seed, fertilizer and mulch in accordance with Section 32 92 19, Seeding.


Willhaf House Interior Restoration Van Buren, Arkansas ... · 5210 Grand Avenue Van Buren, Arkansas...

Documents

Transcript of Willhaf House Interior Restoration Van Buren, Arkansas ... · 5210 Grand Avenue Van Buren, Arkansas...